Applications Manual 302 - PCP

806321.
302(x10)
806432.302(x27)
PCP Software
with AHD™ Dynamic

Bus Regulation
Compatible with Unico
VPC® System
Application Guide
Start-Up, Operation and Troubleshooting
CD-ROM Enclosed
Notices
Copyright © 2012 Unico, Inc.
All Rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or reduced to any
electronic media or machine-readable format without the prior written permission of Unico, Inc.
At the time of printing, features of the product described herein are protected by United States
Patent Number 7,168,924. Other patents are pending.
The information contained in the manual is considered accurate to the best knowledge of the
supplier at the time of publication. The manufacturer assumes no liability for errors that may exist.
The supplier reserves the right to change data and specifications without notice.
All trade designations are provided without reference to the rights of their respective owners.
Printed in the United States of America
Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

Table of Contents
1 Safety Information............................................................................................................. 7
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 7
1.2 Conventions Used ............................................................................................................................. 7
1.2.1 Attention Symbol Definition................................................................................................................7
1.3 General Precautions .......................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Service Precautions........................................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Application Precautions ..................................................................................................................... 8
1.6 Safe Service Practices ...................................................................................................................... 9
2 About the Manual ............................................................................................................ 10

2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Contents .......................................................................................................................................... 10
2.2.1 What is covered ............................................................................................................................... 10
2.2.2 What is not covered ......................................................................................................................... 10
2.3 Intended Audience........................................................................................................................... 10
3 Application Overview ..................................................................................................... 12

3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Hardware Requirements .................................................................................................................. 12
3.2.1 Drive Models.................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Control Module ................................................................................................................................ 12
3.2.3 Optional Modules............................................................................................................................. 12
3.2.4 Operator Interface ........................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Application Description .................................................................................................................... 12
3.3.1 Application Interface ........................................................................................................................ 12
3.3.1.1 UEdit® Software .............................................................................................................................. 13
3.4 Application Features ........................................................................................................................ 13
3.4.1 Sensor-Free Control ........................................................................................................................ 13
3.4.2 System Monitors .............................................................................................................................. 13
3.4.3 System Data Collection ................................................................................................................... 13
3.4.4 System Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 14
3.4.5 Daily Gauging .................................................................................................................................. 14
3.4.6 Operational Modes .......................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.7 System Controllers .......................................................................................................................... 14
3.4.8 AHD™ Dynamic Bus Regulation ..................................................................................................... 14
4 Application Wiring .......................................................................................................... 15

4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 15
4.2 Wiring Standards and Codes ........................................................................................................... 15
4.2.1 Wiring Precautions .......................................................................................................................... 15
4.2.2 100MHz Control Module Connectors............................................................................................... 16
4.2.3 270MHz Control Module Connectors............................................................................................... 17
4.2.4 Compact 100MHz Control Module Connectors ............................................................................... 17
4.3 Control Module Serial Input Connection Descriptions ..................................................................... 17
4.3.1 Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistors ................................................................................. 17
4.3.1.1 Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistor Location .................................................................... 18
4.3.2 RJ-45 Connector Pin-Outs............................................................................................................... 18
4.3.3 Console Port—Asynchronous Serial Interface................................................................................. 18
4.3.3.1 Console Port Serial Connections at the Terminal Block .................................................................. 19
4.3.4 Port A—Auxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #1 ........................................................................ 19
4.3.5 Port B—Auxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #2 ........................................................................ 19
4.4 Digital Input and Output Connections (TB1)) ................................................................................... 19
4.4.1 Control Module Digital Output Connection (TB1)) ........................................................................... 19
4.4.2 Control Module Digital Input Connections (TB1)) ............................................................................ 19
4.5 Analog Input and Output Connections (TB2)) .................................................................................. 20
4.5.1 4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors ............................................................................................. 20
4.5.1.1 4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors Location............................................................................... 21
4.5.2 Control Module Analog Input Connections (TB2)) ........................................................................... 21
4.5.3 Control Module DC Power Supplies (TB2)) ..................................................................................... 21

Table of Contents
4.5.4 Control Module Analog Output Connection (TB2)) .......................................................................... 21

4.6 Analog Interface Module.................................................................................................................. 22
4.6.1 Typical Analog Input Wiring ............................................................................................................. 22
4.6.2 Typical Analog Output Wiring .......................................................................................................... 22
4.6.3 Analog Interface Module Connections ............................................................................................. 22
5 Operator Interface ........................................................................................................... 24

5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 24
5.1.1 LCD Display and Keypad ................................................................................................................ 24
5.1.2 GLCD Display and Keypad .............................................................................................................. 25
5.2 Basic Keypad Key Functions ........................................................................................................... 25
5.3 Menu Navigation.............................................................................................................................. 25
5.3.1 LCD Display..................................................................................................................................... 27
5.3.2 GLCD Display .................................................................................................................................. 28
5.3.3 Screen Power Saver........................................................................................................................ 30
5.3.4 Power-Up Display ............................................................................................................................ 30
5.3.5 Main Displays .................................................................................................................................. 31
5.3.5.1 LCD Main Displays .......................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.5.2 GLCD Main Displays ....................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.6 Bar-graph Display ............................................................................................................................ 31
5.3.7 Fault Display .................................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.8 Setup Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.8.1 Dictionary......................................................................................................................................... 31
5.3.8.1.1 Dictionary Setup Parameters ........................................................................................................... 31
5.3.8.1.2 Editing Numeric Parameters ............................................................................................................ 32
5.3.8.1.3 Editing Hexadecimal Numeric Parameters ...................................................................................... 32
5.3.8.1.4 Editing Enumerated Parameters...................................................................................................... 32
5.3.8.2 Drive Test ........................................................................................................................................ 32
5.3.8.3 System ID Test ................................................................................................................................ 32
5.3.8.4 AC Tests .......................................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.8.4.1 Non-moving AC Test ....................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.8.4.2 Uncoupled AC Test ......................................................................................................................... 33
5.3.8.5 Faults Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 33
5.3.8.5.1 Fault, Warning and Event Mask Displays ........................................................................................ 33
5.3.8.5.2 Editing the Mask .............................................................................................................................. 33
5.3.8.5.3 Fault and Warning History Display .................................................................................................. 33
5.3.8.5.4 Event History Display ...................................................................................................................... 33
5.3.8.6 Archive Menu................................................................................................................................... 33
5.3.8.6.1 Serial Connections .......................................................................................................................... 34
5.3.8.6.2 The Archive File............................................................................................................................... 34
5.3.8.6.3 Data Upload..................................................................................................................................... 34
5.3.8.6.4 Data Download ................................................................................................................................ 35
5.3.8.6.5 Data Default..................................................................................................................................... 35
5.3.8.6.6 Data Recall ...................................................................................................................................... 35
5.3.8.6.7 Data Store ....................................................................................................................................... 35
5.3.8.6.8 Data Erase....................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.8.6.9 Data Status ...................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.8.6.10 Reset ID .......................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.8.7 Help Display .................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.8.7.1 Feedback ......................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.8.7.2 Analog ............................................................................................................................................. 36
5.3.8.7.3 PIO .................................................................................................................................................. 36
5.3.8.7.4 Clock ............................................................................................................................................... 36
5.3.8.7.5 Process ........................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.8.7.6 Calendar .......................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.8.7.7 Controller ......................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.8.7.8 SSI................................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3.8.7.9 Mem ................................................................................................................................................ 37
5.3.8.7.10 Global Dictionary ............................................................................................................................. 38
5.3.8.7.11 Network Map ................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3.8.7.12 NVMEM ........................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3.8.7.13 Ports ................................................................................................................................................ 38

Table of Contents
5.3.8.7.14 UEdit® Utility ................................................................................................................................... 38

5.3.8.7.15 System Errors .................................................................................................................................. 39
5.3.8.8 Chart Display (Requires GLCD) ...................................................................................................... 39
5.4 Password Protection........................................................................................................................ 39
5.4.1 Dictionary Access Levels ................................................................................................................. 39
5.4.1.1 Menu Item Access Levels ................................................................................................................ 39
5.4.2 Password Protection Setup Options ................................................................................................ 40
5.4.2.1 Only level 1 password is non-zero ................................................................................................... 40
5.4.2.2 Only level 1 password and level 2 password are non-zero.............................................................. 40
5.4.2.3 All three password levels are non-zero ............................................................................................ 40
5.4.2.4 Only level 3 password is non-zero ................................................................................................... 40
5.4.2.5 Only level 3 password and level 2 password are non-zero.............................................................. 40
5.4.3 Password Selection ......................................................................................................................... 40
5.4.3.1 Global Parameter: level 1 password ............................................................................................... 40
5.4.3.4 Global Parameter: lockout time ...................................................................................................... 41
5.4.3.4.1 At the Keypad: ................................................................................................................................. 41
5.4.3.4.2 From UEDIT® Software or UEDIT LITE™ Software........................................................................ 41
5.4.3.5 Global Parameter: lockout status.................................................................................................... 41
5.4.3.5.1 At the Keypad: ................................................................................................................................. 41
5.4.4 Lost Passwords ............................................................................................................................... 41
6 Application Dictionary Menus ....................................................................................... 42

6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.1 Parameter Visibility Control ............................................................................................................. 42
6.1.2 Parameter Unit Selection................................................................................................................. 42
6.1.2.1 Keypad Units ................................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.2.2 UEdit® Software Units ..................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.2.3 Console Units .................................................................................................................................. 42
6.1.2.4 Port A Units ..................................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.2.5 Port B Units ..................................................................................................................................... 42
6.1.2.6 User Definable Units........................................................................................................................ 42
6.2 Operator Menu ................................................................................................................................ 43
6.3 Quick Start Menu ............................................................................................................................. 46
6.4 Feature List Menu............................................................................................................................ 51
6.5 Pump Speed Menu .......................................................................................................................... 52
6.6 Control Menu ................................................................................................................................... 57
6.7 Fault/Event Menu ............................................................................................................................ 62
6.8 Motor/Xformer Menu ........................................................................................................................ 67
6.9 Drive Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 71
6.10 Drive Reg Menu............................................................................................................................... 73
6.11 Signal In Menu................................................................................................................................. 82
6.12 Signal Out Menu ............................................................................................................................ 107
6.13 Digital I/O Menu ............................................................................................................................. 111
6.14 Comm Menu .................................................................................................................................. 118
6.15 AHD™ Menu ................................................................................................................................. 131
6.16 Pump Menu ................................................................................................................................... 133
6.17 Reservoir Menu ............................................................................................................................. 137
6.18 Fluid Level Test Menu ................................................................................................................... 139
6.19 Power Menu .................................................................................................................................. 150
6.20 Generator Menu ............................................................................................................................ 152
6.21 EOP™ Enhanced Oil Production Controller Menu ........................................................................ 157
6.22 Daily Gauge Menu ......................................................................................................................... 167
6.23 Display Menu ................................................................................................................................. 169
6.24 Simulate Menu............................................................................................................................... 171
6.25 Well Name Menu ........................................................................................................................... 174
6.26 GMC® File Menu ........................................................................................................................... 175
7 System Initialization...................................................................................................... 176

7.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 176

Table of Contents
7.2 Motor Parameter Entry .................................................................................................................. 176

7.3 Parameter Test Utilities ................................................................................................................. 176
7.3.1 Current Feedback Calibration ........................................................................................................ 176
7.3.2 Stator Resistance Test .................................................................................................................. 177
7.3.3 Leakage Inductance Test .............................................................................................................. 177
7.3.4 Motor Phasing Test ....................................................................................................................... 177
7.3.5 Field Current Test .......................................................................................................................... 177
7.3.6 Slip Frequency Test....................................................................................................................... 177
7.3.7 Motor Torque Test ......................................................................................................................... 177
7.4 System Gain Test .......................................................................................................................... 178
7.5 Application Start-Up....................................................................................................................... 178
8 Faults, Warnings and Events ....................................................................................... 179

8.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 179
8.2 Fault System.................................................................................................................................. 179
8.2.1 History ........................................................................................................................................... 179
8.2.2 Fault Masks ................................................................................................................................... 179
8.2.3 Hardware Faults ............................................................................................................................ 181
8.2.4 Software Faults.............................................................................................................................. 183
8.2.5 Application Faults .......................................................................................................................... 186
8.2.6 User Faults .................................................................................................................................... 188
9 Tables ............................................................................................................................. 192

9.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 192
9.2 Switching Frequencies .................................................................................................................. 192
10 Index ............................................................................................................................... 193

1 Safety Information
1.1 Overview
This section states important safety information that must be followed when setting up, operating
and troubleshooting the application. Study this information carefully before working with the
application, drive and driven equipment. Failure to follow these instructions may lead to personal
injury, death or cause damage to the drive, motor or driven equipment.
1.2 Conventions Used

The following notation convention is used throughout this manual to indicate information important
to personal safety or machine hazards.
1.2.1 Attention Symbol Definition

! Attention
This symbol identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to
personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss.
1.3 General Precautions

! Attention
Only qualified personnel with the proper skills, instruction and familiarity with the
machinery, drive, driven equipment and its applications (hereinafter referred to the
system) should install, start-up, operate, troubleshoot, and maintain the drive. Such
personnel must be familiar with the electrical and mechanical components of the system
to perform the procedures outlined in this manual and its companion documents,
including, but not limited to, the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting and
Maintenance and the Start-Up Checklist. Failure to comply may result in personal injury,
death and/or system equipment damage.
! Attention
Failure to take proper precautions for electrical hazard could cause injury or death.
! Attention
Failure to follow instructions in this document and industry safety standards could damage
the drive and void the manufacturer’s warranty.
1.4 Service Precautions

! Attention
Always disconnect and lock out all electrical supplies before working on the drive or
associated system equipment. Do this before touching any electrical or mechanical
components associated with the system.
! Attention
Always ensure that mechanical energy sources are locked out before working on the drive
or associated system equipment. Do this before touching any electrical or mechanical
components associated with the system.

! Attention
High voltage may be present even when all electrical power supplies are disconnected.
After switching off electrical power, wait at least fifteen minutes for bus circuit capacitors to
discharge stored electrical energy before working on the drive or associated equipment.
Use an appropriate voltmeter to further verify that the capacitors have fully discharged
before beginning work. Do not rely exclusively on the bus voltage indicator. Dangerous
voltage levels may remain even when the indicator is off.
! Attention
High voltage may be present at the motor output terminals whenever input power is
applied or bus voltage is present whether the motor is moving or not.
! Attention
If an aluminum electrolytic capacitor in the drive fails from a build-up of internal pressure,
the case of the capacitor may rupture or the safety vent will operate spraying electrolyte
liquid and/or vapor from the capacitor. If a capacitor ruptures or vent:
• Avoid contact with the liquid
• Avoid inhaling the vapors and ventilate the area
• If your skin comes in contact with the electrolyte, flush it immediately with cold
water
• If electrolyte gets in your eyes, immediately remove any contact lenses and flush
the open eyes with plenty of clean water
• If electrolyte is ingested, dilute it by drinking warm water and seek immediate
medical attention
! Attention
Before energizing the motor, verify that there are no loose components associated with
the drive or drive train and that the motor motion will not result in injury or death to
persons or damage to the system equipment.
! Attention
The drive may be sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Static precautions are required
when servicing or repairing the unit.
1.5 Application Precautions

! Attention
An incorrectly installed or operated drive can result in damage to the equipment it controls.
Make certain installation and operating specifications are followed.
! Attention
Emergency stop devices shall be located at each operator control station and at other
operating stations where emergency stop may be required. Control inputs do not
generate an emergency stop of the motor and do not remove power that can cause
hazardous conditions. Regardless of the operating state, the drive’s motor output
terminals may be at dangerous voltage levels whenever input power is applied or the bus
is charged.
! Attention
When serial communications connections are made to the drive, the operation of the
drive, motor and system equipment may be started, changed and/or stopped at any time
in response to the commands received by the drive from a remote serial device. When

such serially commanded operation could cause personal injury or death or damage to the
system equipment, personnel on site shall remove serial connections to the drive to
prevent receipt of serially generated operational commands.
! Attention
The drive is may start automatically when power is applied or after a fault trip if the auto-
restart functionality has been enabled. The auto-restart functionality must not be enabled
when hazardous conditions might arise from such action.
1.6 Safe Service Practices

• Follow industry-recognized safety practices, including, but not limited to:
• Use only one hand to hold test equipment probes
• Wear approved eye, foot, body and head protection
• Stand on insulated material
• Use an isolated oscilloscope
• Keep unnecessary personnel out of the work area
• Never leave a drive enclosure open or unattended

2 About the Manual
2.1 Overview
This section describes the contents and intended audience of this document.
2.2 Contents
2.2.1 What is covered
• Safety Information, discusses safety hazards and procedures important to anyone working with
the drive, system and/or application.
• About the Manual, describes the contents and intended audience of this document.
• Application Overview describes the application and lists the application’s features.
• Application Wiring, describes input and output connections specific to the application. For
more information refer to the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
• Operator Interface, describes how to use the keypad and operator display to navigate the
menus and operate the drive.
• Application s provides parameter tables and individual parameter descriptions on a men-by-
menu basis.
• System Initialization is a short treatment of the drive and motor initialization. For full treatment,
refer to the Start-Up Checklist.
• The Faults, Warnings and Events section discusses the drive’s fault, warning and event
conditions and their set up. For troubleshooting, use this section to determine the possible
cause of these conditions.
• Tables, includes tables of appropriate input values for drive size dependant parameters.
2.2.2 What is not covered

This manual does not address basic hardware and firmware aspects of the drive that are covered
in the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting and Maintenance and firmware instruction
manuals. Please refer to other documents for:
• Receiving and unpacking instructions
• Hardware features and specifications
• Mechanical installation instructions
• Electrical installation instructions
• Drive troubleshooting, maintenance and spare parts
• Detailed listing of basic drive parameters
• Drive Setup and auto-tuning procedures
• Application setup and auto-tuning procedures
• interface setup and diagnostic utilities
2.3 Intended Audience

The manual is intended for anyone who will be installing, operating and servicing the drive and
system equipment. Installation should be performed by qualified electrical personnel to ensure that
correct electrical practices and applicable electrical codes are applied. Start-up and operation
should be performed by personnel familiar with both the drive and the machinery or equipment
controls or is controlled by.

The audience is expected to have a basic knowledge of physical and electrical fundamentals,
electrical wiring practices and components and electrical schematics. No prior experience with the
drive is presumed or required.
! Attention
Follow Instructions.
You can prevent personal injury or death and damage to the drive or system equipment by
carefully following the procedure outlined in the documents.
! Attention
Follow Regulations.
All electrical work should conform to the National Electrical Code as well as all state and
local government regulations. Please familiarize yourself with these regulations.
! Attention
Read all documents first.
Read this manual as well as the Drive Guide to Installation, Troubleshooting, firmware
instruction manuals and Maintenance and Start-Up Checklist entirely before installing,
operating or servicing the drive and/or system equipment.

3 Application Overview
3.1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the Artificial Lift—PCP Application program 805791.301. It
identifies its hardware requirements and briefly describes its features.
3.2 Hardware Requirements

The PCP Application is compatible with the following drive models and other hardware.
3.2.1 Drive Models

• 1100/1105/1110/1130/1140/1200
3.2.2 Control Module

• 100 MHz (X10—PN 323-546, 323-547, 323-397)
• Compact 100 MHz (X10—PN 323-656, 323-0607)
3.2.3 Optional Modules

• Analog Interface 8 Inputs, 4 Outputs Module (PN 321-557)
• Mass Data Storage Memory Module (SD-RAM) Expansion Module (PN 323-863, 712-333,
925-930)
• MaxStream 900 MHz RF Wireless Module (PN 924-185)
• MaxStream 2.4 GHz RF Wireless Module (PN 924-186)
• Bluetooth® Communication Module (PN 712-334, 713-335)
• Encoder Interface Module (PN 316-887)
• Dual Encoder Interface Module (PN 321-952)
• Resolver Interface Module with Encoder Emulation (PN 322-096)
• Anybus Serial Interface Module
3.2.4 Operator Interface

• 16-key keypad 2x24 line Display Screen (PN 203-046)
• 16-key keypad 16x40 line Graphic Screen (PN 203-181)
3.3 Application Description

The drive and associated application provides a number of features specifically designed for the
operation of PCP pumping units. It includes both sensor and sensorless level control ability.
3.3.1 Application Interface

Several mechanisms may be used to interface with the application. These include direct input at
the drive enclosure, serially via hard-wire connection, serially via RF Modem, serially via
Bluetooth™ connectivity.
• 16-key keypad and operator display.
• Menu dictionary items (parameters) have controlled visibility which “hides” those parameters
which are not in use to simplify Menu usage and navigation.
• An embedded parameter troubleshooter to assist in avoiding parameter entry errors.
• Imperial or Metric parameter unit display.

• User selectable volume, flow and pressure units.
• A “screen-saver” feature that turns off the display when unused for power economy.
• A ten-parameter user definable main screen display area.
• Software for Windows PC. This software is included with the application purchase.
• Software for Palm OS handheld devices. This software is included with the application
purchase.
3.3.1.1 UEdit® Software

UEdit is a suite of tools that run on a PC using Windows XP, or 2000. These tools can be used to
configure and modify existing embedded drive programs. They can also be used to monitor,
simulate, and provide diagnostic information from the drive in real time.
• The application project, UDT (*.udt) File, may be used to serially set and/or monitor parameter
values in the dictionary Menus, Fault, Warning and Event Histories, Analog I/O, Digital I/O.
• The chart recorder tool allows the user to sample data and display it in a several graphical
formats, Y(t), X-Y, and Polar. The chart recorder configuration and recorded data, if any, can
be saved as UCR (*.ucr) files.
• The data sampler may used to sample signals in the drive in real time. The data can then be
stored to a file on a mass storage device, or recorded during viewing of the sampler on the PC.
Multiple samplers can be configured to run on a single schedule that can be setup to trigger
from signal conditions. The data sampler configuration can be saved as UDM (*.udm) files.
The data sampler recorded data, is be saved as UDH (*.udh) files.
• The system monitor may be used monitor multiple signals for multiple drives in real time. The
data can then be stored to a file on a mass storage device, or recorded during viewing of the
sampler on the PC. Multiple samplers can be configured to run on a single schedule that can
be setup to trigger from signal conditions. The system monitor configuration can be saved as
USM (*.usm) files.
3.4 Application Features

3.4.1 Sensor-Free Control
This application can control the pumping system without the need for a downhole pressure sensor.
This is achieved through the use of the embedded pumping unit, down-hole-pump, and reservoir
models.
3.4.2 System Monitors

• A pump flow monitor provides a continuous estimate of pump flow without the need for
additional instrumentation.
• A power monitor.
• Input, output, motor, and lift power monitors.
• Energy efficiency monitors.
3.4.3 System Data Collection

• Time-stamped event and fault logging.
• Time-stamped parameter user-definable Data Sampler with optional Mass Data Storage
Module.
• Optional multi-channel analog input data logging.
• Production and power meters.
• Daily gauging.
• User selectable digital (discrete) outputs.

3.4.4 System Data Output
• User selectable digital (discrete) outputs. Provides for notification of motor status, fault status,
maintenance required and service callouts.
• Optional multi-channel analog output data.
3.4.5 Daily Gauging

• Fluid, oil, gas, and water production.
• Fluid flow rate.
• Power usage.
• Energy consumption.
• Run time.
• Average fluid level and pump speed.
3.4.6 Operational Modes

• A pump speed selector provides for speeds from external potentiometers, internal preset
parameters or serial communication channels, or multiple PID control methods on pressure or
level, and sensor or estimate.
• An Auto-Restarts mode that allows restarting operation from power-loss or faults.
• Auto-Restarts allowable
• Calendar Controller allowable
• Timer Mode Controller allowable
• A Hand Mode-Drive may not enter a standby state where it might automatically start or stop
operation.
• Auto-Restarts disallowed
• Calendar Controller disallowed
• Timer Mode Controller disallowed
3.4.7 System Controllers

• A motoring power limiter.
• A start controller allows for operation at preset speed, current and torque levels to allow for
system warming.
• A Calendar Control controls power usage by limiting operation by time of day, weekday or
weekend and month.
• A Timer Controller provides a simple timer on/off control without the need for need for
additional instrumentation.
3.4.8 AHD™ Dynamic Bus Regulation

• Reduces electrical harmonics on the incoming line.

4 Application Wiring
4.1 Overview
This section provides electrical installation information specific to the application. It defines the
inputs and outputs and gives control-wiring examples that supplement the information provided in
the drive installation manual.
4.2 Wiring Standards and Codes

The installation crew is responsible for following the wiring plan produced by the design engineer
for the specific application. All wiring must conform to applicable national and local codes.
! Attention
The supplier cannot assume responsibility for compliance or non-compliance to any code
governing the proper installation of this unit. The following information is intended only as
a guide for proper installation. All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code
(NEC), described in publication NFPA No. 70. Local codes may overrule this information.
4.2.1 Wiring Precautions

Observe the following precautions when wiring the control signals:
• Always disconnect and lock out all electrical supplies before working on the drive or associated
system equipment.
• When disconnecting wires from the screw terminals, completely loosen the screws before
pulling out the wires
• Tie shields to Logic Common at one end only
• Twist differential (±) current input signals together

4.2.2 100MHz Control Module Connectors
PortB
PortA
Console

4.2.3 270MHz Control Module Connectors
4.2.4 Compact 100MHz Control Module Connectors
PortA
Console
4.3 Control Module Serial Input Connection

Descriptions
The drive provides both asynchronous and synchronous serial communication ports. Serial
communication connections are made at the Control Module. Serial communication protocols are
selected on a per-port basis. Available protocols include:
• Modbus RTU
• AnyBus
• ESP
• Drive Menu
• Remote Keypad
• Modbus RTU Master, including A Well, Zenith, and Generic
®
For AnyBus and MaxStream™ serial communication modules please refer to the module
manufacturers’ instructions.
4.3.1 Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistors

When networking two or more drives for either synchronous or asynchronous communications,
remove the terminating resistors in all drives except the last one. With a synchronous network, this
is the slave drive furthest from the master.
Pull-up and pull-down resistors are generally required on the receive lines of the host computer to
prevent the host from receiving garbage and to establish the ground reference for the serial port of
the drive. In some networks, it may be necessary to remove the pull-up and pull-down resistors on
the receive lines of the drive.

4.3.1.1 Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistor Location
Compact 100 MHz

Resistor 100 MHz
R135 (Console Port) R90 (Console Port)
(121 Ω)
R27 (Port A) R82 (Port A)
Terminating
R75 (Port B) R126 (Port B)
R134 R92
(1.5 kΩ)
R15 R82
Pull-up
R74 R127
R137 R91
(1.5 kΩ)
R26 R83
Pull-down
R83 R128
4.3.2 RJ-45 Connector Pin-Outs
RS-232 RS-422/485
Pin
1 +5 V DC +5 V DC
2 +5 V DC +5 V DC
3 Receive Receive (+)
4 Logic Common Receive (-)
5 Logic Common Transmit (-)
6 Transmit Transmit (+)
7 Logic Common Logic Common
8 Logic Common Logic Common
4.3.3 Console Port—Asynchronous Serial Interface

For the Console Port’s isolated Asynchronous Serial Communications, either TB1-1 through TB1-4
or only one of the RJ-45 style connectors labeled J11 and J12 on the 100 MHz Control Module and
J1 and J3 on the Compact 100 MHz Control module may be used. Only one connection choice
may be made.

4.3.3.1 Console Port Serial Connections at the Terminal Block
• TB1-1 Transmit+
• TB1-2 Transmit-
• TB1-3 Receive-
• TB1-4 Receive+
4.3.4 Port A—Auxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #1

For Port A’s isolated Asynchronous Serial Communications, use the RJ-45 style connectors labeled
J6 on the 100 MHz Control Module and J4 on the Compact 100 MHz Control module.
4.3.5 Port B—Auxiliary Asynchronous Serial Interface #2

For Port B’s isolated Asynchronous Serial Communications, use the RJ-45 style connectors labeled
J3 on the 100 MHz Control Module and is not available on the Compact 100 MHz Control module.
4.4 Digital Input and Output Connections (TB1))

Digital inputs and outputs are connected at the terminal block labeled TB1 on the control module.
4.4.1 Control Module Digital Output Connection (TB1))

There are 6 user-definable digital outputs that a parametrically multiplexed to provide signals to
operational states within the application. The user defines the functionality of each output by
selecting from a list.
• TB1-5 Functionality controlled by Digital I/O Menu digital out 0 select parameter
4.4.2 Control Module Digital Input Connections (TB1))

Digital Inputs need to sink 1mA to Logic common to assert the input.
• TB1-11 Logic Common for asserting digital inputs
• TB1-12 Functionality controlled by Digital I/O Menu digital in 0 select parameter
• TB1-21 Hand Mode Enable
• TB1-22 Auto Mode Enable
• TB1-23 Run Enable
• TB1-24 +5 V DC. A regulated supply used to bias local logic devices

4.5 Analog Input and Output Connections (TB2))
Three on-board Analog Input Terminals and two Analog Output Terminals are connected at
terminal block TB2 on the control module.
Analog input signals may be either 0 to ±10 V DC or 4 to 20 mA devices. To convert an analog
input to a 4 to 20 mA signal, install a 499Ω load resistor.
The Optional Analog Interface Module which mounts on the control module and provides eight
additional inputs and four additional outputs.
4.5.1 4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors

The controller has on-board 499Ω load resistor terminals. Place resistor in appropriate slot.
Channel 100 MHz Compact 100 MHz 270 MHz

R54
R141 R94
ADC 1 (TB2-2)
ADC 2 (TB2-3) R352 R93 R55
ADC 3 (TB2-4) R338 R95 R56

4.5.1.1 4-20 mA Analog Input Load Resistors Location
100 MHz Controller—Above TB1 Compact 100 MHz Controller—Right of TB2
270 MHz Controller – Above TB1
4.5.2 Control Module Analog Input Connections (TB2))

• TB2-1 +24 V DC. An unregulated supply used to power local I/O devices
• TB2-2 Functionality assigned by Signal In menu source parameters
• TB2-5 Analog Common
4.5.3 Control Module DC Power Supplies (TB2))

• TB2-6 Logic Common.
• TB2-7 +10 V DC Regulated Power Supply
• TB2-8 -10 V DC Regulated Power Supply
4.5.4 Control Module Analog Output Connection (TB2))

• TB2-9 Functionality assigned by Analog Out Menu dac 1 select parameter
• TB2-10 Functionality assigned by Analog Out Menu dac 2 select parameter

4.6 Analog Interface Module
The Optional Analog Interface Module which mounts on the control module and provides eight
additional inputs and four additional outputs.
4.6.1 Typical Analog Input Wiring
4.6.2 Typical Analog Output Wiring
4.6.3 Analog Interface Module Connections
Connector Analog Name Description

CON2-1 ADC4(+) Functionality assigned by Signal In menu source parameters
CON2-2 ADC4(-) Functionality assigned by Signal In menu source parameters
CON2-5 Logic Common

Connector Analog Name Description
CON2-10 DAC3 Functionality assigned by Signal Out Menu dac 3 select parameter
CON2-11 Logic Common
CON2-20 ADC11(+) Functionality assigned by Signal In Menu source parameters
CON2-21 ADC11(-) Functionality assigned by Signal In Menu source parameters

5 Operator Interface
5.1 Overview
The keypad and display located on the front of the drive or enclosure may consist of a 4x4 keypad
and a 2x24 LCD character liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred as LCD) or a 16x40 GLCD
graphical liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred as GLCD). Access to all drive parameters as
well as test, diagnostic and help utilities is through the keypad and display. The keypad consists of
six control keys and ten number keys.
5.1.1 LCD Display and Keypad

5.1.2 GLCD Display and Keypad
5.2 Basic Keypad Key Functions

Key Name Description
[Fn] Function Key. Selects the alternate function of other keys
[0] - [9] Number Keys Used to enter a value or select an item
[-/.] Minus/Point Key Used to enter a decimal point when pressed alone.
Enters a minus sign when pressed with the [Fn] key.
[↑/↓] Up/Down Key Moves down a list when pressed alone.
Moves up a list when pressed with the [Fn] key.
[Quit] Quit Key Aborts a revised parameter entry, aborts a test procedure
or navigates up through the menus. .
[Del] Delete Key Backspaces and/or deletes a number or character when
entering parameter values.
[Ent] Enter Key Enters a revised parameter value or navigates down
through the menus.
[Fn] + [0] Clear Issues a fault reset request to the controller on the Active
Fault Display.
Clears various display items in the Help Menu
Clears one entry in the F/W or Event History Menus
Forces off all fault masks in the Fault Mask Display.
[Fn] + [1] Set Clears all entries in the F/W or Event History Menus
Forces on all fault masks in the Fault Mask Display.
5.3 Menu Navigation

At the keypad, menus are navigated using the keypad using the
Key Action Description

Key Action Description
[Ent] Enter Menu Navigates down to the next level of the Main Display or a
selected sub-menu of the Setup Menu
[Quit] Exit Menu Navigates up through the menus to return to the previous
level of the Main Display or exits a sub-menu of the Setup
Menu.
[0] - [9] Direct Select Used to enter a directly select a menu item
[↑/↓] Scroll Next Scrolls to the next menu item.
[Fn] + [↑/↓] Scroll Previous Scrolls to the previous menu item.

5.3.1 LCD Display
Power-up Display
PCP Pump Drive
Ent Operator Display Bar Graph Display Setup Menu Display

Ent
0.00 Amps 0.0 ft
.........|......... Setup Menu
0.00 ftlb KEYPAD SPEED pump spm 7.3 spm 1.Dictionary
Ent
0.0 Hertz 0.0 psi

These three screens Setup Menu
0.00 hp MOTOR OFF
automatically rotate 2.Drive Test
0 Volts 0 bpd
0.0 rpm MOTOR OFF
Setup Menu
3.System ID Test
This set of user display
pump intake prs screens automatically
0.0 psi rotate
Setup Menu
(Quick Menu Edit Mode) 4.AC Test
0 keypad speed 0 keypad speed

100.0 rpm 100.0 rpm
0 Ent
Setup Menu
5.Faults
1 fluid over pump setp 1 fluid over pump setp
100.0 ft 100.0 ft
1 Ent Setup Menu

6.Archive
2 intake prs setpt 2 intake prs setpt
0.0 psi 0.0 psi
2 Ent
Setup Menu
7.Help Display
3 auto speed source 3 auto speed source
KEYPAD 0>KEYPAD
3 Ent
Setup Menu
4 external speed 4 external speed 8.Chart Display
50.0 rpm 00.0 rpm
4 Ent

5.3.2 GLCD Display

Power-up Display
PCP Pump Drive
Ent Operator Display Bar Graph Display Setup Menu

PCP Main Display Setup Menu
pump speed 0.0 rpm
running status AUTO RUN pump torque 0.00 ftlb
mtr speed 0.0 rpm 1 Dictionary
pump speed source KEYPAD SPD mtr frequency 0.0 Hz 2 Drive Test
mtr freq monitor 30.0 Hertz mtr torque 0.00 ftlb 3 System ID Test
torque 0.00 %rtd
fluid over pump monitor 57 ft mtr current 0.00 arms 4 AC Test
fluid flow monitor 536 bpd mtr voltage 0 vrms 5 Faults
pump intake prs 24.6 psi mtr power 0.00 hp 6 Archive
pump discharge prs 598.0 psi Ent
pump differential prs 573.4 psi
Ent bus voltage 634 Volts 7 Help Display
vsd current 0.00 amps 8 Chart Display
fluid temperature 100.0 F vsd current % 0.0 % ovld
motor temp value 121.6 F vsd voltage 0 volts
vsd power 0.00 hp
xfr current monitor 0.00 Amps r modulation index 0.00
xfr voltage monitor 0 Volts modulation state SINE
(Ent)er to edit-(Quit) to exit
**Values displayed here

are defined in the
PCP Gauge Display Display Dictionary.
gauge time 23.59 hh.mm ***Use arrows to

gauge run time 24.00 hh.mm
gauge fluid production 536 bls scroll between
gauge leakage 5 bls Bar Graph Displays.
gauge avg speed 0.0 Hertz
gauge avg level 100.3 ft
gauge power meter 0.0 kwh/day
gauge run time accum 7.35 hh.mm

gauge fluid production ac 0.0 bbl
gauge leakage acum 0.0 bbl
gauge avg speed accum 0.0 Hz
gauge avg level accum 9.06 ft
gauge power meter accum 0.0 kwh
(Quick Data Edit Mode)

PCP Quick Data
0 reset all meters
0 reset all meters DISABLE 0>DISABLE
1 keypad speed 30.0 Hz 0 Ent Ent
2 fluid over pump setpt 100.0 ft
3 intake prs setpt 0.0 psi
4 auto speed source KEYPAD Item number
5 external speed 1800.0 rpm

5.3.3 Screen Power Saver
The screen saver feature shuts off the power to the display when not in use. Press any key to re-
enable the display.
5.3.4 Power-Up Display

When the device has powered up, the drive identity screen will remain visible for a few seconds.
After a few seconds, the Main Display will be visible.

5.3.5 Main Displays
The Main Display screens show the current operating statistics of the pumping system such as
running status, pump speed source and mtr freq monitor.
5.3.5.1 LCD Main Displays

To access the User Defined Display use the [↑/↓] key to navigate to the next screen.
The Quick Data screens display the predefined parameters that may be modified without the need
to navigate to the Setup Menu Dictionary. Using the [↑/↓] key navigate through the list, returning to
the SRP Main Display.
Use the [Ent] key to navigate to the Bar-graph Display.
5.3.5.2 GLCD Main Displays

The User Defined Display with the GLCD is at the bottom of the Main Display.
The Gauge Display displays the daily gauged statistics and the accumulated values since the last
gauge time. The operator can navigate from the Main Display to the Gauge Menu using the [ ↑/↓]
key.
The Quick Data displays the predefined parameters that may be modified without the need to
navigate to the Setup Menu Dictionary. The operator can navigate from the Gauge Display to the
Quick Data using the [↑/↓] key.
Use the [Ent] key to navigate to the Bar-graph Display.
5.3.6 Bar-graph Display

In the Bar-graph Readout Display select variable values are displayed in bar-graph form on the
LCD, and numeric form on the GLCD to allow monitoring of the current operating conditions. The
operator can use the [↑/↓] key to scroll through the pre-defined list of parameters on the LCD.
Use the [Ent] key to navigate to the Setup Menu.
5.3.7 Fault Display

If a fault condition has occurred, the Fault Display will display the fault condition and the back-light
will flash. If the Fault Display is not shown, use the [Quit] key to navigate back until the Fault
Display is shown. Multiple faults will be displayed sequentially through the fault list one at a time.
To clear an existing fault condition, a fault reset request by selecting [Fn] + [0]. If a fault condition is
re-occurring, the fault screen will continue to display the fault until the condition no longer exists.
Faults displayed in capitol letters indicate that the drive was shut off by the fault.
5.3.8 Setup Menu

Setup Menu items provide access to drive parameters as well as test, diagnostic and help. There
are numerous items listed in the setup menu and each may contain several options and/or sub-
menus.
5.3.8.1 Dictionary
The dictionary contains dictionary segments—or Menus—of setup parameters. These menus are
used for the organization of the dictionary items (parameters) that define the operating
characteristics of the drive.
5.3.8.1.1 Dictionary Setup Parameters

The dictionary in the Setup Menu contains Menus of sub-sets of related global dictionary setup
parameters. These parameters are sequentially numbered as to their order in the dictionary list.
This number has no relation to the global dictionary number.
To access parameters, you may scroll using the [ ↑/↓] key or the [0] - [9] keys to jump directly to the
desired parameter. While scrolling, you may notice that some parameter numbers are skipped.
This is because certain parameters are hidden—not visible—if the nave no function for the selected

application configuration. To temporarily override visibility controls use menu visibility. To
permanently override visibility controls use visibility control.
5.3.8.1.2 Editing Numeric Parameters

To edit a selected numeric parameter, first press [Ent]. The parameter value becomes left justified
and the cursor flashes on the left-most digit of the value. Type the new value. Be sure to include a
decimal point and/or minus sign as appropriate. If necessary, press [Del] to delete a character. To
abort the edit and retain the previous value, press [Quit]. To accept the new value and exit the edit
mode, press [Ent]. The new value is now displayed. An error message will be displayed if the
value entered is beyond the minimum and maximum range limits for a parameter. Some
parameters cannot be edited. An exclamation mark "!" immediately following the parameter
number indicates that a parameter may not be edited.
5.3.8.1.3 Editing Hexadecimal Numeric Parameters

Numeric parameters can also be displayed and entered in hexadecimal formats. A parameter
displayed in hexadecimal format is denoted by prefixing the value with an ‘x’. To edit a selected
numeric parameter, first press [Ent]. The parameter value becomes left justified and the cursor
flashes on the left-most digit of the value. Type the new value. While the keypad does not contain
keys for hexadecimal digits “a” through “f”, Hexadecimal digits ‘a’ through ‘f’ are implemented using
function ‘1’ though ‘6’ respectively.
5.3.8.1.4 Editing Enumerated Parameters

Enumerated parameters are those whose values are chosen from a predefined list. To edit an
enumerated parameter, first press [Ent]. The parameter value becomes left justified and the cursor
flashes on the left-most digit of the value. Press [↑⁄↓] to scroll through the value list. Select the new
value. To revert to the original value, press [Del]. To abort the edit and retain the previous value,
press [Quit]. To accept the new value and exit the edit mode, press [Ent]. The new value is now
displayed.
5.3.8.2 Drive Test

The Drive Test routine provides test options to assist in performance verification during
commissioning and to assist in troubleshooting possible malfunctions. Drive test operates
independently from the application software, or any UEdit® software that is installed.
5.3.8.3 System ID Test

The System ID Test performs the test that determines the gain of the system (system gain) and
inertia of the motor and machine. This test is not suggested if the Un-coupled AC Test, described
below, is used.
5.3.8.4 AC Tests
The AC Test routine is used to setup and tune the AC control for the motor. This control will run
either the AC Induction or Synchronous (sometimes called DC Brushless motors. The control
converts the torque commands from the internal position/velocity/torque controller or external
velocity/torque commands into the AC current commands to the motor.
Upon entering the AC Test Utility, a series of questions are asked to give the software basic
information about the motor. Once the necessary data is entered, the routine performs the tests
that determine AC motor characteristics.
! Attention
Personnel should be experienced in understanding the AC Test and what is about to
occur. This test will cause the motor to stop and start.
5.3.8.4.1 Non-moving AC Test

The non-moving AC Test Mode should be used if the motor cannot be moved to accomplish the AC
Tuning. By selecting ‘NON MOVING’, the AC Test will not rotate the motor shaft during the tuning
tests, but instead calculate the appropriate values. This is the default test.

5.3.8.4.2 Uncoupled AC Test
The uncoupled AC Test Mode can be used if the motor shaft is not connected to the load. This test
requires the motor to be able to move, and may not work correctly with the motor downhole and
connected through a transformer.
5.3.8.5 Faults Menu

The Faults Menu provides access to the fault, warning and event sequential time-stamped
histories. Drive operating conditions may be configured—or masked—as a fault, warning or an
event. This menu provides the mask selection utility.
! Attention
Configuring a mask as a fatal fault will stop operation of the drive, however if the Auto-
Restart feature is enabled, the drive may restart operation.
! Attention
Configuring a mask as a warning or an event will not stop operation of the drive.
5.3.8.5.1 Fault, Warning and Event Mask Displays

The first line of the Fault Mask Display, Warning Mask Display and Event Mask Display shows a
binary representation of a portion of a fault or warning mask. Each bit value corresponds to a
specific fault condition. A value of 1 will enable recognition the fault, while a value of 0 will disable
recognition. For each fault in the list, only one of the Fault/Warning/Event Masks should be
enabled. The cursor flashes on the bit location corresponding to the selected fault. The second
line displays the fault number and description. Press [ ↑⁄↓] to scroll to the next fault. Hold [Fn] while
pressing [↑⁄↓] to scroll to the previous fault. The ">" symbol on the first line indicates that there are
additional bits beyond those currently visible.
5.3.8.5.2 Editing the Mask

To edit a fault mask, press [Ent]. An equal sign appears behind the description. The cursor flashes
just to the right of the equal sign. Type either [0] to disable or [1] to enable recognition of the fault
condition. To abort the edit and retain the previous value, press [Quit]. To enter the new value and
exit the edit mode, press [Ent]. The new value is now shown in the corresponding bit location on
the first line. To enter a value of 1 for all bits in the fault mask, hold [Fn] + [1]. To enter a value of 0
for all maskable bits in the fault mask, hold [Fn] + [0]. Certain critical faults are unmaskable. Their
bits in the fault mask cannot be edited and will retain a value of 1.
5.3.8.5.3 Fault and Warning History Display

The first line of the Fault History Display provides the number of the displayed fault, its description,
and the total number of faults contained in the list. The fault description appears in lowercase
characters if the fault was detected while the motor was disabled. It appears in uppercase
characters if the fault was detected while the motor was enabled or if an attempt was made to
enable the motor while the fault condition existed. The second line displays the date (in
day/month/year format) and time (in hours: minutes: seconds format) that the fault was recorded.
Press [↑⁄↓] to scroll to the next fault on the list. Hold [Fn] + [↑⁄↓] to scroll to the previous fault on the
list. The fault most recently detected is placed at the beginning of the list. To clear the currently
displayed fault, press [Fn] + [0]. To clear the entire fault history, press [Fn] + [1].
5.3.8.5.4 Event History Display

The first line of the Event History Display provides the number of the displayed event, its
description, and the total number of events contained in the list. The second line displays the date
(in day/month/year format) and time (in hours: minutes: seconds format) that the fault was
recorded. Press [↑⁄↓] to scroll to the next fault on the list. Hold [Fn] + [↑⁄↓] to scroll to the previous
fault on the list. The fault most recently detected is placed at the beginning of the list. To clear the
currently displayed event, press [Fn] + [0]. To clear the entire event history, press [Fn] + [1].
5.3.8.6 Archive Menu

The Archive Menu used to archive or restore setup parameters and storing or restoring data to non-
volatile flash memory.

It is good practice to archive data from the drive periodically or when modifications have been
made to parameters. Data archiving provides a permanent storage of these parameters to your
choice of media. Data archiving also provides an efficient method of initializing the drive with the
parameters that have been stored in the unlikely event that the drive must be replaced, or repaired.
The Archive Menu option is selected from the Setup Menu of the drive. Use archive to upload
parameters, download parameters, load defaults, recall programs and data, or store programs and
data.
5.3.8.6.1 Serial Connections

Connect the drive communication port to the PC using the connections outlined in the figure below.
Select and launch Term application or another application capable or archiving data. For the
purpose of simplicity, and commonality, this document will refer to PC Term, and MAC Term.
Any port on the drive can be used to data archive. Typically the console port or port on the
motherboard of the drive is used because this port is always available. Port A or Port B, if
available, on the S1100 drive can be used by configuring this port to run the drive menu. The serial
port can support several protocols, such as RTU, ESP, etc. When archiving, the protocol must be
set to DRIVE MENU, since the archive menu must be accessed before archiving. If the port
protocol is not set to DRIVE MENU, change the console protocol, porta protocol, or portb
protocol setup to DRIVE MENU, and cycle the power to the drive. (Refer to the communication
dictionary setups for more information of port protocols)
If the terminal program and the drive are communicating properly, the menu options for the drive
should be accessible from the host computer just as they are from the keypad of the drive. If the
menus are not accessible, verify the wiring of the serial cable, and the serial settings. Serial
settings for the drive are accessible from the Comm Menu for the port that is connected to the host
computer.
5.3.8.6.2 The Archive File

Any archived file is stored in text format so the file may be viewed from any text editor on a host
computer. The layout of the archive file shows the first line of the file with the program number and
revision of the application that has been archived. The second line of the file shows the date and
time the archive took place. The third line shows the units that the drive was in when it was
archived. Successive lines display all the dictionary items in the device in order first the dictionary
item number, the item name, the item value, the item units, and a checksum. The checksum is
compared when the elements are downloaded into the drive. If the item value is changed before
downloading, the checksum can be modified to “$$” to disregard the checksum verification.
Dictionary item names preceded by a “!” are readouts and may be any value. Fault masks are
displayed at the end of the archive file, although the mask values are located in the hardware mask
and the software mask items. The last line in the archive file should be “$END”. This indicates that
the archiving is complete.
5.3.8.6.3 Data Upload

Data upload stores the device data into a text file.
When the drive is communicating properly to the host computer, select the Archive menu from the
main setup menu using the terminal program that is connected to the drive. Do not make any
selections from the keypad, or the archiving will not work properly!
NOTE: When communicating to the drive, the ESC key on the host computer represents the QUIT
key on the keypad of the drive.
When the archive menu has been selected, several options will be offered. To upload data from
the device, select option 1 UPLOAD. When this option has been selected, the drive will display “$
Press any key:”. Before pressing any key, the terminal emulation program running on the host
computer must be ready to receive the stream of characters, and put them into a text file. From PC
Term select “Archive Text…” from the Data menu tab, or on MAC Term, select “Archive Text…”
from the File tab. When this selection is made, the standard file and directory options will be
offered, and an appropriate file name should be selected to indicate the name of the drive that the
data is coming from. When the file has been determined, the Archive text tab will be displayed with
a check mark indicating that file archiving is active.
NOTE: Values are archived in the position and velocity units displayed on the keypad.

Press any key to start the characters flowing from the device to the host computer. Do not interrupt
the stream, but wait the 20-30 seconds. When the stream has finished, “$END” followed by “$
Press any key:” will be displayed.
Before proceeding, turn off the data archiving that was enabled on the host computer, failure to do
so will result in a corrupted archive file! To turn of data archiving, select “Archive Text” from the
appropriate menu tab, and file archiving will be turned off if it has already been turned on.
5.3.8.6.4 Data Download

The data download operation accepts data from a text file. Once the drive is communicating
properly to the host computer, select the Archive Menu within the Setup Menu using the terminal
program that is connected to the drive. Do not make any selections from the keypad, or the
archiving will not work properly. When communicating to the drive, the ESC key on the host
computer represents the [Quit] key on the keypad of the drive.
When the archive menu has been selected, several options will be offered. To download data to
the device from the host computer, select DOWNLOAD. When this option has been selected, the
drive will display “$Press ESC to cancel”. The device is now ready to receive characters from the
archived text file. From PCTerm select “ASCII File Send…” from the Load Menu tab. On
MacTerm, select “ASCII File Dump…” from the Load Menu tab. When this selection is made, the
standard file and directory options will be offered, and an appropriate file name should be selected.
When the file has been determined, the file loading will commence and a loading status bar will
display data. When the down-loading has finished, one must cycle power to the drive to initiate any
startup variables.
5.3.8.6.5 Data Default

Loading default data can be accomplished by selecting the Default option from the Archive Menu.
When selected, the factory default values will be loaded into all the drive parameters. Typical
configurations do not use the factory defaults, so it is best to store specific defaults to EPROM by
using the Recall and Store options. Use the ESC key on the host computer to exit the load default
screen without loading defaults.
5.3.8.6.6 Data Recall

Loading recall data can be accomplished by selecting the Recall option from the Archive Menu.
When selected, the data stored in a flash location within the drive can be recalled to re-write the
setups and program data to the executing program space. When RECALL is selected, the data is
displayed when the program has last been stored. Once the recall is finished, the program is reset
to begin execution.
Recall is not available unless STORE has been executed. Use recall to recover from a failure, or to
recall a program in the case of a hardware failure or upgrade. Recall keeps all the software,
setups, and UEdit® programs on the flash memory chips.
5.3.8.6.7 Data Store

To permanently store a program, data, and UEdit® modifications to flash program chips located on
the motherboard of the drive, select the Store option from the Archive Menu. To store all the
information to the flash memory, press the Enter key and the screen will display where the
information is stored and reset the drive. To recall stored data, select the recall option.
The first option is for selecting if all the data items in the global dictionary should be defaulted when
the data is recalled. Pressing 1 or “yes” causes all data items to be set to factory defaults, not the
stored value of the data item, when a recall is initiated. This option is useful if UEdit® software
needs to be stored without storing the current values of the data items. Pressing 0 or “no” causes
all the data items to be set to the values stored in the FLASH program chips when a recall is
initiated. This option is typically used after the drive has been setup and all the data items contain
the correct values. Pressing any other key will exit the data storage menu.
The next option is for selecting if the information stored in the FLASH program chips is to be
recalled automatically when a non-volatile memory error has occurred. Pressing 1 or “yes” enables
this feature. While Pressing 0 or “no” disables the feature. If “no” is selected, the information
stored in the FLASH program chips can be recalled only from the data RECALL menu. Typically
this feature should be enabled. Pressing any other key will exit the data storage menu.

Once the selection has been made the data, and UEdit® is stored to the FLASH program chips.
While the information is being written the message “Storing to flash...” is displayed. Once the
storing is complete, the message “Reset in progress…” is displayed. The program then does a soft
restart and the program software is rebooted.
5.3.8.6.8 Data Erase

Select the Erase option to erase any stored programs in flash memory. This will not erase
parameter values in non-volatile memory.
5.3.8.6.9 Data Status

Provides information on how the stored program was saved to flash memory. Displays whether or
not drive will restore default data upon recall and whether or not drive will automatically restore
upon a non-volatile memory (NVMEM) fault.
5.3.8.6.10 Reset ID
If the drive has an “Identification Error” fault the fault may be reset by loading defaults using the
archive menu selection DEFAULT, or the fault may be reset without loading default values by
selected RESET ID from the archive menu.
If RESET ID is selected, a prompt is displayed asking “Reset Drive ID?” 1= yes, 0 = No. If 1 is
selected, the drive ID will be reset to the current drive ID, and no default values will be applied. If 0
is selected, the ID will not be reset, and defaults must be recalled from the Archive menu
5.3.8.7 Help Display

The Help Display Menu is used to access global dictionary parameters, various diagnostic tools,
calendar setup and other utilities.
5.3.8.7.1 Feedback
This utility is used to access the variables associated with the feedback transducers. The type of
transducer interface option installed on the drive will determine which set of variables are
displayed. Pressing the down arrow key will scroll to the next variable. Holding the down arrow
key while pressing the function key will scroll to the previous variable.
5.3.8.7.2 Analog
The ANALOG utility allows monitoring of the real-time value of the various analog input channels.
The first line is a center-zero bar graph that displays ±100% of full scale. The second line contains
the description and present value of the analog input signal. The value is scaled such that a value
of ±10 corresponds to ±100% of full scale. Use [↑/↓] to scroll to the next analog signal. Use [Fn] +
[↑/↓] to scroll to the previous analog signal.
5.3.8.7.3 PIO
The PIO utility allows monitoring the status of the digital inputs and outputs.
The I/O status can be viewed from the HELP / PIO screen. The output status can also be viewed
in the output dictionary at the end of the list of bits. Readouts are prefixed with a “!”.
Once on the help PIO screen, IO bits can be viewed 16 at a time. The bit can be selected by typing
in the bit number or using the arrow key to scroll through the words. Information shows the state of
the bit.
Use FUNCTION 0 to scroll through the function assigned to a specific bit. More than one input
function can be assigned to a single bit.
5.3.8.7.4 Clock
The CLOCK option will display the status of the internal clocks. Each foreground clock runs at a
specified frequency that is a multiple of the clock frequency setup. There are 5 clocks configured,
each has a multiple setup associated with it in the dictionary.
Clock frequencies are determined at power-up, so if any of these items are changed, control power
to the drive must be cycled. This setup is modified from the global dictionary.
• clock frequency - The frequency of the slowest control loops in the drive.

• drive multiple - Drive multiple sets the frequency of all the routines which execute on the drive
clock. The drive controller is the main routine which runs on the drive clock. If the clock
frequency is at 50 Hz and the drive multiple is a 5, the drive clock runs at 50 * 5 = 250 Hz.
• upid multiple - The position/velocity loop controller runs on the upid clock by this multiple. If
the drive clock is at 250 Hz and the upid multiple is a 4, the upid clock runs at 250 * 4 = 1000
Hz.
• ac multiple - The ac vector controller runs on the ac clock. This clock runs faster than the upid
clock by this multiple. If the upid clock is at 500 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock runs at
500 * 2 = 1000 Hz.
• ac fast multiple - The ac vector rotator runs on the ac fast clock. This clock runs faster than
the ac clock by this multiple. If the ac clock is at 1000 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock
runs at 1000 * 2 = 2000 Hz.
The clock help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.7.5 Process
The PROCESS display shows the amount of memory consumed by an individual background
process. The arrow down key and function arrow keys can be used to scroll up and down through
the processes configured within a device.
Once a process has been selected, Use the Fn1 key to display the Scan time in msec of the
process, and the Maximum scan time in msec. Scan time is the amount of time from one
background scan to the next.
Press Fn1 again to display the Exec time to executable time for the process. The executable time
is the amount of time the specific process took during its execution.
Press Fn1 again to display the process state.
Press Fn1 again to display the starting address of the process in memory.
The process help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.7.6 Calendar
The CALENDAR chip maintains the current time and date of the device. This chip stores the
calendar set time and date, and updates this continually even when power to the drive has been
lost.
To change the calendar date or time, select the calendar display from the help menu options, and
then press the enter key to edit the date. Continue to press the ENT key until the cursor is at the
item that is desired to be changed, then press the down arrow key until the desired item displays
the correct value.
Access level 3 must be granted before the time or date can be altered.
5.3.8.7.7 Controller
The CONTROLLER help option displays data about the controller. The state of the controller is
displayed first, and indicates the current status of the controller. The controller is used to manage
the drive on and off states, and charging unit states if they are used. Other information in the
controller help screen displays the status of the bits associated with the controller.
The controller help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.7.8 SSI
The SSI is a high speed serial protocol written by Unico. This protocol transfers a minimal amount
of data at very high speeds and is typically used to couple drives together by electronically
synchronizing them. If the SSI is not used, the screen will show “ssi disabled”.
5.3.8.7.9 Mem
The MEM display is used by Unico personnel only. This display helps the Unico development team
track down and destroy annoying memory leaks or memory allocation problems.

5.3.8.7.10 Global Dictionary
The global dictionary, accessed from the Help Display is a sequential non-ordered list of all the
drive’s parameters. Used to view and/or edit parameter values.
The global dictionary must have level 3 access permission to edit values.
5.3.8.7.11 Network Map

The network map contains a parameter connection to data items. This is useful when a device has
to talk to the software, but will not be modified to the new data layout that may occur when
upgrading software. The network map provides a connection between the old data item indexes,
and the new data item indexes.
The Network Map is an ordered sub-set of the drive’s parameters whose addressing is aliased to
access the global dictionary item number to achieve addressing stability revision-over-revision.
5.3.8.7.12 NVMEM
The NVMEM display is used by Unico personnel only. This display helps the Unico development
team track down and destroy annoying memory leaks or memory allocation problems.
5.3.8.7.13 Ports
The Ports Utility provides information about the serial communication ports on the Control Module.
It should be used to troubleshoot serial communications.
The X10-100MHz Control Module has 3 serial communication ports
• The console port located on the lower left of the Control Module.
• The port A port located on the middle right of the Control Module.
• The port B port located on the upper right of the Control Module.
The X10-100MHz Compact Control Module has 2 serial communication ports

• The console port located on the lower left of the Control Module.
• The port A port located on the middle right of the Control Module.
• The port B port located on the upper right of the Control Module.
The PORTS display shows those serial ports that have been configured for use. The port must
have a protocol running before it will show up in the help. Select the port in question, each port
displays first:
• RCNT Character receive count incremented each time a character is received.
• QIN Count is incremented to the maximum qin buffer size, and then reset. QIN and QOUT
should match.
• QOUT Count is incremented each time a character is removed from the input buffer.
• CHAR the last character read.
• SIZE the input buffer size.
Select the arrow down key to display the Transmit port information.
• TCNT Character transmit count incremented each time a character is sent.
• QIN Count is incremented to the maximum buffer size, and then reset.
• QOUT Count is incremented to the maximum buffer size, and then reset. QIN and QOUT
should match as this indicates that the buffer is functioning properly, and not missing
characters.
• CHAR is the last character written out.
• SIZE is the output buffer size.
Select the arrow down key again to display protocol specific help screens.
5.3.8.7.14 UEdit® Utility

The UEDIT help option displays information about any UEdit® application that may be installed in
the device. If UEdit® is not available to this device, the UEDIT® menu option will not display.

5.3.8.7.15 System Errors
The system error log is used to record programmatic errors since power on.
The system errors help screen is used by Unico personnel.
5.3.8.8 Chart Display (Requires GLCD)

The Chart Display Menu is used to access pre-defined graphing of the current operation of the
system.
[Fn] + [0] repaints the entire chart view, and reset the scaling to the original starting values.
[Fn] + [1] erases the plot view and re-arms sampling for triggered data. It clears the area drawn
with chart channel data, but does not reset the X and Y axis scales.
Predefined Charts:
• Surface DynaCard
• Downhole DynaCard. Choose [Fn] + [1] to arm the trigger and display the next Downhole
DynaCard.
• Crank Torque Chart
• Rod and Pump Velocity Chart
• IPR and Pumping Point Chart
5.4 Password Protection

The password function has up to 3 password levels. Security clearance is granted based on the
level of password that has been reached. Any feature in the device that is protected by a password
level will ask for the password when data is changed.
The higher the password level, the more security clearance will be granted once that level has
been reached. To reach a higher security level, simply type the highest password level assigned to
you at any password prompt.
5.4.1 Dictionary Access Levels

Each dictionary has a password level, and each menu option has a password level assigned to it
as well. Dictionary items within a dictionary are always visible, but require the proper password
level to change settings. If a dictionary is assigned a level, that password level must be entered
and passed before the dictionary setups can be changed, but they can be viewed without a
password entered. Passwords will be displayed as asterisks unless the password level has been
granted.
5.4.1.1 Menu Item Access Levels

If a menu item, such as Drive Test, has a password level assigned to it, that level must be passed
before the menu item can be accessed. Menu items are listed below with the status that they are
assigned:
• Dictionary – Access is on a per Menu item basis. Each menu has an access level assigned
to it.
• Drive Test – Level 3 Access
• System ID – Level 3 Access
• AC/DC Test – Level 3 Access
• Faults – No restriction to view them, level 3 assess required to change masks or modify the
history.
• Archive – Level 2 Access
• Help – No restriction on most help items. Level 3 password access required to change the
Calendar and the Global Dictionary sub-menus.
• Chart – No restriction, as the charts are display only.

5.4.2 Password Protection Setup Options
5.4.2.1 Only level 1 password is non-zero

Access to protected items at all assigned levels is locked until the level 1 password is entered.
While the system is unlocked, access is allowed at all assigned levels.
5.4.2.2 Only level 1 password and level 2 password are non-zero

Access to protected items at all assigned levels is locked until at least the level 1 password is
entered.
While the system is unlocked at level 1, access to level 2 and level 3 is prohibited.
When the level 2 password is entered, access is allowed at all assigned levels while the system is
unlocked.
5.4.2.3 All three password levels are non-zero

If all three password levels are non-zero:
level 1 has the lowest level of access designed for use by operators
level 2 has mid-level access designed for use by experienced technicians
level 3 has the highest level of access designed for use by highly trained personnel.
To reach a higher security level from any password prompt, simply enter the higher level password
assigned to the desired level when prompted for a password.
While the system is unlocked at level 1, access to level 1 is allowed and access to level 2 and level
3 are prohibited.
While the system is unlocked at level 2, access to level 1 and 2 is allowed and level 3 is prohibited.
While the system is unlocked at level 3, access to all levels is allowed.
5.4.2.4 Only level 3 password is non-zero

Access to protected items at level 3 is locked until the level 3 password is entered.
While the system is locked, access is allowed without a password at level 1 and level 2.
5.4.2.5 Only level 3 password and level 2 password are non-zero

Access to protected items at level 3 is locked until the level 3 password is entered.
Access to protected items at level 2 is locked until the level 2 password is entered. Access to level
3 items remains locked.
While the system is locked, access is allowed without a password at level 1.
5.4.3 Password Selection

Password selection is made in the global dictionary.
5.4.3.1 Global Parameter: level 1 password

This value defines the level 1 password. The password is a numeric number, and will not be
displayed at the keypad when the level is locked out. If the level is locked out, then asterisks will
be displayed. The default value is 0, unlocked.


5.4.3.4 Global Parameter: lockout time

5.4.3.4.1 At the Keypad:
The entire system will return to locked out at the keypad if the topmost startup screen is reached by
quitting to the power up identity screen, or if the timeout time has elapsed and it is non-zero. For
example, if the lockout time is set to 900.000 seconds and no accesses are made for a period of 15
minutes, the system will revert to locked-out at all levels.
5.4.3.4.2 From UEDIT® Software or UEDIT LITE™ Software

While monitoring with UEDIT®, once a password at any level has been entered and serial access
to parameters up to that level remains unlocked until a new UEdit session is started.
5.4.3.5 Global Parameter: lockout status

5.4.3.5.1 At the Keypad:
This value displays the current locked state at the keypad of the drive. The list includes
UNLOCKED, LOCKED, LEVEL 1, LEVEL 2 AND LEVEL 3.
5.4.4 Lost Passwords

If the password for any password level is lost, contact Unico, Inc. for help on unlocking the locked
system.

6 Application Dictionary Menus
6.1 Overview
The application menus contain the dictionary items (parameters) that are used to control the
operation of the drive as well as to tailor it to specific installation requirements. The parameters are
organized into logical groups for ease of navigation. All parameters may be protected from
unauthorized change by means of a password protection scheme.
The individual parameters within a menu are shown in the order they appear along with their units,
minimum value, maximum value, default value, visibility and full description.
Display parameters are continuously updated and do not have minimum, default and maximum
values defined.
Parameters may appear in more than one menu.
6.1.1 Parameter Visibility Control

To access parameters, you may scroll using the [ ↑/↓] key or the [0] - [9] keys to jump directly to the
desired parameter. While scrolling, you may notice that some parameter numbers are skipped.
This is because certain parameters are hidden—not visible—if the nave no function for the selected
application configuration. To temporarily override visibility controls use menu visibility. To
permanently override visibility controls use visibility control. While most parameters hold numeric
values, some parameters have enumerated choices (enum) with values that are selected from a
list.
6.1.2 Parameter Unit Selection

The basic unit display for parameters is user-definable on a per-port basis. The basic selection is
Imperial or Metric units. Furthermore, some parameter unit display is controlled by a unit selector
parameter.
6.1.2.1 Keypad Units

To select the units displayed at the keypad, use the keypad units parameter in the Display Menu.
6.1.2.2 UEdit® Software Units

To select the units displayed in UEdit®, in the project window, right click on the SRP (1) Device and
choose Units. Select either 14-AngularRevsMinutesImperial or 15-AngularRevsMinutesMetric.
6.1.2.3 Console Units

To select the units sent by the Console Port, use the console units parameter in the Comm Menu.
6.1.2.4 Port A Units

To select the units sent by Port A, use the porta units parameter in the Comm Menu.
6.1.2.5 Port B Units

To select the units sent by Port B, use the portb units parameter in the Comm Menu.
6.1.2.6 User Definable Units

Once the basic Imperial vs. Metric selection has been made, use the unit selector parameters in
the Display Menu to further refine the unit display selection.
Unico PCP Application Application Manual

Application Dictionary Menus
42
6.2 Operator Menu
If password protection is enabled, this menu requires Level 1 password.
Table 6-2—Operator Menu Parameters
0 keypad speed read/write
The pump speed reference when the selected hand or auto speed source is set to keypad.
Units: rpm Min: pump min speed Max: pump max speed Default: pump min speed
1 running status display
The state of the motor. Values include:
HAND RUN—hand enable input is asserted. Auto-restarts off.

AUTO RUN—auto enable input is asserted.
WELL ID RUN—performing Well ID Test
RESTART DELAY—Drive has powered up, waiting for powerup restart delay to expire.
FAULT RESTART—Auto-restart feature is attempting to restart the system. Waiting for restart timer to
countdown to 0 (zero).
PUMP OFF WAIT—POC Controller has stopped the operation. Waiting for pump dwell time to expire.
TIMER WAIT—Timer Controller has stopped operation. Waiting for timer off time to expire.
CALENDAR WAIT—Calendar Controller has stopped operation. Waiting for the current date, day, day-of-
week and/or time-of-day to be within the allowable limits.
REMOTE STOP—Motor turned off remotely (serially) .
PARKING—Reserved for LRP™ system.
FAULTED—A fault condition currently exists. If Auto-restarts are enabled, the fault condition may be
automatically cleared when condition no longer exists. Operator intervention may be required.
MAX FAULT—A fault condition currently exists. The allowable restart attempts has been used. Operator
intervention required.
MOTOR OFF—Neither the hand enable input nor the auto enable input is asserted. Operator intervention
required.
DISABLED—The run enable input is not asserted. Operator intervention required.
GEN FAULT—A generator fault condition exists. Operator intervention required.
GEN START—A generator start condition exists.
While running status is in the RESTART DELAY, FAULT RESTART, PUMP OFF WAIT, REMOTE STOP,
TIMER WAIT or CALENDAR WAIT state, standby sts will be set to TRUE. If STANDBY is selected for one
of the digital outputs the output will be asserted.
On the SRP Main Display, while running status is in the RESTART DELAY, FAULT RESTART, PUMP OFF
WAIT or TIMER WAIT state, the running status display will alternate with the restart countdown display.
The restart timer display is used to indicate the time remaining until resumption of operation.
While restart timer is greater than 0, the Screen Saver Mode is disabled.
2 restart counter display
The number of times the drive has attempted to restart from the last fault which is reset to zero once the
drive has run successfully for more than run verify time.
Visibility: restart attempts > 0
Units: decimal
3 restart timer display
Indicates the elapsed portion, if restarting, of restart time.
Units: mins
4 pump speed source display
The source of the pump speed set point.
Enumerated values: 0-KEYPAD SPD, 1-ADC POT SPD, 2-EXTERNAL SPD, 3-FOP CTRL, 4-PUMP
INTAKE, 5-GAS CTRL, 6-CYCLE SPD, 18-START SPD,26-WELL ID SPD, 28-SIMULT, 30-NO SYS ID,
36-USER SPD, 37-FOLD FREQ, 38-SKIP FREQ, 39-MIN FREQ, 40-BACKSPIN SPD, 41-BROWNOUT
SPD, 42-TANK CTRL
Units: enum
5 pump speed monitor display
The pump speed, which is equal to the motor speed for an ESP pump or the calculated downhole rod
speed for a PCP pump.
Units: rpm
6 mtr freq monitor display
The measured electrical motor frequency.
Units : Hertz

43
7 rod speed monitor display
The measured speed of the rod, which is equal to the motor speed divided by the overall gear ratio for a
PCP pump.
Units: rpm
8 mtr voltage monitor display
The measured rms voltage of the motor.
Units: volts
9 mtr current monitor display
The measured rms voltage of the motor.
Units: amps
10 mtr power monitor display
The measured power of the motor.
Units: hp
11 pump torque monitor display
The torque into the pump, which is equal to the the calculated downhole rod torque.
Units: ft-lb
12 rod torque monitor display
The measured torque into the rod, which is equal to the motor torque multiplied by the overall gear ratio
and gearbox efficiency for a PCP pump
Units: ft-lb
13 percent motor torque display
The measured motor torque as a percent of motor rated torque.
Units: %
14 fluid level monitor display
The fluid level from the surface, as derived from the pump depth and fluid over pump monitor parameters.
Units: ft/m
15 fluid over pump monitor display
The fluid level above the pump measured by a down-hole pressure sensor or derived from motor
parameters and pump characteristics.
Units: ft/m
16 fluid flow monitor display
The fluid flow measured by a sensor or estimated from operating conditions and pump characteristics.
Units: fluid flow units
17 oil flow monitor display
The oil flow produced by the pump, based on the entered water cut.
18 water flow monitor display
The water flow produced by the pump, based on the entered water cut.
19 gas flow monitor display
The gas flow of the pump from a signal input.
Visibility: gas flow source is not disabled
Units: gas flow units
20 tubing prs display
The tubing pressure monitor.
Units: pressure units
21 fluid production meter display
The total fluid production since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. The meter rollover
when it reaches 999999. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: volume units
22 oil production meter display
The total oil production since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. The meter rollover
Units: volume units
23 water production meter display
The total water production since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. The meter rollover
Units: volume units
24 gas production meter display
The total gas production since the last reset of the parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. The meter rollover
Units: mcf/scm
25 input power meter display
The cumulative input power consumed by the drive since the last reset of the parameter. May also be reset
using reset all meters.
Units: kwh

44
26 motor avg power monitor display
The mechanical output power of the motor.
Units: hp
27 pump start count read/write
The cumulative number of pump starts since the last reset of this parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset. Value
will rollover after it reaches 25000. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: decimal
28 pump rotation count read/write
The cumulative number of pump rotations since the last reset of this parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset.
Value will rollover after it reaches 25000. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: decimal
29 reset all meters read/write
Enable to reset the input power meter, fluid production meter, oil production meter, water production meter,
gas production meter and pump stroke counter.
Units: enum
30 lift efficiency display
The ratio of the lift power to the input power, expressed as a percentage and averaged over one full stroke
of the pump.
Units: %
31 lift ave efficiency display
The average lift-efficiency of the pumping system since the last reset of this parameter.
Units: %
32 input power monitor display
The estimated input power from the line into the drive.
Units: hp
33 lift power monitor display
The estimated lift fluid power produced by the pump.
Units: hp
34 software number display
Used to identify the application software that is installed.

35 revision number display
Used to identify the application software revision that is installed.

36 pump troubleshooter display
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates that there are
no items that currently need addressed.
37 menu visibility read/write
Used to “hide” those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and navigation. Choose
MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu parameters.
Value is reset to MINIMIZE when power is cycled.

45
6.3 Quick Start Menu
Table 6-3—Quick Start Menu Parameters
0 drive model read/write
The drive model number. Values include: 1100, 1105, 1110, 1200 and 1230. Used to set up drive model
dependant parameter defaults.
Units: enum Default: 1100
1 mtr nameplate power read/write
The nameplate rated power of the motor.
Units: hp Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0.00
2 mtr nameplate voltage read/write
The nameplate rated voltage of the motor.
Units: volts Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 0
3 mtr nameplate frequency read/write
The nameplate rated frequency of the motor.
Units: hz Min: 0 Max: 999 Default: 60
4 mtr nameplate current read/write
The nameplate rated current of the motor.
Units: amps rms Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0.00
5 mtr nameplate rpm read/write
The nameplate rated speed in rpm of the motor.
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Max: 99999.0 Default: 1180.0
6 pump max speed read/write
The maximum speed the pump is allowed to run.
7 pump min speed read/write
The minimum speed the pump is allowed to run.
8 mtr rtd power display
The calculated rated power of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
9 mtr rtd voltage display
The rated voltage of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed and cable voltage drop.
10 mtr rtd frequency display
The rated frequency of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
11 mtr rtd current display
The rated current of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
12 mtr rtd rpm display
The rated speed in rpm of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
13 mtr poles read/write
The number of poles in the motor.
Units: decimal Min: 2 Max: 12 Default: 26
14 motor rms limit read/write
This is the continuous current rating of the motor. If this value is nonzero, the motor current is estimated in
software with a time constant of 5 minutes. If this estimate exceeds the motor rms limit then the inverter will trip
and a Motor RMS Limit fault will turn off the motor.
Units: amp rms Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 110% of mtr rtd current
15 magnet flux read/write
The magnet flux for permament magnet motor. Only shown for synchronous motors.
Units: wb Min: 0 Default: 0.00
16 read/write
17 read/write
18 read/write
19 read/write
20 drive supply voltage read/write
The estimated drive supply voltage.
21 read/write
22 display
23 read/write

46
24 read/write
25 display
26 display
27 display
28 overall gear ratio read/write
The overall gear ratio between the motor and the pump.
Units: n:1 Min: 0.001 Max: 100.000 Default: 1.000
29 accel time read/write
The time to accelerate the drive from zero to rated motor speed.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Default:10.000
30 decel time read/write
The time to decelerate the drive from rated motor speed to zero.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Default:10.000
31 hertz units read/write
Enables display and setting of the motor speed in frequency units.
Units: enum Default:DISABLE
32 modulation select read/write
This item selects the type of current modulation to be used by the drive. The default choice is VOLTAGE
BLOCKING, and VOLTS PER HERTZ and SPACE VECTOR are also available. Note: The drive requires that
the motor be off when changing the type of current regulation.
Visibility: menu visibility = MAXIMIZE
Units: enum Default:VOLTAGE BLOCKING
33 hand speed source read/write
Determines the source of the pump speed command when the manual mode of operation is selected by the hand
enable input. The types of pump speed sources include: KEYPAD, ADC POT, and LAST AUTO.
Units: enum Default:KEYPAD
34 auto speed source read/write
Determines the source of the pump speed command when the auto mode of operation is selected by the auto
enable input. The types of pump speed sources include: KEYPAD, ADC POT, SERIAL EXTERNAL, ADC
EXTERNAL, LEVEL PIP, LEVEL PIP EST, TANK LEVEL, PIP, PIP EST, and TRANSIT TIME PUMP OFF.
Units: enum Default:KEYPAD
36 ADC pot source read/write
Select the source of the pot speed value. Enumerated values include: DISABLED, ADC 1 – ADC 11.
Units: enum
37 ADC pot min read/write
The minimum value for the scaling of the signal input.
Visibility: pot speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11
Units: rpm Default: 0.0
38 ADC pot max read/write
The maximum value for the scaling of the signal input.
39 ADC pot min volts read/write
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input.
Units: volts Min: -10.000 Max: 10.000 Default: 0.000
40 ADC pot max volts read/write
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the calibration process.
Visibility: up speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11
41 ADC pot value display
If pot speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage.
This value will be 0 if pot speed source = DISABLED.
Units: rpm
42 ADC external source read/write
Select the source of the external speed value. Enumerated values include: DISABLED, ADC 1 – ADC 11.
Units: enum
43 ADC external min read/write
Visibility: external speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11

47
44 ADC external max read/write
45 ADC external min volts read/write
46 ADC external max volts read/write
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the calibration process.
Visibility: external source is ADC 1 – ADC 11
47 ADC external value display
If external speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog input
voltage. This value will be 0 if pot speed source = DISABLED.
Units: rpm
48 vsd phase dir display
Indicates the dirve electrical output phasing direction: FWD or REV.
Units: enum
49 change motor dir display
When yes is selected, the positive motor direction is reversed. This is equivalent to swapping two of the motor
leads and should only be selected while the motor is off.
Units: enum
50 pump stop control read/write
Stop control of the pump motor (coast to stop, ramp to stop, inj brake, or inj hold following a ramp to stop). Note:
dc injection baking or holding is not available in V/Hz mode.
Units: enum Default: COAST TO STOP
51 restart attempts read/write
The number of times the drive will attempt to restart in auto mode after it has stopped due to a fault condition.
52 restart min delay read/write
The minimum time the pump will remain off following any fault.
Units: min Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0.00
53 fault restart delay read/write
The amount of time the drive will wait after any other fault that does not have a restart time before attempting a
restart. A value of zero (0) disables restarting. The time the drive was powered off will be subtracted from this
time to reduce unneccessary time waiting if the power was off a long time.
54 powerup restart delay read/write
Sets the length of time for the drive to wait to automatically restart from a power loss, if the motor on and run
enable inputs are still asserted. The time the drive was powered off will be subtracted from this time to reduce
unneccessary time waiting if the power was off a long time.
55 start limits mode read/write
Setting to ENABLE enables the start mode, which allows setting a start speed, current limit, and torque limit for a
specified time.
Units: enum Default: DISABLE
56 start speed read/write
The speed at which the pump will run for the start time. If set to 0, the pump ramps up to the selected speed
immediately.
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Max:9999.9 Default: 0.0
57 start mtr current limit read/write
The maximum motor current to use during the start current time period.
Units: amps Min: 0.00 Max: max xfmr curr Default: max xfmr curr
58 start torque limit read/write
The maximum torque to use during the start time period.
Units: %max Min: 0.00 Max: 100.00% Default: 100.00%
59 start time read/write
The time period to limit the drive output current to the start current limit.
Units: min Min: 0.00 Max:9999.9 Default: 0.00
60 run mtr current limit read/write
The maximum motor current to use following the start current time period.
61 mtr uld mask read/write
Configures what happens in response to a motor underload condition (NONE, EVENT, WARNING, FAULT).
Units: enum Default: FAULT

48
62 mtr uld fault read/write
If the motor current stays below this value for mtr uld fault time, the condition selected with mtr uld mask will
occur.
Units: amps Min: 0.00 Max: max xfmr curr Default: 0.00
63 mtr uld fault time read/write
The time the drive will wait after detecting a motor underload current before indicating the selected condition.
64 mtr uld restart delay read/write
The time the pump will remain off after a motor underload fault. A value of zero (0) disables restarting.
65 mtr ovld mask read/write
Configures what happens in response to a motor overload condition (NONE, EVENT, WARNING, FAULT).
66 mtr ovld fault read/write
If the motor current stays above this value for mtr ovld fault time, the condition selected with mtr ovld mask will
occur.
Units: amps Min: 0.00 Max: max xfmr curr Default: maximum current
67 mtr ovld fault time read/write
The time the drive will wait after detecting a motor overload current before indicating the selected condition.
68 mtr ovld restart delay read/write
The time the pump will remain off after a motor overload fault. A value of zero (0) disables restarting.
69 low speed mask read/write
Configures what happens in response to a low speed condition (NONE, EVENT, WARNING, FAULT).
70 low speed fault read/write
If the pump speed stays below this value for low speed fault time, the condition selected with low speed mask will
occur.
Units: rpm Min: 0.00 Max: pump max speed Default: calculated
71 low speed fault time read/write
The time the drive will wait after detecting low speed before indicating the selected condition.
72 low speed restart delay read/write
The time the pump will remain off after a low speed fault. A value of zero (0) disables restarting.
73 high speed mask read/write
Configures what happens in response to a high speed condition (NONE, EVENT, WARNING, FAULT).
74 high speed fault read/write
If the pump speed stays above this value for high speed fault time, the condition selected with high speed mask
will occur.
Units: rpm Min: 0.00 Max: pump max speed Default: calculated
75 high speed fault time read/write
The time the drive will wait after detecting high speed before indicating the selected condition.
76 high speed restart delay read/write
77 diffl prs min fault read/write
Faults if the diffl prs goes below this value for diffl prs fault time.
Units: psi Min: 0.0 Max: 99999.9 Default: -10000.0
78 diffl prs max fault read/write
Faults if the diffl prs goes above this value for diffl prs fault time.
Units: psi Min: 0.0 Max: 99999.9 Default: 10000.0
79 diffl prs restart delay read/write
80 run enable input read/write
Sets the usage option for the Run Enable input (IN11). If using a start push button, select LATCHED. If an
external source is used, select MAINTAINED. If this input is not used, select FORCED ON to mimic a hardwired
jumper.
Note: if this parameter is set to LATCHED and a start push button is employed, the drive will automatically start
after the Auto Enable input is true and the power up time delay expires.
Units: enum Default: MOMENTARY

49
81 remote fault reset read/write
Used to serially—remotely—issue a fault-reset request to clear ANY/ALL existing faults. No fault conditions are
exempted from being remotely reset. Care and consideration should be used before issuing a request. After
issuing the request a fault condition may still exist. Shortly after value is changed to ENABLE it will return to
DISABLE.
! Attention
When on site, remove serial connections to the drive to disallow serial communications.
Units: enum
82 remote run enable read/write
Used to serially (remotely) start and stop the drive. Operator intervention overrides this parameter. While Run
Enable (IN 11) and/or Auto Enable (IN 10) are open (not asserted), this value may not be changed from
DISABLE. Once the Operator has asserted the Auto Enable (IN 10) input, this value is changed to ENABLE.
Subsequently, the operation of the Drive may be remotely stopped by serially writing a 0 (ENABLE -> DISABLE)
to this parameter and remotely restarted by writing a 1 (DISABLE -> ENABLE).
FOR SAFETY: When on site, remove serial connections to the drive to disallow serial communications.
Units: enum
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates that there are no
items that currently need addressed.
Used to “hide” those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and navigation. Choose MINIMIZE
to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu parameters.

50
6.4 Feature List Menu
Table 6-4—Feature List Menu
0 auto restarts display
State of the Auto Restarts feature. Automatic restart from a fault condition. Uses restart attempts, run
verify time, fault restart delay, restart min delay, restart delay, external restart override, rotaflex restart
override and aoj restart override in the Fault/Event Menu.
1 field weakening display
State of field weakening feature.
2 power limiter display
State of Power Limiter. Limits the maximum motoring and/or regenerative power that the drive will
command. Uses power limiting, motor power limit and regen power limiting the Power Menu
3 start limits display
State of Start Limits Controller. When start limits mode in the Control Menu is enabled, the controller
changes the commanded speed to start speed, uses start torque limit and star tmtr current limit for start
time when the pumping unit is started from any stopped state. During this period, the PID controller is
disabled. Once the pumping unit has operated, for more than start time, torque limit will return to run
torque limit, current limit will return to run mtr current limit, and the PID controller is re-enabled.
4 user speed control display
State of User Speed Controller. Provides automatic pump speed adjustment in response to input from an
external signal such as temperature or pressure. Uses the user spm adj parameters in the Control Menu.
5 PID controller display
State of PID Controller. Controls the velocity loop used to control to a casing fluid level or intake
pressure.
6 fluid level controller display
State of the Fluid Level Controller. On when one of the fluid level controls is active.
7 level pip est controller display
State of the Level PIP Est Controller. On when the periodic fluid level estimate is active.
8 intake prs controller display
State of the Intake Pressure Controller. On when one of the intake pressure controls is active.
9 skip freq controller display
State of Skip Frequency Controller. On when one or more of the skip frequency avoidance ranges is
active, to prevent the drive from commanding a frequency that causes resonance in the motor/pump.
10 tank level controller display
State of tank level controller. On when auto speed source is set to TANK LEVEL, to control the pump
speed to maintain a set tank level.
11 calendar control display
State of Calendar Controller and/or Timer Controller. Calendar Controller controls power usage by
limiting operation by time of day, weekday or weekend and month. Timer Controller provides a simple
timer on/off control without the need for need for additional instrumentation. Uses the parameters in the
Calendar Menu.
12 EOP controller display
State of Enhanced Oil Production, EOP™ Controller. Uses the eop parameters in the EOP Menu.
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates that there
are no items that currently need addressed.

51
6.5 Pump Speed Menu

Table 6-5—Pump Speed Parameters
0 pump speed source display
The source of the pump speed set point.
Enumerated values: KEYPAD SPD, ADC POT SPD, EXTERNAL SPD, FOP CTRL, PUMP INTAKE, GAS
CTRL, CYCLE SPD, START SPD,WELL ID SPD, SIMULT, NO SYS ID, USER SPD, FOLD FREQ, SKIP
FREQ, MIN FREQ, BACKSPIN SPD, BROWNOUT SPD, TANK CTRL
Units: enum
Determines the source of the pump speed command when the manual mode of operation is selected by
the hand enable input. The types of pump speed sources include: KEYPAD, ADC POT, and LAST AUTO.
Units: enum
Determines the source of the pump speed command when the auto mode of operation is selected by the
auto enable input. The types of pump speed sources include: KEYPAD, ADC POT, SERIAL EXTERNAL,
ADC EXTERNAL, LEVEL PIP, LEVEL PIP EST, TANK LEVEL, PIP, PIP EST, and TRANSIT TIME PUMP
OFF.
Units: enum
Units: enum
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the calibration
process.
If pot speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog input
Units: rpm
Units: enum

52
process.
If external speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog
input voltage. This value will be 0 if pot speed source = DISABLED.
Units: rpm
18 external speed read/write
The pump speed reference when the selected auto speed source is set to SERIAL EXTERNAL, generally
sourced via serial communications.
Visibility: auto source is SERIAL EXTERNAL
The speed at which the pump will run for the start time. If set to 0, the pump ramps up to the selected
speed immediately.
21 PID kp read/write
The proportional gain of the PID level controller: response = gain * error (ft) * 1.2 rpm. PIP continuous
controller:response = gain * error (psi) * 2.8 rpm
Visibility: auto speed source is LEVEL PIP, LEVEL PIP EST, TANK LEVEL, PIP, PIP EST
Units: gain Min: 0.000 Max:999.999 Default: 2.000
22 PID ki read/write
The integral gain of the PID level controller: response = gain * error (ft) * time(min) * 14.1 rpm. PIP
continous controller: response = gain * error (psi) * time(min) * 32.7 rpm.
23 PID kd read/write
The derivative gain of the PID level controller: response = gain * level change rate (ft/min) * .0004 rpm. PIP
continous controller: response = gain * pressure change rate psi/min) * .00033 rpm.
24 PID accel limit read/write
If set to non-zero, it limits the acceleration to the set value when in any of the level or PIP control modes.
Units: rpm/hr Min: -0.0 Max: 99999.9 Default: 0.0
25 fluid level floor read/write
The minimum value for the fluid estimate.
Units: ft Min: -100.0 Max: 999.9 Default: -100.0
26 fluid level rate read/write
The desired fluid level rate of change. Used to limit fast changes in fluid level command for the PID
controller. Decreasing this value increases the time to reach set point.
Units: ft/hr Min: 0.0 Max: 99999.9 Default: 1000.0
27 fluid over pump setpt read/write
The fluid over the pump set point for the PID LEVEL auto control mode.
Units: ft Min: 0.0 Max: 99999.9 Default: 100.0
28 fluid level cmd display
Displays the ramped fluid level command (ramped at the fluid level rate).
Units: ft

53
29 intake prs rate read/write
The desired intake pressure rate of change. Used to limit fast changes in intake pressure command for
the PID controller. Decreasing this value increases the time to reach the set point.
Units: psi/hr Min: 0.0 Max: 99999.9 Default: 18000.0
30 intake prs setpt read/write
The pump intake pressure set point for the PID PIP auto control mode.
31 skip freq cntrl read/write
Enables skip frequencies for drives operating in V/Hz mode.
32 skip frequency 1 read/write
The center of the first frequency zone to be avoided by ramping the motor through that zone.
Visibility: skip freq cntrl is ENABLE
Units: hz Min: 5.0 Max: 90.0 Default: 5.0
33 skip freq band 1 read/write
Determines the size of the first frequency avoidance zone as a plus and minus offset to the first skip
frequency.
Units: hz Min: .05 Max: 3.0 Default: .0.5
The center of the second frequency zone to be avoided by ramping the motor through that zone.
Determines the size of the second frequency avoidance zone as a plus and minus offset to the first skip
frequency.
The center of the third frequency zone to be avoided by ramping the motor through that zone.
Determines the size of the third frequency avoidance zone as a plus and minus offset to the first skip
frequency.
The center of the fourth frequency zone to be avoided by ramping the motor through that zone.
Determines the size of the fourth frequency avoidance zone as a plus and minus offset to the first skip
frequency.
The center of the fifth frequency zone to be avoided by ramping the motor through that zone.
Determines the size of the fifth frequency avoidance zone as a plus and minus offset to the first skip
frequency.
42 intake prs cmd display
Displays the ramped intake prs command (ramped at the intake prs rate).
Units: psi
43 pump intake prs display
Displays the estimated or sensor value for the pump intake pressure.
Units: psi

54
44 fluid over pump monitor read/write
The fluid over the pump monitor from either the estimate or a sensor.
45 request speed display
The pump speed request.
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units : Hertz
48 pump speed troubleshooter display
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for the menu. A value of NONE indicates
that there are no items that currently need addressed for this menu.
Troubleshooter Message(s):
REQUEST SPEED 0 request speed is 0. Check speed source.
START_LMT_SET_START_TIME start time is 0 with start limits enabled s
Using a Fusion Flow Meter to Control Pump Fill in a PCP Pump
Requirements:
1) Decent estimate of flow. This requires knowing the pump curve and the fluid level.
The pump curve may have to be tweaked since it was done using water in the factory,
and the elastomer may swell up in downhole conditions, making the pump more efficient.
A good estimate of fluid level must also be known – the well ID method can be used, and
calibrated with a fluid shot.
2) Actual flow feedback. This has been obtained using a Fusion meter, but could be from
other types of meters.
Setup:
1) Configure the fusion meter. The meter defaults to units of gallons. We typically want to see
flow and volume based on barrels.
a. RATE UNIT = BPD
b. TOTAL UNIT = BBL
c. FULL FLOW = 2057 for 1 inch, or 8229 for 2 inch meters. Setting this will allow the
drive to read the flow without scaling.
d. MODBUS = Yes
e. BUS ADDR = 1
f. BAUD RATE = 9600
2) Configure the drive.

55
a. Communications menu:
b. Set the protocol on the desired port (console, port a, or port b) to RTU MASTER.
c. Set the baud rate for this port to 9600
d. Set rtu slave type to FUSION 1IN or 2IN depending on the meter size.
3) Verify communications between drive and meter. When communications are working,
rtu_master_read_count should increment every few seconds. If not, check the wiring
between the meter and drive, make sure the meter is in the main display screen – it doesn’t
communicate when in the setup menu, and double check the setups in the drive and meter.
4) Verify flow reading from meter. Fluid flow value in the Signals In menu should read flow from
the meter.
5) Make sure the pump curve is entered.
6) Perform a well ID and calibrate the fluid level.
7) Verify fluid flow estimate and fusion pump fill. The flow estimate should be close to the flow
measured by the meter. Pump fill should read around 100% when it is known that the well
isn’t pumped off. It may take some time after first starting the drive for the flow to settle
down. If the pump fill isn’t around 100%, adjust the pump curve (mid point and end point
flows).
8) Put the drive into FUSION PUMP FILL mode (auto speed source). The setpoint is adjusted
with fusion pump fill setpoint (90% default). Start with tuning gains of 1.0 rpm/% for PID Kp,
and 0.5 rpm/%-min for PID Ki. If the drive responds too quickly, and cycles between pump
full and pump off too rapidly, reduce the tuning gains.

56
6.6 Control Menu
Table 6-6—Control Menu Parameters
Setting to ENABLE enables the start mode, which allows setting a start speed, current limit, and torque limit
for a specified time.
speed immediately.
3 start mtr current limt read/write
The maximum motor current to use during the start time period.
The maximum torque to use during the start time period. 100% is motor rated torque
Units: % Min: 0.00 Max: drive rated torque Default: drive rated torque
The maximum motor current to use following the start time period.
6 run toque limit read/write
The maximum torque to use following the start time period. 100% is motor rated torque.
7 rod torque max display
The calculated maximum rod torque.
Units: ftlb
8 rod torque limit read/write
The set rod torque limit.
Units: ftlb Min: 0.0 Max: rod torque max Default: 0.0
9 rod torque limit pct display
The currently set rod torque limit in percent of max torque.
Units: %
10 torque limit display
The chosen torque limit. This value shows which limit is limiting the torque (START LIMIT, RUN LIMIT).
Units: enum
11 current limit display
The chosen current limit. This value shows which limit is limiting the current (START LIMIT, RUN LIMIT).
Units: enum
12 read/write
13 read/write
14 pump stop control read/write
Stop control of the pump motor (coast to stop, ramp to stop, inj brake, or inj hold following a ramp to stop).
Note: dc injection baking or holding is not available in V/Hz mode.
Units: enum Default: COAST TO STOP
15 inj brake pct read/write
The percent motor current to command during injection brake and injection hold pump stop modes.
Units: % Default: 0%
16 inj brake on time read/write
The time to hold DC injection brake current.
Units: sec Default: 20.000 sec
17 backspin ride thru read/write
Enables the backspin power ride thru control feature, which uses the energy stored in the fluid column to
maintain control of the pump during power loss.
18 backspin bus min read/write
The bus voltage setpoint to use for the backspin power ride thru control. If the bus voltage falls below this
value, backspin ride thru mode is started.
Visibility: backspin ride thru is ENABLE
Units: volts Min: 0 Max: 115% of nom vbus Default: 92% of nom vbus

57
19 backspin fwd vel read/write
The bus voltage setpoint to use for the backspin power ride thru control. If the bus voltage falls below this
value, backspin ride thru mode is started.
Units: volts Min: 0 Max: 115% of nom vbus Default: 92% of nom
vbus
20 backspin rev vel 50 read/write
The velocity to switch into bus regulator control after reversing when the torque was around 50% max
motor torque before power loss. This value is set while LEARN SPEEDS mode is run.
Units: rpm Min: -pump max speed Max: 0.0 Default: -80.0
23 backspin decel torq read/write
The initial deceleration torque request following detection of a power loss.
Units: % Min: 15 Max: 100 Default: 15
24 backspin ki read/write
The integral gain of the PI backspin controller.
25 backspin kp read/write
The proportional gain of the PI backspin controller.
26 backspin limit read/write
The drive isn’t allowed to start unless the estimated backspin speed is less than this value.
Units: rpm Min: -9999.9 Max:0.0 Default: -300.0
27 motor rpm display
Readout of motor velocity.
Units: rpm
28 backflush enable read/write
Setting to TIME enables the time mode only, which performs backflushes on a timed basis. Setting to
TORQUE enables torque mode only, which performs backflushes when the torque rises above a set level.
Setting to TORQUE OVERRIDE enables both time and torque modes, which performs backflushes on a
timed basis, unless the torque rises above flush torque before the time expires, at which time it will do the
backflush early and reset the timer. DISABLE turns off this feature entirely.
29 flush time period read/write
The time period to perform backflushes if backflush enable is TIMER or TORQUE OVERRIDE.
Units: hr Min: 0.00 Max:9999.9 Default: 24.00
30 flush time timer read/write
The time remaining to the next backflush process.
Units: hr
31 flush torque read/write
The mtr rated torque percentage above which a backflush process will be initiated if backflush enable is
TORQUE or TORQUE OVERRIDE.
Units: % rtd Min: 0.0 Max:100.0 Default: 0.0
32 flush forward timer speed read/write
The speed to run at when a timed backflush process is initiated.
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Max: pump max speed Default: pump max speed
33 flush forward torque speed read/write
The speed to run at when a torque backflush process is initiated.
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Max: pump max speed Default: pump max speed
34 flush forward time read/write
The time period to run at higher speed forward before backflushing.
35 flush reverse speed read/write
The speed to run at in reverse when a backflush process is being done.

58
36 flush reverse time read/write
The time period to run in reverse while backflushing. If set to 0, uses the flush reverse tubing fill %, or if it
reaches flush reverse tubing fill % before the time expires, the backflush operation is terminated.
37 flush reverse tubing fill pct read/write
The percent tubing fill level at which to stop the backflush operation. When the estimated tubing fill level
falls to this percentage, the backflush operation will be terminated.
Units: % Min: 50.0 Max: 99.0 Default: 80.0
38 estimated tubing fill pct display
The estimated percent tubing fill level.
Units: %
39 pump reverse abort torq read/write
The reverse abort torque. If the pump torque falls below this value the backflush operation will be
terminated.
Units: ftlb Min: -999.99 Max: 999.99 Default: 0.00
40 user speed adj read/write
ENABLE or DISABLE the user speed adjust feature. This is useful for a proportional only control based on
some value, like motor temperature.
41 user speed adj action read/write
REVERSE – slow down with increase in source value
DIRECT – speed up with increase in soure value.
Visibility: user speed adj is ENABLE
Units: enum Default: REVERSE
42 user speed adj pct read/write
Amount to change speed based upon source value .
Units: % Min: 0.0 Max:100.0 Default: 10.0
43 user speed adj source read/write
Selects the value to control to: DISABLED, CASING PRS, CASING TEMP, TUBING PRS, TUBING TEMP,
USER A, USER B , TANK LEVEL, FLUID TEMP, MOTOR TEMP .
Units: enum Default: DISABLED
44 user speed adj rate limit read/write
Limit to the rate of change in speed .
Units: % Min: 0.1 Max:3.0 Default: 0.1
45 tank level action read/write
Selects the action to take to control the tank level: either the pump FILLs the tank, or EMPTYs it.
Visibility: auto speed source is TANK LEVEL
Units: enum Default: FILL
46 tank level standby read/write
If the level reaches this value, the drive will turn off and go into a standby mode, until the level goes past
the tank level on level. For example if FILLing, standby may be set to 10.0 ft and on level 8.0 ft. If the level
goes above 10.0 ft, the drive will turn off. When outflow returns and the level drops below 8.0 ft, the drive
will turn back on and control to the setpt.
Units: ft/m Min: 0.0 Default: 0.0
47 tank level on level read/write
If the drive is in standby mode, it will turn back on when the level goes past this tank level on level.
48 tank level setpt read/write
This is the level that the PID control wil attempt to maintain.
49 tank level value display
This is the feedback level from the sensor.
Units: ft/m
50 time of use limit read/write
Enables the Time of Use limits by Calendar Controller. When enabled, operation can be limited by month,
date and/or day of week.
Units: enum

59
51 month start read/write
The beginning month that operation is to be enabled. The value in month start can be greater than the
value in month end. A value of ALL in either month start or month end allows operation in all months.
Visibility: time of use limit = ENABLE
Units: enum
52 month end read/write
The ending month that operation is to be enabled. The value in month start can be greater than the value
in month end. A value of ALL in either month start or month end allows operation in all months.
Units: enum
53 day start read/write
The beginning day of month that operation is to be enabled. The value in day start can be greater than the
value in day end. A value of ALL in either day start or day end allows operation on all days of the month.
Units: enum
54 day end read/write
The ending day that operation is to be enabled. The value in day start can be greater than the value in day
end. A value of ALL in either day start or day end allows operation on all days of the month.
Units: enum Min: 1 Max: ALL Default: ALL
55 weekday start time read/write
Sets the weekday start time. The value in weekday start time can be greater than weekday end time for
overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekday start time or weekday end time allows all day
operation.
Units: hh.mm Min: 0.00 Max: 24.00 Default: 24.00
56 weekday end time read/write
Sets the weekday end time. The value in weekday start time can be greater than weekday end time for
overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekday start time or weekday end time allows all day
operation.
57 weekend start time read/write
Sets the weekend start time. The value in weekend start time can be greater than weekend end time for
overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekend start time or weekend end time allows all day
operation.
58 weekend end time read/write
Sets the weekend end time. The value in weekend start time can be greater than weekend end time for
overnight operation. A value of 24.00 in either weekend start time or weekend end time allows all day
operation.
59 timer mode read/write
Enables Timer Mode Operation. Timer Mode is a simple ON/OFF timer operation control.
Units: enum
60 timer on time read/write
The amount of time of operation during the ON cycle. A value of 24.00 disables the OFF cycle.
Visibility: timer mode = ENABLE
Units: hh.mm Min: 0.00 Max: 24.00
61 timer on timer display
The amount of time elapsed during the current ON cycle.
Units: hh.mm
62 timer off time read/write
The amount of time of operation during the OFF cycle. A value of 24.00 disables the ON cycle.
Units: hh.mm Min: 0.00 Max: 24.00
63 timer off timer display
The amount of time elapsed during the current OFF cycle.
Units: hh.mm
64 timer mode restart display
Countdown until the next ON cycle.
Units: mins

60
65 date range enable sts display
Display of the Calendar and Timer Mode status. A value of OUT ON indicates that operation is allowed
under the current calendar limitations. A value of OUT OFF indicates that operation is denied by the
calendar settings.
Units: enum
66 remote fault reset read/write
Used to serially—remotely—issue a fault-reset request to clear ANY/ALL existing faults. No fault conditions
are exempted from being remotely reset. Care and consideration should be used before issuing a request.
After issuing the request a fault condition may still exist. Shortly after value is changed to ENABLE it will
return to DISABLE.
! Attention
When on site, remove serial connections to the drive to disallow serial communications.
Units: enum
67 remote run enable read/write
Used to serially (remotely) start and stop the drive. Operator intervention overrides this parameter. While
Run Enable (IN 11) and/or Auto Enable (IN 10) are open (not asserted), this value may not be changed
from DISABLE. Once the Operator has asserted the Auto Enable (IN 10) input, this value is changed to
ENABLE. Subsequently, the operation of the Drive may be remotely stopped by serially writing a 0
(ENABLE -> DISABLE) to this parameter and remotely restarted by writing a 1 (DISABLE -> ENABLE).
FOR SAFETY: When on site, remove serial connections to the drive to disallow serial communications.
Units: enum
external source is used, select MAINTAINED. If this input is not used, select FORCED ON to mimic a
hardwired jumper.
Note: if this parameter is set to LATCHED and a start push button is employed, the drive will automatically
start after the Auto Enable input is true and the power up time delay expires.
Units: enum Default: MOMENTARY
69 Auto enable bypass read/write
Set to ENABLE to allow running the drive without any input bits for motor on req – turn on and off the drive
serially using remote run enable only. Forces on the auto enable bit.
Units: enum
70 control troubleshooter display
Backflush Feature
This feature is used to clean sand or other contaminates from the pump. Two stages are used: first
the pump is run at a usually higher speed forward, to push any contaminate buildup from just above
the pump out the tubing. Then a reverse direction stage is done, to backflush contaminates out of
the pump itself. There are three possible modes: TIME, where the backflushes are performed only
on a timed interval; TORQUE, where backflushes are performed only if the motor torque rises
above a setpoint; and TORQUE OVERRIDE, where backflushes are performed on a timed interval,
unless the torque rises above the setpoint, in which case it does the backflush early, and reset the
timer. The reverse direction stage is aborted if either the estimated tubing fill pct falls below the
flush reverse tubing fill pct, or if the torque falls below the pump reverse abort torq setting.

61
6.7 Fault/Event Menu
Table 6-7—Fault/Event Menu Parameters
0 maintenance bypass. read/write
When set to ENABLE, this temporaily disables digital input , motor overload and underload , low torque,
high torque, low speed, and high speed faults for one motor on cycle. Automatically changes to DISABLE
upon motor off.
1 powerup restart delay. read/write
Sets the length of time for the drive to wait to automatically restart from a power loss, if the motor on and
run enable inputs are still asserted. The time the drive was powered off will be subtracted from this time to
reduce unneccessary time waiting if the power was off a long time.
Units: mins Min: 0.00 Max: 999.99 Default: 1.00
2 restart attempts read/write
The number of times the drive will attempt to restart after it has stopped due to a fault condition. To
determine which faults may auto-restart, refer to the Troubleshooting Section.
Even if restart attempts = 0, if the digital in 0 select = EXTERNAL FAULT,and external restart override is
ENABLE, the drive may auto-restart on this conditions.
Units: decimal Min: .0 Max: 99 Default: 4
3 restart counter display
The number of times the drive has attempted to restart from the last fault which is reset to zero once the
drive has run successfully for more than run verify time.
Units: decimal
4 run verify time read/write
The amount of time the drive must run without a fault for the restart counter to be reset.
5 fault restart delay read/write
The amount of time the drive will wait before attempting a restart on all faults without an individual restart
delay parameter.
6 thermal restart delay read/write
The amount of time the drive will wait before attempting a restart on one of the thermal overload faults:
ambient temperature, heatsink thermal switch, DB limit, motor rms limit, or motor thermal switch.
7 restart min delay read/write
The minimum amount of time the drive will wait before attempting a restart.
8 restart time select display
Indicates the source of the delay timer. Values include: POC DELAY, AUTO RESTART DELAY,
POWERUP DELAY, and TIMER DELAY.
Units: enum
9 restart time display
Indicates the value of the delay timer selected.
Units: mins
Indicates the elapsed portion, if restarting, of restart time.
Units: mins
11 starting fault delay read/write
The number of number of minutes for the pump to delay fault detection for low prs/flow fault, high prs/flow
fault, high torque fault , low speed fault, high speed fault faults. This allows for the system to start without
nuisance faults.
12 fault history 1 display
The most recent fault.
Units: enum
13 fault history 1 date display
The date of the most recent fault.
Units: yyyy.mmdd

62
14 fault history 1 time display
The time of the most recent fault.
Units: hh.mm
The second most recent fault.
Units: enum
The date of the second most recent fault.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
The time of the second most recent fault.
Units: hh.mm
The third most recent fault.
Units: enum
The date of the third most recent fault.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
The time of the third most recent fault.
Units: hh.mm
21 mtr uld mask read/write
Configures what happens in response to a motor underload condition (NONE, EVENT, WARNING,
FAULT).
22 mtr uld fault read/write
If the motor current stays below this value for mtr uld fault time, the condition selected with mtr uld mask will
occur.
23 mtr uld fault time read/write
The time the drive will wait after detecting a motor underload current before indicating the selected
condition.
24 mtr uld restart delay read/write
The time the pump will remain off after a motor underload fault. A value of zero (0) disables restarting.
25 mtr ovld mask read/write
Configures what happens in response to a motor overload condition (NONE, EVENT, WARNING, FAULT).
26 mtr ovld fault read/write
If the motor current stays above this value for mtr ovld fault time, the condition selected with mtr ovld mask
will occur.
27 mtr ovld fault time read/write
The time the drive will wait after detecting a motor overload current before indicating the selected condition.
28 mtr ovld restart delay read/write
The time the pump will remain off after a motor overload fault. A value of zero (0) disables restarting.
29 low speed mask read/write
Sets the mask level. Values include: FAULT, WARNING, EVENT and NONE. When set to one value, the
other masks will be cleared. When set to NONE, all masks will be cleared.
30 low speed fault read/write
If the speed falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID and Valve
Check Test.
Visibility: low speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Default: calculated
31 low speed fault time read/write
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the speed must remain below low speed fault for
at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility: low speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: mins Min: 0.00 Default: 0.00

63
32 low speed restart delay read/write
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts > 0, the drive will allow Auto-Restarts on this fault and
this value will be selected for restart time should this fault should occur.
low speed mask = FAULT
33 high speed mask read/write
34 high speed fault read/write
If the speed rises above this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID and Valve
Check Test.
Visibility: high speed mask is not set to NONE
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Default: calculated
35 high speed fault time read/write
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the speed must remain above high speed fault for
at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility: high speed mask is not set to NONE
36 high speed restart delay read/write
high speed mask = FAULT
37 high torq mask read/write
38 high torq fault read/write
If the torque rises above this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID and Valve
Check Test.
Visibility: high torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: % max Min: 0.00 Default: 100.00
39 high torq fault time read/write
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the torque must remain above high torq fault for at
least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility: high torq mask is not set to NONE
40 high torq restart delay read/write
high torq mask = FAULT
41 low torq mask. read/write
other masks will be cleared. When set to NONE, all masks will be cleared
42 low torq fault read/write
If the rod torq falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well IDTest.
Visibility: low torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: lb/kg Min: 0 Default: -1000000
43 low torq fault time read/write
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the torque must remain below low torq fault for at
least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility: low torq mask is not set to NONE
44 low torq restart delay read/write
low rod load mask = FAULT

64
45 negative torq mask read/write
46 negative torq fault read/write
If the torque falls below this value, a fault will occur. This fault is disabled during the Well ID and Valve
Check Test.
Visibility: negative torq mask is not set to NONE
Units: % max Min: 0.00 Default: -100.00
47 negative torq fault time read/write
Delays the fault detection. If this value is greater than 0, the torque must remain below negative torq fault
for at least this amount of time for a fault to occur.
Visibility: negative torq mask is not set to NONE
48 negative torq restart delay read/write
negative torq mask = FAULT
49 user event1 time read/write
The period that the event will occur on.
50 user event1 latch read/write
Configures whether the event occurs all the time or only when the motor is on.
Units: enum Default: MOTOR ON
51 user event1 items read/write
Set to the number of dictionary items to be latched upon the event.
52 user event1 1 read/write
The dictionary item for the first item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3005 (running status)
The dictionary item for the second item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3006 (pump speed source)
The dictionary item for the third item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3034 (gauge run time accum)
The dictionary item for the fourth item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3035 (gauge fluid production
accum)
The dictionary item for the fifth item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3009 (fluid flow monitor)
The dictionary item for the sixth item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3010 (fluid over pump monitor)
The dictionary item for the seventh item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3021 (rod speed monitor)
The dictionary item for the eighth item to latch.
Units: decimal Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 3022 (rod torque monitor)
60 user event2 time read/write
The period that the event will occur on.
61 user event2 latch read/write
Configures whether the event occurs all the time or only when the motor is on.
Units: enum Default: MOTOR ON
62 user event2 items read/write
Set to the number of dictionary items to be latched upon the event.
The dictionary item for the first item to latch.

65
The dictionary item for the second item to latch.
The dictionary item for the third item to latch.
The dictionary item for the fourth item to latch.
The dictionary item for the fifth item to latch.
The dictionary item for the sixth item to latch.
The dictionary item for the seventh item to latch.
The dictionary item for the eighth item to latch.
71 cumulative run hours display
The cumulative count of motor on status.
Units: hh.mm
72 lockout status display
The current password lockout state by level of password access.
Units: enum Min: unlocked Max: level 3 Default: unlocked

66
6.8 Motor/Xformer Menu
Table 6-8—Motor Menu Parameters
0 mtr nameplate power read/write
The nameplate rated power of the motor.
1 mtr nameplate voltage read/write
The nameplate rated voltage of the motor.
2 mtr nameplate frequency read/write
The nameplate rated frequency of the motor.
3 mtr nameplate current read/write
The nameplate rated current of the motor.
4 mtr nameplate rpm read/write
The nameplate rated speed in rpm of the motor.
7 mtr rtd power display
The calculated rated power of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
8 mtr rtd voltage display
The rated voltage of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed and cable voltage drop.
9 mtr rtd frequency display
The rated frequency of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
10 mtr rtd current display
The rated current of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
11 mtr rtd rpm display
The rated speed in rpm of the motor, adjusted for pump max speed.
12 drive supply voltage read/write
The estimated drive supply voltage.
Units: volts
13 read/write
14 read/write
15 read/write
16 read/write
17 display
18 read/write
19 read/write
20 display
21 display
22 display
23 synchronous motor read/write
ENABLE for synchronous (permament magnet) motors, DISABLE for induction.
24 magnet flux read/write
The magnet flux for permament magnet motor. Only shown for synchronous motors.
Units: wb Default: 0.00000
25 pmx start current read/write
The starting current to use for permament magnet transducerless motor control from starting until the
speed reaches pmx start freq.

67
26 pmx start freq read/write
The motor will be run in open loop frequency mode with pmx start current as long as the speed is less than
this. Used for starting permament magnet transducerless motors.
Units: Hz Min: 0.0 Max: 120.0 Default: 20.0
27 pmx start delay read/write
This is start delay of drive controller. Used for starting permament magnet transducerless motors.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Max: 2.000 Default: 1.00
28 pmx field 1 read/write
The pmx field 1 – 4 and pmx freq 1-4 set a table of d axis currents frequencies to be commanded for
permanent transducerless. The d axis current if used is typically needed at low electrical frequencies.
32 pmx field freq 1 read/write
Units: Hz Min: 0.0 Default: 0.0
Setting to ENABLE enables the start mode, which allows setting a start speed, current limit, and torque limit
for a specified time.
speed immediately.
38 start mtr current limit read/write
The maximum motor current to use during the start current time period.
The maximum torque to use during the start time period. 100% is motor rated torque
The maximum motor current to use following the start current time period. 100% is motor rated torque.
Units: amps Min: 0.00 Max: drive rated torque Default: drive rated torque
43 rod torque limit pct display
The currently set rod torque limit in percent of max torque.
Units: %
44 run torque limit read/write
The maximum motor torque to use after the start timeperiod.

68
45 mtr poles read/write
The number of magnetic poles in the pumping unit motor. Determined during AC Test Utility. This must
always be an even number and is a characteristic of the motor design. The rated rpm of a standard
induction motor indicates the poles via the following: approximately: 3600=2 poles, 1800=4 poles, 1200=6
poles and 900=8
46 mtr slip freq read/write
The slip frequency of the motor at maximum output current. This value is the difference between the
command frequency to the motor and its shaft frequency. Determined during AC Test Utility. For
transducer-less (vector source = XLESS) AC operation the slip frequency is computed as the difference
between the motor’s synchronous speed and its base rpm, expressed in hertz.
Visibility: Visible if the motor is an AC induction motor.
Units: hertz Min: 0.000 Max: 9.999 Default: 0.000
47 mtr field current read/write
The current used to establish the field in the induction motor. Determined during AC Test Utility. This
setup is normally 1/4 to 1/3 of the motor rated current. This value must be set manually for a DC motor if
the drive is being used to supply the dc field current in addition to the armature current.
Visibility: Visible if the motor is a AC motor and correct drive ID.
48 mtr stator resistance Rs read/write
The stator resistance of the pumping unit motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Visibility: Visible if the motor is an AC motor.
Units: ohms Min: 0.0000 Max: 9.9999 Default: 0.0000
49 mtr inductance read/write
The effective leakage inductance of the pumping unit motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Visibility: Visible if the motor is an induction motor.
Units: henries Min: 0.000000 Default: 0.000000
50 motor rtd torque read/write
The rated torque of the pumping unit motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Units: ftlb/Nm Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0.00
51 motor max torque read/write
The maximum torque of the pumping unit motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Units: in*lb/Nm Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0.00
52 motor max power read/write
The maximum power of the pumping unit motor. Determined during AC Test Utility.
Units: hp/kw Min: 0.00 Max: 999.99 Default: 0.00
53 mtr max rpm read/write
The maximum speed in rpm of the motor.
54 mtr ab voltage display
The calculated motor Va-Vb (phase to phase) input voltage.
Units: volts
55 mtr bc voltage display
The calculated motor Vb-Vc (phase to phase) input voltage.
Units: volts
56 mtr ca voltage display
The calculated motor Va-Vb (phase to phase) input voltage.
Units: volts
57 mtr a current display
The motor current in phase A.
Units: volts
58 mtr b current display
The motor current in phase B.
Units: volts
59 mtr c current display
The calculated motor current in phase C
Units: volts
Units : Hertz
61 mtr voltage monitor display
The calculated rms voltage of the motor.
Units: volts
62 mtr current monitor display
The calculated rms voltage of the motor.
Units: amps

69
63 mtr power monitor display
The measured power of the motor.
Units: hp
64 xfr ab voltage display
The calculated transformer Va-Vb (phase to phase) output voltage.
Units: volts
65 xfr bc voltage display
The calculated transformer Vb-Vc (phase to phase) output voltage.
Units: volts
66 xfr ca voltage display
The calculated transformer Va-Vb (phase to phase) output voltage.
Units: volts
67 xfr voltage monitor display
The calculated output rms voltage of the transformer.
Units: volts
68 xfr current monitor display
The calculated output rms voltage of the transformer.
Units: amps
69 motor troubleshooter display
A rolling display of all currently active motor troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates that
there are no items that currently need addressed.

70
6.9 Drive Menu
Table 6-9—Drive Menu Parameters
0 software number display
Used to identify the application software that is installed.

1 revision number display
Used to identify the application software revision that is installed.

Units: enum
3 drive type read/write
Selects the drive configuration type in the system (db std alone, bussed, no db std alone, regen) and used
in conjunction with the catch spinning load.
Units: enum
Units: enum
5 vsd rtd volts display
The rated voltage output of the drive calculated from the drive input voltage based on drive type.
Units: volts
6 vsd max voltage display
Units: volts
7 vsd uv voltage display
The calculated vsd Vu-Vv (phase to phase) voltage.
Units: volts
8 vsd vw voltage display
The calculated vsd Vv-Vw (phase to phase) voltage.
Units: volts
9 vsd wu voltage display
The calculated vsd Vw-Vu (phase to phase) voltage.
Units: volts
10 vsd rated current read/write
The peak output rating of the inverter.
Units: amps rms Min: 0.00 Max: Max Inverter Current Default: 0.00
11 vsd max current read/write
The peak output rating of the inverter.
12 vsd ovld current read/write
The calculated motor overload current reflected by the turns ratio to the vsd.
Units: enum
14 vsd trip current read/write
15 vsd start current read/write
16 vsd run current read/write
17 vsd u current display
The motor current in phase u.
Units: volts
18 vsd v current display
The motor current in phase v.
Units: volts
19 vsd w current display
The calculated motor current in phase w
Units: volts

71
Table 6-9—Drive Menu Parameters
20 vsd bus voltage display
Current bus voltage.
Units: volts
21 vsd max power display
Units: hp
22 vsd cont power display
Units: hp
23 vsd ovld power display
Units: hp
24 vsd max kva display
Units: hp
25 vsd cont kva display
Units: hp
26 vsd ovld kva display
Units: hp
27 system gain read/write
The overall gain of the system. Determined during System ID Test and Well ID Test
Units: 1/sec/sec Min: 0.000 Max: 999.999 Default: 0.000
28 system wn read/write
The natural frequency of the drive closed loop velocity controller.
Units: rad/sec Min: 0.0 Max: 99.9 Default: 0.0

72
6.10 Drive Reg Menu
Table 6-10—Drive Reg Menu Parameters
Units: enum
1 clock frequency read/write
The frequency of the slowest control loops in the drive. Clock frequencies are determined at power-up, so
if this item is changed, control power to the drive must be cycled. For most applications the default value is
sufficient.
Units: hertz Min: 30 Max: Default: 50
2 drive multiple read/write
Drive multiple sets the frequency of all the routines which execute on the drive clock. The drive controller is
the main routine which runs on the drive clock. If the clock frequency is at 50 Hz and the drive multiple is a
5, the drive clock runs at 50 * 5 = 250 Hz. Clock frequencies are determined at power-up, so if this item is
changed, control power to the drive must be reset. For most applications the default value is sufficient.
Units: decima Min: 1 Max: Default: 1l
3 upid multiple read/write
The position/velocity loop controller runs on the upid clock by this multiple. If the drive clock is at 250 Hz
and the upid multiple is a 4, the upid clock runs at 250 * 4 = 1000 Hz. Clock frequencies are determined at
power-up, so if this item is changed, control power to the drive must be reset. For most applications the
default value is sufficient.
4 ac multiple read/write
The ac vector controller runs on the ac clock. This clock runs faster than the upid clock by this multiple. If
the upid clock is at 500 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock runs at 500 * 2 = 1000 Hz. Clock
frequencies are determined at power-up, so if this item is changed, control power to the drive must be
reset. For most applications the default value is sufficient.
Units: decimal Min: 1 Max: Default: 4
5 ac fast multiple read/write
The ac vector rotator runs on the ac fast clock. This clock runs faster than the ac clock by this multiple. If
the ac clock is at 1000 Hz and this multiple is a 2, the ac clock runs at 1000 * 2 = 2000 Hz. Clock
frequencies are determined at power-up, so if this item is changed, control power to the drive must be
reset. For most applications the default value is sufficient.
6 vector source read/write
Source of the motor position feedback.
simulate drive = ENABLE
Units: enum Min: motor socket Max: xless Default: xless
7 upid motor source read/write
8 upid load source read/write
Source of the load position feedback.
9 motor fbk size read/write
Enter the pulses per revolution of the motor position feedback device. NA for XLESS mode.
Units: pulses Min: 0 Max: Default: 2048
10 motor fbk invert read/write
Inverts the direction of the feedback. This is equivalent to swapping the leads in hardware.
Units: enable

73
11 modulation select read/write
This item selects the type of current modulation to be used by the drive. Note: The drive requires that the
motor be off when changing the type of current regulation.
Units: enum Default: VOLTAGE_BLOCK
12 modulation state display
Modulation state readout indicates the shape of the fundamental voltage waveform. The modulation state
can be used as a quick check of the voltage headroom of the inverter/converter. For Trap and Six Step
states, “pulse dropping” is occurring indicating lack of available bus voltage headroom to produce
sinusoidal fundamental voltage output.
modulation select is not DIGITAL
Units: enum
13 modulation index display
The modulation index readout is the ratio of fundamental inverter/converter output line to bus midpoint
voltage divided by bus voltage over 2. Modulation index is calculated with feedback line and bus voltages
and so represents the actual delivered modulation index. It can be used as a quick check of the voltage
headroom of the inverter/converter. For values of modulation index greater than 1.15 “pulse dropping” is
occurring indication lack of available bus voltage headroom to produce sinusoidal fundamental voltage
output.
Units: decimal
14 dsv mod index max read/write
This sets the maximum allowed commanded modulation index output. Use 1.15 to limit the output
waveform for SINE, 1.22 for TRAP, and 1.27 for SIX-STEP. The higher the allowed index, the greater the
output harmonics and drive output rms voltage. To protect output filters, this value should be 1.22 or lower.
Units: decimal Min: 1.15 Max: 1.27 Default: 1.22
15 switch frequency read/write
The frequency at which the IGBT's switch on and off.
Units: hertz Min: 1000 Max: Calculated Default: 3000
16 switch freq mode read/write
This parameter sets the switching frequency selection to manual or auto. When set to MAN ADJUST, the
switching frequency of the IGBT’s is set to the setup value switch frequency. When set to AUTO CHANGE,
the switching frequency used is the setup value in switch frequency, but as the drive heats up thermally, the
switching frequency is lowered to help reduce the drive thermal output. This reduces the chance for faults
and allows the drive to run for an extended period without faulting. As the drive cools, the switching
frequency is returned to the set point. The AUTO CHANGE feature will reduce the drive responsiveness
needed under demanding torque applications.
Units: enum
17 thermal protection read/write
This item is only functional when modulation select is set to VOLTAGE BLOCK. If this item is enabled, the
thermal protection algorithm used will take advantage of voltage blocking modulation.
Units: enum
18 dsv synchronized read/write
This item is only functional when modulation select is set to VOLTAGE BLOCK. If this item is enabled, the
thermal protection algorithm used will take advantage of voltage blocking modulation.
Units: enum
19 dsv kv percent read/write
Sets the percent of motor rated voltage to use for the emf vector feed-forward in space vector mode.
modulation select as necessary
Units: % Min: 0.00 Max: 100.00 Default: 85%
20 dsv L linking read/write
This item determines if dsv Lq and dsv Ld should be linked to the setup for leakage sigma Ls. Normally
this item should be enabled so leakage sigma Ls is always copied into dsv Lq and dsv Ld. If dsv Lq or dsv
Ld are not equivalent this item should be disabled and the inductances should be manually entered.
Units: enum

74
21 dsv Ld read/write
The d axis induction of the motor. This is automatically set by the INDUCTANCE test of the "AC Test"
routines if dsv L linking is enabled otherwise it can be set manually if dsv L linking is disabled.
22 dsv Lq read/write
The q axis induction of the motor. This is automatically set by the INDUCTANCE test of the "AC Test"
routines if dsv L linking is enabled otherwise it can be set manually if dsv L linking is disabled.
23 dsv wn d read/write
This item sets the bandwidth response of the space vector D axis current loop. NOTE: If this item is set to
zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted. The typical range of values for an AC motor is 200 -
1000.
torq reg select as necessary
Units: rad/sec Min: 0.0 Default: 200.00
24 dsv wn q read/write
This item sets the bandwidth response of the space vector Q axis current loop. NOTE: If this item is set to
zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted. The typical range of values for an AC motor is 200 -
1000.
25 dsv kp cmd pct d read/write
Sets the D axis feed forward gain (dsv kp cmd d) as a percentage of the feedback gain (dsv kp fbk d). A
value of 100% yields traditional PI tuning
Units: % Min: 0 Default: 100
26 dsv kp cmd pct q read/write
Sets the D axis feed forward gain (dsv kp cmd d) as a percentage of the feedback gain (dsv kp fbk q). A
value of 100% yields traditional PI tuning
27 dsv kp cmd d read/write
Sets the feed forward gain for the synchronous frame D axis PI regulators used in space vector mode.
Typically this value is determined by the percentage set in dsv kp cmd pct d. It may however, be set
directly causing the percent to be back calculated.
Units: gain Min: 0.00000 Default: 0.00000
28 dsv kp cmd q read/write
Sets the feed forward gain for the synchronous frame Q axis PI regulators used in space vector mode.
Typically this value is determined by the percentage set in dsv kp cmd pct q. It may however, be set
directly causing the percent to be back calculated.
29 dsv ki err d read/write
Sets the integral gain for the synchronous frame D axis PI regulators used in space vector mode. This gain
is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn d.
30 dsv ki err q read/write
Sets the integral gain for the synchronous frame Q axis PI regulators used in space vector mode. This gain
is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn d.

75
31 dsv kp fbk d read/write
Sets the proportional feedback gain for the synchronous frame D axis PI regulators used in space vector
mode. This gain is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn d.
32 dsv kp fbk q read/write
Sets the proportional feedback gain for the synchronous frame Q axis PI regulators used in space vector
mode. This gain is automatically calculated based on the value of dsv wn q.
33 dsv deadtime percent read/write
Sets the percentage of the ideal dead-time compensation to use for digital space vector control. This
percentage is typically less than 100% because of the interaction with the integral gain.
34 dsv v boost read/write
This item will set the starting voltage boost.
35 dsv v boost cutoff read/write
This item will set the cutoff frequency for the voltage boost.
Units: hertz Min: 0 Max: 60 Default: 60
36 dsv bus correction read/write
This item will adjust the dsv control in order to stabilize the bus.
Units: hertz Min: 0 Max: 60 Default: 15
37 dsv brownout read/write
Set this item to ENABLE to enable brownout ridethrough. This changes the field weakening point and
scales the voltage command to bus voltage.
38 dsv vbus filter read/write
This item is the time constant of the first order filter used to stabilize the bus.
Units: sec Min: 0 Default: 1
39 dsv s frame offset read/write
Dsv s frame offset is added to a predetermined offset required when converting the current feedback from
stationary to synchronous frame.
Units: usec Min: 0 Default: 0
40 dsv sync frame limit read/write
When this setup is enabled, the digital space vector ac current regulator imposes a synchronous frame
voltage limit that is determined by the dsv sync vlimit index setup. The limit is imposed in a way that
prioritizes d-axis voltage. This feature is beneficial for controlling permamnent magnet motors. It can be
problematic for induction motors and should be used with care.
Units: enum Default: DISABLE, ENABLE
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all velocity data. When hertz units are
set to ENABLED, all velocities will be entered in HZ.
42 vphz damping kp read/write
Gain to dampen out instability running volts per hertz.
Units: enum

76
43 vphz damping max read/write
Units: ftlb
44 vphz wn d read/write
This item sets the bandwidth response of the volts per hertz D axis current loop. NOTE: If this item is set to
zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted.
45 vphz wn q read/write
This item sets the bandwidth response of the volts per hertz Q axis current loop. NOTE: If this item is set to
zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted.
46 min start frequency. read/write
If non zero and xfrm ratio is non-unity, the drive starts commanding at this frequency for min start freq time.
This is to reduce the likelihood of the output transformer saturating.
Units: volts Min: 0.0 Max: 30.0 Default: 3.0
47 min start freq time. read/write
If non zero and xfrm ratio is non-unity, the drive starts commanding at min start frequency for this time.
This is to reduce the likelihood of the output transformer saturating.
48 drfo read/write
This enables Direction Rotor Flux Orientation (DRFO) control.
Units: enum Default: DISABLE or ENABLE
49 drfo obs ki read/write
This is Direction Rotor Flux Orientation (DRFO) observer integral gain.
50 drfo obs ki read/write
This is Direction Rotor Flux Orientation (DRFO) observer proportional gain.
51 Voltage limit comp read/write
If OPENLOOP1, the flux weakening is done by [base speed /electrical speed] beyond base speed. If
OPENLOOP2, the flux level is controlled by the output voltage determined by voltage output pct. If
CLOSEDLOOP, the flux weakening is done by closed loop control based on bus voltage feedback and
voltage output pct.
Units: enum Default: OPENLOOP1
52 Voltage output pct read/write
The percent of the voltage capability used for flux weakening when voltage limit comp is OPENLOOP2 or
CLOSEDLOOP. Typically set at or below 95% to leave voltage margin for current regulation.
Units: % min: 0.00 Max: 100.00 Default: 95.00 %
53 fweak vel factor read/write
This setup determines the rate of change of the drive’s d-axis current command for an AC motor as a
function of speed above base speed. When it is set to 100% then the d-axis current will be varied above
base speed so that the back emf is constant above base speed. If the fweak velocity factor is set to a
higher percentage then the change in the d-axis current command will be proportionally greater above base
speed.
Units: % min: 0 Default: 100%
54 fweak vsmax ki read/write
Used for voltage limit comp CLOSEDLOOP. Integral error gain for regions 2 & 3 (voltage, voltage & current
limit) to regulate d axis flux to keep output voltage within bus voltage determined constraint.
Units: gain min: 0.000 Default: 150.000
55 fweak vsmax kp read/write
Used for voltage limit comp CLOSEDLOOP. Proportional error gain for region 2 & 3 (voltage, voltage &
current limit) to regulate d axis flux to keep output voltage within bus voltage determined constraint.
56 fweak vdse ki read/write
Used for voltage limit comp CLOSEDLOOP. Integral error gain for region 3 (voltage & current limit) to limit q
axis current command to keep output sync frame d axis voltage within bus voltage determined constraint.
57 fweak id limit read/write
This limits drive’s d-axis current command during synchronous motor flux weakening.
Units: ams rms min: 0.00 Max: maximum current Default: 0.00
58 fweak vdse pct read/write
The percent of the sync frame d axis voltage capability used for flux weakening when voltage limit comp is
CLOSEDLOOP. Typically set at or below 95% to leave voltage margin for current regulation.
Units: % min: 0.00 Max: 100.00 Default: 95.00%

77
59 foldback i ki read/write
Sets the integral gain of the PI current foldback controller for drives operating in V/Hz mode.
Units: gain Min: 0.000 Max: 10.000 Default: 0.500
60 foldback i kp read/write
Sets the proportional gain of the PI current foldback controller for drives operating in V/Hz mode.
61 foldback i uld read/write
Sets the under load foldback current level for the V/Hz foldback controller. After this level of current is
exceeded, the drive will reduce (fold back) the pump speed to control pump off when the motor current falls
below this setting. A value of zero disables this mode.
62 foldback i freq display
Displays the current foldback frequency offset to the commanded frequency.
Units: hertz
63 foldback i state display
Displays the state of the current foldback controller: UNDERLOAD, NORMAL, OVERLOAD_90,
OVERLOAD, OVERLOAD_110.
Units: enum
64 flux vel sample int read/write
Sets the sample interval. Longer sample intervals allow more accurate estimates, but less frequently.
65 flux vel phase tol read/write
Sets the maximum phase difference between the two fundamental frequencies for the flux vel estimate to
be valid.
Units: deg Min: 0 Max: 30 Default: 10
66 flux vel threshold read/write
Sets the mimimum flux vel amplitude for the flux vel estimate to be valid.
67 flux vel error limit read/write
Sets the number of consecutive errors to ride the estimate through before assuming the velocity is zero.
68 flux vel upid delay read/write
Upid delay.
69 flux vel estimate display
Displays the pump speed estimate based on flux feedback and motor parameters.
Units: rpm
70 flux vel amplitude display
Displays the amplitude of the highest peak in the spectrum of the flux vel amplitude display item.
Units: decimal
71 flux vel phase diff display
Displays the phase difference between the fundamental FFT’s of the U and V flux feedback.
Units: deg
72 flux vel phase err display
Displays the phase error between the fundamental FFT’s of the U and V flux feedback and 120º.
Units: deg
73 current limiting read/write
Selects the mode/method used to limit current or fault on overload.
Units: enum
74 bus voltage display
Current bus voltage. .
Units: volts Min: 0 Max: 800
75 bus reg read/write
Enables or disables the Bus Regulator to limit regeneration and prevent bus overvoltage faults.
Units: enum
76 bus reg min vel read/write
Sets the minimum motor velocity for active bus regulator operation.
Units: rpm Min: 0 Max: motor max rpm Default: 50
77 bus reg tol vel read/write
Sets the maximum overspeed allowed during bus regulation.
Units: rpm Min: 0 Max: motor max rpm Default: 100
78 bus reg tol time
Sets the fault delay time after bus reg tol vel is exceeded.
Units: secs Min: 0 Max: 999 Default: 0

78
79 bus reg tol dec
Sets the bus regulator deceleration tolerance.
80 bus reg kp read/write
Sets the proportional gain for the bus regulator.
81 bus reg kd read/write
Sets the derivative gain for the bus regulator.
82 bus reg upper limit read/write
The set-point for the bus regulator, usually set to 120% of the nominal bus voltage. For a 460 volt drive,
this parameter should be set around 745 volts.
83 base vel vbus comp read/write
Field weakening point based on bus voltage selection.
DISABLE = Don’t compensate.
ENABLE = Compensate field weakening start point for bus voltage.
Units: enum
84 torq reg select read/write
Torque regulator selection.
DISABLE = Open Loop.
ESTIMATED = Closed Loop on the electrical torque estimate shown as torque fbk in the bar graph. This
method requires tuning value setup in the global dictionary. Use torq reg wn through torq reg kp fbk to tune
the regulator. Suitable for extremely high dynamic response.
Units: enum
85 treg iqrg tuning read/write
This determines tuing order of the torque regulator and q-axis current regulator.Selection.
Units: enum Default: SECOND ORDER
86 torq reg wn read/write
This item is the bandwidth of the torque loop. This item will automatically set the torque regulator gains if
the torque regulator source is selected to be estimated.
NOTE: If this item is set to zero the individual gains may be manually adjusted.
NOTE: if modulation select is set to space vector (or sine triangle) this item will also set the bandwidth of its
regulator.
87 torq reg kp cmd pct read/write
This is used for calculating the torq reg kp cmd when torq iqreg tuning is SECOND ORDER.
88 torq reg kp cmd read/write
Tuning gain for the torque regulator.
Units: gain Min: 0 Default: 0
89 torq reg ki read/write
90 torq reg kp fbk read/write
91 br phase loss enable read/write
Enable to allow bus ripple phase-loss detection. This must be set to DISABLE for 1200 series drives.
Units: enum
92 pl rip current display
Displays the actual ripple current.
Units: amps
93 pl filtered current display
Displays the filtered ripple current.
Units: amps

79
94 pl trip current read/write
The phase-loss trip level. Consult factory prior to adjusting default values.
Units: amps
95 bus capacitance read/write
Used for the calculation of the pahse loss ripple current. Consult factory prior to adjusting default values.
Units: uf
The following table shows the correct default bus capacitance and pl trip current settings for
460VAC 1100 and 1105 series drives:
Drive Default 1100 Default 1100 Default 1105 Default 1105

HP bus capacitance pl trip current bus capacitance pl trip current
(ET) (uF) (uF)
(A) (A) The following
10 600 4.81 470 9.62 table shows the
correct default
15 1150 6.85 820 13.70 bus
20 1150 8.65 1230 17.30 capacitance
and pl trip
25 2300 12.85 1230 25.70 current settings
30 2300 16.45 1640 32.9 for 380VAC
1100 and 1105
40 3450 20.65 2000 41.30 series drives:
50 3450 24.25 2410 48.50
60 4600 31.45 2820 62.9
75 4600 39.25 4600 39.25
100 5750 46.45 5750 46.45
125 6900 57.85 6900 57.85
150 6900 74.65 6900 74.65
200 6900 93.85 10800 93.85
250 10800 108.25 12600 108.25
300 12600 144.25 14400 144.25
Drive Default 1100 Default 1100 Default 1105 Default 1105
HP
bus capacitance pl trip current bus capacitance pl trip current
(ET)
(uF) (uF)
(A) (A)
10 1150 6.85 820 13.70
15 1150 8.65 1230 17.30

80
20 2300 12.85 1230 25.70
25 2300 16.45 1640 32.9
30 3450 20.65 2000 41.30
40 3450 24.25 2410 48.50
50 4600 31.45 2820 62.9
60 4600 39.25 4600 39.25
75 5750 46.45 5750 46.45
100 6900 57.85 6900 57.85
125 6900 74.65 6900 74.65
150 6900 93.85 10800 93.85
200 10800 108.25 12600 108.25
250 12600 144.25 14400 144.25

81
6.11 Signal In Menu
Table 6-11—Signal In Menu Parameters
0 calibrate analog select read/write
Choose which signal to calibrate. Once both set min and set max has been done, this value will return to
disabled.
Units: enum
1 calibrate analog set read/write
Allows setting of the full-scale range of the analog input by setting its maximum and minimum values
(disable, set min, set max).
Visibility: calibrate analog select is not disabled.
Units: enum
2 calibrate max volts display
The value read during SET MAX step of the analog calibration process. While the calibration is in process
this value or calibrate min volts will be equal to 99.999, showing which value is still undetermined.
Units: volts
3 calibrate min volts display
The value read during SET MIN step of the analog calibration process. While the calibration is in process
this value or calibrate max volts will be equal to 99.999, showing which value is still undetermined.
Units: volts
Determines the source of the pump speed command when the auto mode of operation is selected by the
auto enable input. The types of pump speed sources include: KEYPAD, ADC POT, SERIAL EXTERNAL,
ADC EXTERNAL, LEVEL PIP, LEVEL PIP EST, TANK LEVEL, PIP, PIP EST, and TRANSIT TIME PUMP
OFF.
Units: enum
Determines the source of the pump speed command when the manual mode of operation is selected by
the hand enable input. The types of pump speed sources include: KEYPAD, ADC POT, and LAST AUTO.
Units: enum
If auto or hand speed source is KEYPAD, then an appropriate preset value must be manually entered.
Visibility: auto speed source or hand speed source = KEYPAD
7 external speed read/write
The pump speed reference when the selected auto speed source is set to SERIAL EXTERNAL, generally
sourced via serial communications.
Visibility: auto speed source is SERIAL EXTERNAL
Units: enum
process.
If pot speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog input
Units: rpm

82
Units: enum
process.
If external speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog
input voltage. This value will be 0 if pot speed source = DISABLED.
Units: rpm
20 casing prs source read/write
Choose one of the available inputs. An error message will appear if the Input has already associated with
another signal or the Input is not available.
Units: enum Default: KEYPAD
21 casing prs min read/write
The minimum value for the scaling of the input.
Visibility: casing prs source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: pressure units Default: 0
22 casing prs max read/write
The maximum value for the scaling of the input.
23 casing prs min volts read/write
24 casing prs max volts read/write
The maximum voltage expected at the analog input.
25 casing prs rtu word read/write
The Modbus Master source instruction for the RTU Master protocol.
Visibility: casing prs source is MODBUS MASTER
Units: AAADUURRRRR A=address, D=decimals, U=Units, R=register address.
Address (A): Leading 0’s are omitted.
Decimals (D): Valid values: 0 = Integer, 1 = x.x, 2 = x.xx, 3 = x.xxx, 4 = x.xxxx, 5 = x.xxxxx, 6 = x.xxxxxx, 7
= x.xxxxxxx, 8 = x.xxxxxxxx, 9 = Floating Point value. Note: Floating point values are always read as two
16-bit registers.
Units (UU): The device documentation will list the units of the value. Chose an appropriate selection from
the following: 01 = psi, 02 = bar, 03=kpa, 04=gpm, 05=lpm,06=bpd, 07=cmpd, 08=scfm, 09=scmh,
10=mscfd, 11=mscmd, 12= deg C, 13 = deg F, 14=volts, 15=%, 16=rpm, 17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
26 casing prs value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if casing prs
source = KEYPAD.
Visibility: casing prs source is not KEYPAD
27 casing prs read/write
The pressure in the casing. If the pumping unit is producing up the tubing, enter tubing pressure here. If
casing prs source
= KEYPAD, enter value, otherwise value is read from the signal.
Units: pressure units Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 0

83
28 casing prs min fault read/write
The minimum voltage before a fault is issued.
Units: pressure units Min: casing prs min Max: casing prs max Default: 0
29 casing prs max fault read/write
The maximum voltage before a fault is issued.
30 casing prs min warning read/write
The minimum voltage before a warning is issued.
31 casing prs max warning read/write
The maximum voltage before a warning is issued.
32 casing prs fault time read/write
The time that must elapse to convert a warning condition to a fault. Fault masks are automatically handled:
A value of 0 disables warnings converting to faults and only warnings will be logged in the Event Log. No
fault condition will be logged nor will the drive stop.
If the value is non-zero, and the value is within the warning range, a warning will be logged, and if the value
remains in the warning range for this amount of time, a fault will be logged and the drive will be stopped.
If the value is non-zero, and the value is within the fault range a fault will be logged and the drive will be
stopped.
Units: mins Default: 0.00
33 casing prs restart delay read/write
The time that must elapse after the condition returns to normal before an auto fault restart is attempted. A
value of 0 disables restarts for this condition.
restart attempts > 0
34 casing temp source read/write
35 casing temp min read/write
Units: F/C Default: 0
36 casing temp max read/write
37 casing temp min volts read/write
38 casing temp max volts read/write
39 casing temp rtu word read/write
Visibility: casing prs source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
40 casing temp value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if casing prs
source = DISABLED.
Visibility: casing prs source is not DISABLED

84
41 casing temp min fault read/write
Units: F/C Min: casing temp min Max: casing temp max Default: 0
42 casing temp max fault read/write
43 casing temp min warning read/write
44 casing temp max warning read/write
45 casing temp fault time read/write
stopped.
46 casing temp restart delay read/write
47 tubing prs source read/write
48 tubing prs min read/write
Visibility: tubing prs source is ADC1 – ADC 11
49 tubing prs max read/write
50 tubing prs min volts read/write
51 tubing prs max volts read/write
52 tubing prs rtu word read/write
Visibility: tubing prs source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
53 tubing prs value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if tubing prs
source = KEYPAD.
Visibility: tubing prs source is not KEYPAD

85
54 low prs flow delay read/write
The time to delay checking for a low pressure or low flow condition after the pump is started from any
stopped state.
Visibility: digital in 7 select is LOW PRS FLOW
fluid flow source is not ESTIMATE
tubing prs source is not KEYPAD
55 tubing prs read/write
The pressure in the tubing. If the pumping unit is producing up the tubing, enter tubing pressure here. If
tubing prs source
56 tubing prs min fault read/write
The minimum voltage before a fault is issued. Uses low prs flow delay to delay checking for a low pressure
after the pump is started from any stopped state.
Units: pressure units Min: tubing prs min Max: tubing prs max Default: -10000.0
57 tubing prs max fault read/write
Units: pressure units Min: tubing prs min Max: tubing prs max Default: 10000.0
58 tubing prs min warning read/write
The minimum voltage before a warning is issued. Uses low prs flow delay to delay checking for a low
pressure after the pump is started from any stopped state.
Units: pressure units Min: tubing prs min Max: tubing prs max Default: -10000.0
59 tubing prs max warning read/write
Units: pressure units Min: tubing prs min Max: tubing prs max Default: 10000.0
60 tubing prs fault time read/write
stopped.
61 tubing prs restart delay read/write
62 tubing temp source read/write
63 tubing temp min read/write
Visibility: tubing temp source is ADC1 – ADC 11
64 tubing temp max read/write
65 tubing temp min volts read/write
66 tubing temp max volts read/write

86
67 tubing temp rtu word read/write
Visibility: tubing temp source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
stopped state.
69 tubing temp value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if tubing temp
source = DISABLED.
Visibility: tubing temp source is not DISABLED
70 tubing temp min fault read/write
Units: F/C Min: tubing temp min Max: tubing temp max Default: -10000.00
71 tubing temp max fault read/write
Units: F/C Min: tubing temp min Max: tubing temp max Default: 10000.00
72 tubing temp min warning read/write
Units: F/C Min: tubing temp min Max: tubing temp max Default: -10000.00
73 tubing temp max warning read/write
Units: F/C Min: tubing temp min Max: tubing temp max Default: 10000.00
74 tubing temp fault time read/write
stopped.
75 tubing temp restart delay read/write
76 fluid flow source read/write
Units: enum Default: ESTIMATE
77 fluid flow min read/write
Visibility: fluid flow source is ADC1 – ADC 11
78 fluid flow max read/write

87
79 fluid flow min volts read/write
80 fluid flow max volts read/write
81 fluid flow rtu word read/write
Visibility: fluid flow source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
stopped state.
83 fluid flow value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if fluid flow
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: fluid flow source is not ESTIMATE
The fluid flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and stroking rate
updated once per stroke.
85 fluid flow min fault read/write
The minimum voltage before a fault is issued. Uses low prs flow delay to delay checking for a low flow
condition after the pump is started from any stopped state.
Units: fluid flow units Min: -10000 Max: Default: -10000.00
86 fluid flow max fault read/write
Units: fluid flow units Min: -10000 Max: Default: 10000.00
87 fluid flow min warning read/write
The minimum voltage before a warning is issued. Uses low prs flow delay to delay checking for a low flow
condition after the pump is started from any stopped state.
Units: fluid flow units Min: -10000 Max: Default: -10000.00
88 fluid flow max warning read/write
Units: fluid flow units Min: -10000 Max: Default: 10000.00
89 fluid flow fault time read/write
stopped.

88
90 fluid flow restart delay read/write
91 gas flow source read/write
92 gas flow min read/write
Visibility: gas flow source is ADC1 – ADC 11
93 gas flow max read/write
Units: flow units
94 gas flow min volts read/write
95 gas flow max volts read/write
96 gas flow rtu word read/write
Visibility: gas flow source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
stopped state.
98 gas flow value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if gas flow
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: gas flow source is not DISABLED
99 gas flow monitor display
The gas flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and stroking rate
100 gas flow min fault read/write
Units: gas flow units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: -10000.0
101 gas flow max fault read/write
Units: gas flow units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: 10000.0
102 gas flow min warning read/write
Units: gas flow units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: -10000.0

89
103 gas flow max warning read/write
Units: gas flow units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: 10000.0
104 gas flow fault time read/write
stopped.
105 gas flow restart delay read/write
106 intake prs source read/write
107 intake prs min read/write
Visibility: intake prs source is ADC1 – ADC 11
108 intake prs max read/write
109 intake prs min volts read/write
110 intake prs max volts read/write
111 intake prs rtu word read/write
Visibility: intake prs source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
112 low prs flow delay display
stopped state.
113 intake prs value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if intake prs
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: intake prs source is not ESTIMATE
The intake prs of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and stroking rate

90
115 intake prs min fault read/write
The minimum value before a fault is issued.
Units: pressure units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: -10000.0
116 intake prs max fault read/write
The maximum value before a fault is issued.
Units: pressure units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: 10000.0
117 intake prs min warning read/write
The minimum value before a warning is issued.
118 intake prs max warning read/write
The maximum value before a warning is issued.
Units: pressure units Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: 10000.0
119 intake prs fault time read/write
stopped.
120 intake prs restart delay read/write
121 discharge prs source read/write
122 discharge prs min read/write
Visibility: discharge prs source is ADC1 – ADC 11
123 discharge prs max read/write
124 discharge prs min volts read/write
125 discharge prs max volts read/write
126 discharge prs rtu word read/write
Visibility: discharge prs source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.

91
127 low prs flow delay display
stopped state.
128 discharge prs value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if discharge
prs source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: discharge prs source is not ESTIMATE
129 pump discharge pressure display
The discharge prs of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, pump stroke, pump fill and stroking
rate updated once per stroke.
130 discharge prs min fault read/write
131 discharge prs max fault read/write
Units: pressure units Min: 0.0 Max: Default: 10000.0
132 discharge prs min warning read/write
133 discharge prs max warning read/write
134 discharge prs fault time read/write
stopped.
135 discharge prs restart delay read/write
136 diffl prs source read/write
Choose one of the available inputs.
Units: enum Default: CALCULATE
137 differential prs estimate display
The display of the estimated differential pressure value.
stopped state.
139 diffl prs value display
The display of the differential pressure value.
140 pump differential prs display
The display of the pump differential pressure value.

92
141 diffl prs min fault read/write
142 diffl prs max fault read/write
143 diffl prs min warning read/write
144 diffl prs max warning read/write
145 diffl prs fault time read/write
stopped.
146 diffl prs restart delay read/write
147 fluid temp source read/write
148 fluid temp min read/write
Visibility: fluid temp source is f ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: F/C
149 fluid temp max read/write
Visibility: fluid temp source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: F/C
150 fluid temp min volts read/write
151 fluid temp max volts read/write
152 fluid temp rtu word read/write
Visibility: fluid temp source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
153 fluid temp value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if fluid temp
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: fluid temp source is not DISABLED
Units: F/C
154 fluid temperature display
The display of the fluid temperature value.
Units: F/C

93
155 fluid temp min fault read/write
Units: F/C Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: -10000.0
156 fluid temp max fault read/write
Units: F/C Min: -10000.0 Max: Default: 10000.0
157 fluid temp min warning read/write
158 fluid temp max warning read/write
159 fluid temp fault time read/write
stopped.
160 fluid temp restart delay read/write
161 motor temp source read/write
162 motor temp min read/write
Visibility: motor temp source is f ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: F/C
163 motor temp max read/write
Visibility: motor temp source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: F/C
164 motor temp min volts read/write
165 motor temp max volts read/write
166 motor temp rtu word read/write
Visibility: motor temp source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.

94
167 motor temp value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if motor temp
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: motor temp source is not DISABLED
Units: F/C
168 motor temp min fault read/write
169 motor temp max fault read/write
170 motor temp min warning read/write
171 motor temp max warning read/write
172 motor temp fault time read/write
stopped.
173 motor temp restart delay read/write
174 vibrtn x source read/write
175 vibrtn x min read/write
Visibility: vibrtn x source is f ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: g
176 vibrtn x max read/write
Visibility: vibrtn x source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: g
177 vibrtn x min volts read/write
178 vibrtn x max volts read/write

95
179 vibrtn x rtu word read/write
Visibility: vibrtn x source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
180 vibrtn x value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if vibrtn x
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: vibrtn x source is not DISABLED
Units: g
181 vibrtn x min fault read/write
Units: g Min: -1000.000 Max: 1000.000 Default: -1000.000
182 vibrtn x max fault read/write
Units: g Min: -1000.000 Max: 1000.000 Default: 1000.000
183 vibrtn x min warning read/write
Units: g Min: -1000.000 Max: 1000.000 Default: -1000.000
184 vibrtn x max warning read/write
Units: g Min: -1000.000 Max: 1000.000 Default: 1000.000
185 vibrtn x fault time read/write
stopped.
186 vibrtn x restart delay read/write
187 vibrtn y source read/write
188 vibrtn y min read/write
Visibility: vibrtn y source is f ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: g
189 vibrtn y max read/write
Visibility: vibrtn y source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: g
190 vibrtn y min volts read/write

96
191 vibrtn y max volts read/write
192 vibrtn y rtu word read/write
Visibility: vibrtn y source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
193 vibrtn y value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if vibrtn y
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: vibrtn y source is not DISABLED
Units: g
194 vibrtn y min fault read/write
Units: g Min: -1000.000 Max: Default: -1000.000
195 vibrtn y max fault read/write
196 vibrtn y min warning read/write
197 vibrtn y max warning read/write
198 vibrtn y fault time read/write
stopped.
199 vibrtn y restart delay read/write
200 leakage source read/write
201 leakage min read/write
Visibility: leakage source is f ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: amps
202 leakage max read/write
Visibility: leakage source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: amps

97
203 leakage min volts read/write
204 leakage max volts read/write
205 leakage rtu word read/write
Visibility: leakage source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
206 leakage value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if leakage
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: leakage source is not DISABLED
Units: F/C
207 leakage min fault read/write
Units: amps Min: -1000.000 Max: Default: 1000.000
208 leakage max fault read/write
Units: amps Min: -1000.000 Max: Default: -1000.000
209 leakage min warning read/write
Units: amps Min: -1000.000 Max: Default: -1000.000
210 leakage max warning read/write
Units: amps Min: -1000.000 Max: Default: 1000.000
211 leakage fault time read/write
stopped.
212 leakage restart delay read/write
213 dh tool current source read/write
214 dh tool current min read/write
Visibility: dh tool current source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: mA

98
215 dh tool current max read/write
Units: mA
216 dh tool current min volts read/write
217 dh tool current max volts read/write
218 dh tool current rtu word read/write
Visibility: dh tool current source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
219 dh tool current value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if user A
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: dh tool current source is not DISABLED
Units: mA
220 dh tool current min fault read/write
Units: mA
221 dh tool current max fault read/write
Units: mA
222 dh tool current min warning read/write
Units: mA
223 dh tool current max warning read/write
Units: mA
224 dh tool current fault time read/write
stopped.
225 dh tool current restart delay read/write
226 dh tool voltage source read/write

99
227 dh tool voltage min read/write
Visibility: dh tool voltage source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: mA
228 dh tool voltage max read/write
Units: mA
229 dh tool voltage min volts read/write
230 dh tool voltage max volts read/write
231 dh tool voltage rtu word read/write
Visibility: dh tool current source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
232 dh tool voltage value display
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: dh tool voltage source is not DISABLED
Units: mA
233 dh tool voltage min fault read/write
Visibility: dh tool voltagesource is not DISABLED
Units: mA
234 dh tool voltage max fault read/write
Units: mA
235 dh tool voltage min warning read/write
Units: mA
236 dh tool voltage max warning read/write
Units: mA
237 dh tool voltage fault time read/write
stopped.
238 dh tool voltage restart delay read/write

100
239 user A source read/write
240 user A units read/write
Choose one.
Visibility: user A source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: enum Default: VOLTS
241 user A min read/write
Units: user A units
242 user A max read/write
Units: user A units
243 user A min volts read/write
244 user A max volts read/write
245 user A rtu word read/write
Visibility: user A source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
246 user A value display
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: user A source is not DISABLED
Units: user A units
247 user A min fault read/write
Units: user A units
248 user A max fault read/write
Units: user A units
249 user A min warning read/write
Units: user A units
250 user A max warning read/write
Units: user A units
251 user A fault time read/write
stopped.

101
252 user A restart delay read/write
253 user B source read/write
254 user B units read/write
Choose one.
Visibility: user B source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: enum Default: VOLTS
255 user B min read/write
Units: user B units
256 user B max read/write
Units: user B units
257 user B min volts read/write
258 user B max volts read/write
259 user B rtu word read/write
Visibility: user B source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
260 user B value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if user B
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: user B source is not DISABLED
Units: user B units
261 user B min fault read/write
Units: user B units
262 user B max fault read/write
Units: user B units
263 user B min warning read/write
Units: user B units
264 user B max warning read/write
Units: user B units

102
265 user B fault time read/write
stopped.
266 user B restart delay read/write
267 water cut source read/write
268 water cut min read/write
Visibility: water cut source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: %
269 water cut max read/write
Units: %
270 water cut min volts read/write
271 water cut max volts read/write
272 water cut rtu word read/write
Visibility: water cut source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
stopped state.
274 water cut value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if water cut
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: water cut source is not DISABLED
Units: %
275 water cut min fault read/write
Units: %
276 water cut max fault read/write
Units: %

103
277 water cut min warning read/write read/write
Units: %
278 water cut max warning read/write
Units: %
279 water cut fault time read/write
stopped.
280 water cut restart delay read/write
281 tank level source read/write read/write
282 tank level min read/write
Visibility: tank level source is ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: fluid level units
283 tank level max read/write
284 tank level min volts read/write
285 tank level max volts read/write
286 tank level rtu word read/write
Visibility: tank level source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
stopped state.
288 tank level action read/write
Selects the action to take to control the tank level: either the pump FILLs the tank, or EMPTYs it.
Units: enum Default: FILL

104
289 tank level standby read/write
If the level reaches this value, the drive will turn off and go into a standby mode, until the level goes past
the tank level on level. For example if FILLing, standby may be set to 10.0 ft and on level 8.0 ft. If the level
goes above 10.0 ft, the drive will turn off. When outflow returns and the level drops below 8.0 ft, the drive
will turn back on and control to the setpt.
290 tank level on level read/write
If the drive is in standby mode, it will turn back on when the level goes past this tank level on level.
291 tank level value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if tank level
source = ESTIMATE.
Visibility: tank level source is not DISABLED
292 tank level min fault read/write
293 tank level max fault read/write
294 tank level min warning read/write
295 tank level max warning read/write
296 tank level fault time read/write
stopped.
297 tank level restart delay read/write
298 transit time source read/write
Choose one of the available signals. An error message will appear if the Input has already associated with
299 transit time rtu word read/write
Visibility: transit time source is MODBUS MASTER
16-bit registers.
300 transit time value display
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if inclinometer
source = DISABLED.
Visibility: transit time source isn’t DISABLED
Units: %

105
301 signal in troubleshooter display
Figure 6-1—Pump & Well Signal Flow Diagram
pump torque monitor

MOTOR TORQUE
pump speed monitor
MOTOR SPEED PUMP (outlet press analog > 0 & intake press analog > 0)
MODEL pump differential est pump differential monitor pump intake estimate
PUMP PARAMETERS
pump flow estimate outlet sensor value +
-
intake sensor value
(pump flow source)
estimate
pump outlet monitor
pump flow monitor
flow sensor value
sensor
WELL well inflow estimate

RESERVOIR PARAMETERS
MODEL
pump flow monitor
(tubing press source)
TUBING PARAMETERS TUBING tubing pressure est
estimate
tubing press monitor
MODEL fluid over pump est
RESERVOIR PARAMETERS tubing sensor value
sensor
(casing press analog > 0)

casing pressure est
estimate casing press monitor fluid level monitor
casing sensor value
sensor
pump intake estimate + 1 fluid over pump est

casing fluid density
-
casing press monitor
(intake press analog)
pump intake estimate
estimate
pump intake monitor + 1 fluid over pump monitor
intake press value casing fluid density
sensor -
casing press monitor

106
6.12 Signal Out Menu
Table 6-12—Signal Out Menu Parameters
0 dac clock level read/write
The dac outputs are written on this clock setup. Power must be cycled when this value is changed to
reconfigure the dac clock to run at the new level.
Units: enum Default: DRIVE CLOCK
1 dac 1 select read/write
Allows selection of the variable to be output from the analog channel.
Visibility: dac 1 select is not DISABLED
2 dac 1 item read/write
This item holds the dictionary address which value is currently being written.
Visibility: dac 1 select is ITEM
Units: decimal
3 dac 1 ptr read/write
This item holds the memory address which value is currently being written.
Visibility: dac 1 select is SHORT PTR or LONG PTR
Units: decimal
4 dac 1 auto scale read/write
Certain dac signal’s scaling is calculated from other setup items. For example, UPID VEL_CMD’s mulipliers
and divisors are calculated from max rpm. When max rpm is changed the dac’s scaling is also changed. If
the dac’s scaling is to be fixed, dac 1 auto scaling should be set to DISABLED. Dac auto scaling should be
ENABLED if the scaling is to be calculated by the software.
Units: decimal
5 dac 1 mul read/write
Used with the associated divisor to scale the analog channel output.
Units: decimal
6 dac 1 div read/write
Used with the associated multiplier to scale the analog channel output.
Units: decimal
7 dac 1 abs read/write
Allows selection of the output of the absolute value of a variable where appropriate.
Units: enum Min: disable Max: enable Default: disable
8 dac 1 output display
The output value.
Visibility: dac 2 select is ITEM
Units: decimal
Visibility: dac 2 select is SHORT PTR or LONG PTR
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal

107
Units: decimal
The output value.
Visibility: Analog Interface Module is installed.
dac 3 select is not DISABLED
dac 3 select is ITEM
Units: decimal

dac 3 select is SHORT PTR or LONG PTR
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
The output value.
Units: decimal

108
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
The output value.
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal

109
The output value.
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
Units: decimal
The output value.

110
6.13 Digital I/O Menu
Table 6-13—Digital I/O Menu Parameters
0 TB1 05 out 0 select read/write
Allows selection of the purpose of terminal block output. Values include: DISABLED, MOTOR ON
STATUS, MOTOR ON FLASH, FAULT STATUS, ENGINE RUN ENABLE, ENGINE AUTO SPD,
STANDBY, EOP ENABLED, VALVE ENABLED, VALVE OPEN, VALVE CLOSE, SIGNAL ALARM,
CALLOUT, ENGINE POWER ENABLE, OVERLOAD, UNDERLOAD,and MAINTENANCE.
Units: enum Default: MOTOR ON FLASH
Units: enum Default: FAULT STATUS
Units: enum Default: OVERLOAD
Units: enum Default: UNDERLOAD
Units: enum Default: STANDBY
Units: enum Default: CALLOUT
6 digital out signal select read/write
If any digital out x select is set to SIGNAL ALARM, used to select the source signal. Values include:
DISABLED, CASING PRS, CASING TEMP, TUBING PRS, TUBING TEMP USER A, USER B, TANK
LEVEL, FLUID TEMP, MOTOR TEMP, BRIDLE, ECU FAULTED, USER FLT 1, USER FLT 2, USER FLT
3, LOW PRS FLOW, HIGH PRS, TANK LVL, EXTERNAL STOP, ROTAFLEX and AUTO OFF JOG
SWITCH, TEST UNWIND, STEP DOWN XFMR, STEP UP XFMR, EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN,
SINEWAVE.
Visibility: digital in x select is SIGNAL ALARM
7 digital out signal mode read/write
If any digital out x select is set to SIGNAL ALARM, used to select the source mode. Values include: MAX
FLT, MAX WARN, FLT RANGE, WARN RANGE, MIN WARN, MIN FLT.
Visibility: digital in x select is SIGNAL ALARM
Units: enum Default: MAX FLT
8 TB1 12 in 0 select read/write
Allows selection of the purpose of terminal block input. Values include: DISABLED, SECURITY BREACH,
BACKSPIN, ENGINE RUNNING, ECU FAULTED, USER FLT 1, USER FLT2, USER FLT 3, LOW PRS
FLOW, HIGH PRS, TANK LVL, EXTERNAL STOP, AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH, EOP ENABLE, CSG
VALVE CONTROL, FAULT RESET, TEST UNWIND, LEVEL TEST, DB THERMAL, STEP DOWN XFMR,
and STEP UP XFMR, EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN, GAS LEAK, SINEWAVE.
Units: enum Default: DB THERMAL

111
Units: enum Default: BACKSPIN
Units: enum Default: FAULT RESET
Units: enum Default: LOW PRS FLOW
Units: enum Default: SECURITY BREACH
17 external stop input read/write
Sets the logic polarity for the terminal block input. Values include: TRUE ON OPEN, TRUE ON CLOSE.
Visibility: digital in x select is EXTERNAL STOP
Units: enum Default: TRUE ON OPEN
18 external stop restart override read/write
Allows restarts on this fault if restart attempts = 0
Visibility: restart attempts = 0
digital in x select is EXTERNAL STOP
Units: enum Default: ENABLE

112
19 external stop time restart delay read/write
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts > 0 or external stop restart override = ENABLE, the
drive will allow Auto-Restarts on this fault and this value will be selected for restart time should this fault
should occur.
digital in x select is EXTERNAL STOP
20 db thermal input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is DB THERMAL
21 db thermal time read/write
Delays the fault detection. A value of 0 disables the fault detection.
Visibility: digital in x select is DB THERMAL
22 db thermal restart delay read/write
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts > 0 the drive will allow Auto-Restarts on this fault and
digital in x select is DB THERMAL
23 security breach input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is SECURITY BREACH
24 security breach time read/write
25 security breach restart delay read/write
digital in x select is SECURITY BREACH
26 step down xfmr input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is STEP DOWN XFMR
27 step down xfmr fault time read/write
28 step down xfmr restart delay read/write
digital in x select is STEP DOWN XFMR
29 step up xfmr input read/write
30 step up xfmr fault time read/write
31 step up xfmr restart delay read/write
digital in x select is STEP DOWN XFMR
32 output sine overload input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is SINEWAVE

113
33 output sine overload fault time read/write
34 output sine restart delay read/write
digital in x select is SINEWAVE
35 input matrix input read/write
36 input matrix fault time read/write
37 input matrix restart delay read/write
digital in x select is SINEWAVE
38 aoj stop input read/write
Units: enum Default: TRUE ON CLOSE
39 aoj stop restart override read/write
digital in x select is AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH
aoj stop restart delay is not 0.00
40 aoj stop restart delay read/write
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts > 0 or aoj stop restart override = ENABLE, the drive
will allow Auto-Restarts on this fault and this value will be selected for restart time should this fault should
occur.
digital in x select is AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH
41 emergency sd input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
42 emergency sd restart override read/write
digital in x select is EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
aoj stop restart delay is not 0.00
43 emergency sd restart delay read/write
digital in x select is EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
44 low prs flow input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is LOW PRS FLOW
stopped state.

114
46 low prs flow time read/write
47 low prs flow restart delay read/write
digital in x select is LOW PRS FLOW
48 high prs input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is HIGH PRS
49 high prs time read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is HIGH PRS
50 high prs restart delay read/write
digital in x select is HIGH PRS
51 tank lvl input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is TANK LVL
stopped state.
53 tank lvl time read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is TANK LVL
54 tank lvl restart delay read/write
digital in x select is TANK LVL
55 gas leak input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is GAS LEAK
56 gas leak restart delay read/write
digital in x select is GAS LEAK
57 user 1 fault input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is USER FLT 1
58 user 1 fault time read/write

115
59 user 1 fault restart delay read/write
digital in x select is USER FLT 1
66 fault reset input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is FAULT RESET
67 backspin input read/write
Visibility: digital in x select is BACKSPIN
68 level test input read/write
69 test unwind input read/write
70 ecu flt input read/write
71 eng running input read/write
72 eop enable input read/write
73 valve enable input read/write

116
external source is used, select MAINTAINED. If this input is not used, select FORCED ON to mimic a
hardwired jumper.
Note: if this parameter is set to LATCHED and a start push button is employed, the drive will automatically
start after the Auto Enable input is true and the power up time delay expires.
Units: enum Default: MAINTAINED
75 pump troubleshooter read/write

117
6.14 Comm Menu
Table 6-14—Comm Parameters
0 console protocol read/write
The console (RS485 or RS232) port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, MODBUS RTU,
REMOTE KEYPAD,RTU MASTER.
Units: enum Default: ESP
1 console term type read/write
This item determines the port’s emulated terminal type. Value include: VT100, RCA.
Visibility: console protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum Default: VT100
2 console term size read/write
This item determines the port’s emulated terminal size.
Visibility: console protocol = DRIVE MENU
Units: enum Default: 24x40
3 console address read/write
The console port address.
Units: Min: 0 Max: varies Default: 1
4 console baud rate read/write
The console port baud rate.
Units: Min: 300 Max: 115200 Default: 57600
5 console parity read/write
The console port parity (none, even, odd).
Units: enum Default: none
6 console rtu gap read/write
Console rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of baud
rate. A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as
specified in the rtu specification).
Visibility: console protocol = MODBUS RTU
Units: sec Default: 0.000
7 console rtu slave timeout read/write
Drive will report the Modbus RTU Comm Loss Fult if this timeout setup is not zero and new
packet is received within time specified by this timouteout setup.
8 console units read/write
Console units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the console port
protocol.
Units: enum Min: english Max: metric Default: English
9 console pos units read/write
The console port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
Units: enum Default: REV
10 console vel units read/write
Console pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the
console port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
For example to a data item such as motor velocity in Strokes per Minute, select STROKE for
the pos units setup, and MINUTES on the vel units setup.
Units: enum Default: MINUTES
11 porta protocol read/write
The porta (RS485) port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, MODBUS RTU, REMOTE
KEYPAD, RTU MASTER.
Units: enum Default: MODBUS RTU
12 porta term type read/write
Visibility: porta protocol = DRIVE MENU
13 porta term size read/write
Visibility: porta protocol = DRIVE MENU
14 porta address read/write
The porta port address.

118
15 porta baud rate read/write
The porta port baud rate.
16 porta parity read/write
The porta port parity (none, even, odd).
17 porta stop bits read/write
The stop bit selection for the character of the protocol running on this port.
18 porta rtu gap read/write
Porta rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of baud rate.
A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as specified in
the rtu specification).
Visibility: porta protocol = MODBUS RTU
19 porta rtu slave timeout read/write
20 porta units read/write
Porta units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the porta port protocol.
21 porta pos units read/write
The porta port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
22 porta vel units read/write
Porta pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the porta
port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
23 portb protocol read/write
The portb (RS485) port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, MODBUS RTU, REMOTE
KEYPAD, RTU MASTER.
Visibility: Not available on 100MHz Compact Control Module.
24 portb term type read/write
Visibility: Not available on 100MHz Compact Control Module
portb protocol = DRIVE MENU
25 portb term size read/write
26 portb address read/write
The portb port address.
27 portb baud rate read/write
The portb port baud rate.
28 portb parity read/write
The portb port parity (none, even, odd).
29 portb stop bits read/write

119
30 portb rtu gap read/write
Portb rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of baud rate.
A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as specified in
the rtu specification).
portb protocol = MODBUS RTU
31 portb rtu slave timeout read/write
32 portb units read/write
Portb units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the portb port protocol.
33 portb pos units read/write
The portb port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
menu visibility = MAXIMIZE
34 portb vel units read/write
Portb pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the portb
port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
35 keypad protocol read/write
The keypad port protocol. NONE, ESP.
Visibility: Available on Compact Control Module.
Units: enum Default: ESP
36 keypad term type read/write
Visibility: Available on Compact Control Module
37 keypad term size read/write
38 keypad address read/write
The keypad port address.
39 keypad baud rate read/write
The keypad port baud rate.
40 keypad parity read/write
The keypad port parity (none, even, odd).
41 keypad stop bits read/write
42 console232 protocol read/write
The console RS232 port protocol. NONE, DRIVE MENU, ESP, MODBUS RTU, REMOTE
KEYPAD, RTU MASTER.
Visibility: Available on 100MHz Compact Control Module.

120
43 console232 term type read/write
Visibility: Available on 100MHz Compact Control Module
44 console232 term size read/write
Visibility: Not available on Compact Control Module
45 console232 address read/write
The conole R232 port address.
46 console232 baud rate read/write
The console232 port baud rate.
47 console232 parity read/write
The console R232 port parity (none, even, odd).
48 conseol232 stop bits read/write
49 console232 rtu gap read/write
Console R232 rtu gap sets the maximum interpacket gap to be a fixed value independent of
baud rate. A value of zero set the maximum interpacket gap to be dependent on baud rate as
specified in the rtu specification).
Console232 protocol = MODBUS RTU
50 console232 rtu slave timeout read/write
51 console232 units read/write
Console232 units selects the units used when writing or reading data through the portb port
protocol.
Units: enum Min: English Max: metric Default: English
52 Console232 pos units read/write
The console R232 port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
53 Console232 vel units read/write
Console232 pos units selects the position units used when writing or reading data through the
portb port protocol. Selecting this value will only affect the protocol position units.
Visibility: Not available on Compact Control Module
54 rtu slave type read/write
Use A WELL ALC to automatically set up the RTU Master parameters for A Well ALC type
devices.
Use A WELL TCVR to automatically set up the RTU Master parameters for A Well Tranceiver
type devices.
Use ZENITH or ZENITH KHURAIS to automatically set up the RTU Master parameters
forZenith type devices.
Use GENERIC for devices that a not defined above. Refer to the Modbus RTU Master
Document.
Visibility: Port protocol = RTU MASTER
Units: enum Default: GENERIC

121
55 rtu master poll rate read/write
Used to set the sampling period between queries to the serial slave device.
Units: sec Min: 0.001 Default: 1.000
56 rtu master poll timer display
Readout of the last time to complete polling all of the items.
Units: sec
57 rtu master retries read/write
The number of query retries after a timeout before abandoning the current query. rtu master
error count l will increment. Use rtu master status to assist in troubleshooting.
58 rtu master timeout read/write
The length of time after a query to wait for a response from the slave before resending the
query.
59 rtu master mask read/write
Used to detect and record timeout, crc and comm. setup errors.
Use NONE to disable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection.

Use EVENT to enable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection. Errors will be logged as events.
Use WARNING to enable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection. Errors will be logged as
warnings.
Use FAULT to enable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection. Errors will be logged as faults.
Units: enum
60 rtu master error time read/write
If rtu master mask is not equal to NONE, used to delay the error logging.
rtu master mask is not NONE.
61 rtu master violations display
Number of rtu master violations.
Units: decimal
62 rtu slave mask read/write
Used to detect and record slave error reporting.
For rtu slave type = A WELL: GRND FLT, FAULT, SHUTDOWN, MSG BUFF, MSG XMIT,
OVERTEMP
For rtu slave type = FOXBORO: OFFLINE, PRS ERR, TEMP ERR
Use NONE to disable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection.

Use EVENT to enable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection. Errors will be logged as events.
Use WARNING to enable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection. Errors will be logged as
warnings.
Use FAULT to enable the RTU MASTER ERR error detection. Errors will be logged as faults.
Units: enum
63 rtu slave error time read/write
If rtu master mask is not equal to NONE, used to delay the error logging.
64 rtu slave violations display
Number of rtu slave violations.
Units: decimal

122
65 rtu error action read/write
When there is an error, used to determine the action the Master should take with respect to the
requested parameter assignments.
Use LAST GOOD to keep the last good value received from the slave device.
Use WRITE 0 to assign 0 to the requested parameters.

Units: enum
66 rtu slave status word1 read/write
Used to address the slave device’s error word. Refer to the Modbus RTU Master Document.
Visibility: Port protocol = MODBUS RTU
Decimals (D): Valid values: 0 = Integer, 1 = x.x, 2 = x.xx, 3 = x.xxx, 4 = x.xxxx, 5 = x.xxxxx, 6 =
x.xxxxxx, 7 = x.xxxxxxx, 8 = x.xxxxxxxx, 9 = Floating Point value. Note: Floating point values
are always read as two 16-bit registers.
Units (UU): The device documentation will list the units of the value. Chose an appropriate
selection from the following: 01 = psi, 02 = bar, 03=kpa, 04=gpm, 05=lpm,06=bpd, 07=cmpd,
08=scfm, 09=scmh, 10=mscfd, 11=mscmd, 12= deg C, 13 = deg F, 14=volts, 15=%, 16=rpm,
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
67 rtu slave status raw1 display
Displays the slave device’s error word returned from the last successful query. Refer to the
slave device’s documentation to interpret the meaning of the value.
rtu slave status word 1 is not 0
Units: hex
68 rtu slave status word2 read/write
Used to address the slave device’s error word. Refer to the Modbus RTU Master Document.
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
69 rtu slave status raw2 display
Displays the slave device’s error word returned from the last successful query. Refer to the
slave device’s documentation to interpret the meaning of the value.
rtu slave status word 2 is not 0
Units: hex
70 rtu master word1 read/write
Used to address a slave device’s word. Refer to the Modbus RTU Master Document.
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
71 rtu master units1 read/write
Sets the units for the word to read. VOLTS, PERCENT, RPM, HERTZ, GENERIC, SCFM, PSI,
BAR, FEET, METERS,GPM, BPD, CMPD, LPM, DEG F, DEG C, SCMH, MSCFD, MSCMD
72 rtu master min raw1 read/write
The minimum scale.
Units: decimal Min: Max: Default: 0
73 rtu master max raw1 read/write
The maximum scale.

123
74 rtu master min1 read/write
The minimum voltage equivalent expected.
75 rtu master max1 read/write
76 rtu master value1 display
Displays the slave device’s word returned from the last successful query. Refer to the slave
device’s documentation to interpret the meaning of the value.
rtu master word 1 is not 0
Units: decimal
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
The minimum scale.
The maximum scale.
83 rtu master value 2 display
Units: decimal
17=hz, 18=x.xxx, 19=x.xx
The minimum scale.
The maximum scale.

124
90 rtu master value3 display
Units: decimal
91 rtu master read count display
A display of the device successful reads.
Units: decimal
92 rtu slave status display
A display of the device status: Values include: no info avail, no error reported, slave no err,
function err, data addr err, value err, device failure, acknowledge, busy, negative ack, mem
parity err, a well grnd flt, a well fault, a well shut down, a well msg buff, a well msg xmit, a well
overtemp, foxboro offline, foxboro prs err, foxboro temp err.
Units: enum
93 anybus station addr read/write
The station address for the first Anybus socket.
Visibility: Visible if the Anybus socket contains a Profibus module.
94 anybus ip addr 3 read/write
The most significant byte of the module’s IP address. Normally the IP address is described in
dotted decimal format (for example 128.1.12.102). Since the DSP doesn’t support displaying a
variable in this fashion, it is split into 4 individual byte variables.
Visibility: Visible if the Anybus socket contains an Ethernet module.
The second least significant byte of the module’s IP address.
The first least significant byte of the module’s IP address.
The least significant byte of the module’s IP address.
98 anybus netmask 3 read/write
The most significant byte of the module’s netmask address. Normally the netmask address is
described in dotted decimal format (for example 255.255.0.0). Since the DSP doesn’t support
displaying a variable in this fashion, it is split into 4 byte individual variables.
The second least significant byte of the module’s netmask address.
The first least significant byte of the module’s netmask address.
The least significant byte of the module’s netmask address.

125
102 anybus gateway 3 read/write
This is the most significant byte of the module’s gateway mask address. Normally the netmask
address is described in dotted decimal format (for example 255.255.0.0). Since the DSP
doesn’t support displaying a variable in this fashion, it is split into 4 byte individual variables.
106 anybus units read/write
The anybus port dimension system (english, metric).
Visibility: Visible if the Anybus socket contains a module.
Units: enum Default: ENGLISH
107 anybus pos units read/write
The anybus port position units (in mm, feet meter, degree, rev, stroke).
Units: enum Default: IN MM
108 anybus vel units read/write
The anybus port divisor for velocity units (seconds, minutes).
Units: enum Default: SECONDS
109 anybus swap read/write
Used to enable the swaping of the bytes of the read or write.
110 anybus clock read/write
Anybus clock select the clock level the serial DACs (SDAC) and serial ADCs (SADC) are
mapped from the module (fast clock, ac clock, upid clock, drive clock, slow clock). Power must
be cycled when this value is changed.
Units: enum Default: UPID CLOCK
111 anybus input slots read/write
Sets the number of write slots for the anybus input area. Depending on the protocol, a slot can
be either a 16 bit word or a 32 bit word.
Units: decimal Min: 1 Max: dependent on module tupe Default: 32
112 anybus output slots read/write
Sets the number of read slots for the anybus output area.. Depending on the protocol, a slot
can be either a 16 bit word or a 32 bit word.
Units: decimal Min: 1 Max: dependent on module tupe Default: 32
113 anybus read 0 read/write
Each slot of the Anybus’s 16 slots may be configured to select the source of the slot’s data.
The table below indicates the possible settings. See the section Anybus Configuration for more
information.
Units: decimal Min: -10000 Max: None Default: -100
information.
Units: decimal Min: -10000 Max: None Default: -1 - Disabled

126
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.
information.

127
information.
information.
information.
129 anybus write 0 read/write
Each slot of the Anybus’s 16 slots may be configured to select the destination of the slot’s data.
The table below indicates the possible settings. See the section Anybus Configuration for
more information.
Units: decimal Min: -10000 Max: None Default: -100
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.

128
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
more information.
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates
that there are no items that currently need addressed.
Used to “hide” those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and navigation.
Choose MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu
parameters.
Figure 6-2—Anybus Read/Write Values
Anybus Read/Write ## Value Description

-1 Disable
-100 Serial outputs word 0 and 1

129
-200 Serial DACs 0 and 1
-202 Serial DACs 2 and 3
-300 Indirect Status – Word 0
Bit 0 is set to indicate valid read data
in read value
Bit 1 is set to indicate Unico ready to
accept new write data
Bit 2 is set to indicate last indirect
write failed
Word 1
Each bit corresponds to direct write
OK or fails
-301 Indirect read value
0 .. max Dictionary item number to read
directly

130
6.15 AHD™ Menu
This menu contains parameters for controlling the Active Harmonic Damping feature of the drive.
This is used to reduce the input harmonics on the supply power. If password protection is enabled,
this menu requires Level 3 password.
Table 6-15—AHD Menu Parameters
0 ahd decouple read/write
Configure the ahd decouple feature. (DISABLED – AHD disabled,
ENABLED – enabled via closed loop control – cancel specific harmonics in the bus,
LATCHED – latch the adapted manipulation to dictionary items mqr and mdr, COMMANDED – enabled via
open loop using entered mqr and mdr values)
1 ahd reg mode read/write
AHD mode. (0-DVBUS, 1-INV HP,
2-IBUSIN, 3-IBUSINRGWSKI)
Units: enum Default: DVBUS
2 ahd phase offset read/write
AHD phase offset
Units: deg Default: 0
3 ahd output offset read/write
AHD output offset
Units: deg Default: 0
4 ahd ki read/write
Integral gain for the ahd. Used only when ahd decouple is set to ENABLED
Units: gain Default: 0.1
5 ahd kp read/write
Proportional gain for the ahd. Used only when ahd decouple is set to ENABLED
Units: gain Default: 0.1
6 ahd qd r filter read/write
This item is harmonic frame low pass filter time constant.
7 ahd inverter hp filter read/write
Harmonic frame inverter hp filter time constant
8 ahd h1 read/write
An integer specifying the first harmonic to minimize. Typically multipes of 6 (6,12,18) dependant on the
system dominant harmonic.
Units: decimal Default: 6
9 ahd h1 dqh cmd read/write
Q axis harmonic regulator Reference for AHD.
10 ahd h1 ddh cmd read/write
D axis harmonic regurater Reference for AHD
11 ahd h1 mqh read/write
This item is Q axis manipulation for the AHD. It is not used in ENABLED mode but written mode from
ENABLED. Alternatively it can be manually set for COMMANDED mode.
12 ahd h1 mdh read/write
This item is D axis manipulation for the AHD. It is not used in ENABLED mode but written mode from
13 ahd h2 read/write

131
Table 6-15—AHD Menu Parameters
18 ahd h3 read/write
23 modulation index display
The modulation index readout is the ratio of fundamental inverter/converter output line to bus midpoint
voltage divided by bus voltage over 2. Modulation index is calculated with feedback line and bus voltages
and so represents the actual delivered modulation index. It can be used as a quick check of the voltage
headroom of the inverter/converter. For values of modulation index greater than 1.15 “pulse dropping” is
occurring indication lack of available bus voltage headroom to produce sinusoidal fundamental voltage
output.
Units: decimal
24 motor current monitor display
The measured rms current of the motor, reflected to the drive (transformer input current).
Units: amps
25 motor voltage monitor display
The measured rms voltage of the motor, reflected to the drive (transformer input voltage).
Units: amps
26 motor power monitor display
The measured rms power of the motor.
Units: amps
27 bus voltage display
Units: volts
Units : Hertz
29 motor rpm display
The measured motor speed in rpm.
Units : rpm
30 bus capacitance read/write
Used for the calculation of the pahse loss ripple current. Consult factory prior to adjusting default values.
Units: uf
32 menu visibilityUsed to “hide” those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and read/write
navigation. Choose MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu
parameters.

132
6.16 Pump Menu
Table 6-16—Pump Menu Parameters
0 pump intake depth read/write
The location of the down-hole pump from the surface. Do not include any deviation, true vertical depth
(TVD).
Units: ft/m (TVD) Min: 0 Max: 19999 Default: 0
1 ave perforation depth read/write
The location of the perforations measured from the surface to the mid point of the perforations (TVD).
2 tubing type read/write
The tubing material type of construction.
Units: enum Default: STEEL PIPE
3 tubing length read/write
The length of the tubing between the pump discharge and the surface tubing pressure measurement point.
Units: ft/m Min: 0 Max: 19999 Default: 0
4 tubing outer diameter read/write
The outside diameter of the tubing.
Units: inch/mm Min: 0.0000 Max: 9.9999 Default: 0.0000
5 tubing inner diameter read/write
The inside diameter of the tubing.
6 casing inner diameter read/write
The inside diameter of the casing.
7 pump length read/write
The overall length of the pump body.
Units: ft/m Min: 0.0 Max: 999.9 Default: 0.0
8 pump base speed read/write
The pump speed used to characterize the performance curves.
9 pump base flow read/write
The pump flow used to characterize the performance curves.
Units: bpd Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: 0
10 pump rated lift read/write
The pump rated lift.
Units: ft/m Min: 0 Max: 19999 Default: 0
11 pump torque at rated lift read/write
The pump torque at rated lift.
Units: ftlb Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0
12 pump mid point flow read/write
The pump flow at the selected mid point used to characterize the performance curves.
13 pump end point flow read/write
The pump flow at the selected end point used to characterize the performance curves.
14 read/write
15 pump mid point head read/write
The pump head at the selected mid point used to characterize the performance curves.
Units: ft/psi Min: 0 Max: 19999.9 Default: 0
16 pump end point head read/write
The pump head at the selected end point used to characterize the performance curves.
17 read/write
18 read/write
19 read/write
20 pump static torq read/write
The static frictional torque of the pump and rod string. Increasing this value will increase the fluid level
estimate. Used for level estimate if not using well id method.
Units: ftlb Min: 0.00 Max: 9999.99 Default: 0.00
21 pump viscous torq read/write
The viscous frictional torque of the pump at rated speed. Increasing this value will increase the fluid level
estimate. Used for level estimate if not using well id method.

133
22 pump viscous torq2 read/write
The viscous frictional torque of the pump at the square of rated speed. Increasing this value will increase
the fluid level estimate. Used for level estimate if not using well id method.
23 machine inertia read/write
The source of the tubing pressure input. Values include KEYPAD, ADC 1 – ADC 11, MODBUS MASTER.
Units: enum
24 overall gear ratio read/write
The effective overall gear ratio between the motor and rod.
Units: x:1 Min: 0.001:1 Max: 999.000:1 Default: 1.00:1
25 gearbox efficiency read/write
The efficiency of the gearbox mechanism.
26 surface filter read/write
27 rod length read/write
The diameter of the rod.
Units: ft Min: 0 Max: 19999 Default: 0
28 rod diameter read/write
The length of the tubing between the pump discharge and the surface tubing pressure measurement point.
Units: in/mm Min: 0.0000 Max: 9.9999 Default: 0.0000
29 spacer diameter read/write
The outer diameter of the rod spacers or couplers.
Units: in/mm Min: 0.0000 Max: 9.9999 Default: 0.0000
30 spacer count read/write
The total number of rod spacers or couplers.
31 pump rotation count read/write
The cumulative number of pump rotations since the last reset of this parameter. Enter 0 (zero) to reset.
Value will rollover after it reaches 25000. May also be reset using reset all meters.
Units: decimal
32 pump displacement display
The calculated pump displacement per revolution.
Units: in^3/rev
33 pump torque constant read/write
The pump lift torque constant.
Units: ftlb/ft Min: 0.000 Max: 99.999 Default: 0.000
34 rod torque monitor display
The rod torque.
Units: ftlb
35 pump torque monitor display
The calculated pump torque.
Units: ftlb
36 pump discharge pressure display
The pressure at the outlet of the pump.
37 pump differential pressure display
The differential pressure across the pump, which is equal to the pump discharge pressure – pump intake
pressure.
The pressure at the inlet of the pump.
The fluid flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics and speed.
40 pump leakage display
The leakage flow of the pump derived from the pump characteristics, speed, and head.
41 breakaway torq last display
Percent motor torq that was required to start the pump the last time.
42 breakaway torq new pump ave display
The average breakaway torq for the first ten starts of the pump.
43 breakaway torq reset read/write
If set to TRUE, the breakaway torq new pump ave is reset to zero, and the next ten starts of the pump will
be averaged and stored into this item.

134
tubing pressure
Tubing
casing pressure
tubing
Casing length
tubing section view
tubing ID pump
intake
depth
tubing OD
Pump
pump OD pump
length
casing ID
Figure 6-3—Typical Pump Performance Curve

135
PCP Curves @
pump base speed
base flow
mid point flow
end point flow
static torq + viscous torq + viscous torq2

Head
mid point head end point head

136
6.17 Reservoir Menu
Table 6-17—Reservoir Parameters
0 water cut read/write
The percentage of water in the well fluid being lifted to the surface.
1 oil gravity read/write
The specific gravity of the oil portion of the fluid in API units. Used to determine the fluid density.
Units: API Min: 0.0 Max: 30.0 Default: 0.0
2 water specific gravity read/write
The specific gravity of the water portion of the fluid. Used to determine the fluid density.
Units: Min: 0.000 Max: 99.999 Default: 1.000
3 fluid temp source read/write
4 fluid temperature display
The display of the fluid temperature value.
Units: F/C
5 fluid salinity read/write
The dissolved salts within the fluid for use in calculating the fluid properties.
Units: gm/kg Min: 0 Max: 999 Default: 0
6 fluid properties read/write
Used to enable or disable automatic calculation of the fluid density and viscosity from oil API gravity, water
cut and temperature.
Units: enum Default: CALCULATED
7 tubing fluid density read/write
The average specific weight of the fluid in the production tubing. This value may be entered or calculated
based on the fluid properties setup.
Units: psi/f Min: 0.000 Max: 9.999 Default: 0.431
8 casing fluid density read/write
The average specific weight of the fluid in the casing. This value may be entered or calculated based on the
fluid properties setup.
9 fluid viscosity read/write
The viscosity estimate of the production fluid as calculated from the oil API gravity, water cut and fluid
temperature. This value may be entered or calculated based on the fluid properties setup.
Units: centipose Min: 0.0 Max: 999.9 Default: 0.7
10 average perf depth read/write
The location of the perforations measured from the surface to the mid point of the perforations (TVD).
11 reservoir flow units read/write
The selected flow units for the reservoir items.
Units: enum Default: BPD CMPD
12 reservoir pressure read/write
The pressure in the reservoir. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
13 bubble point pressure read/write
The bubble point pressure. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
14 well test pressure read/write
The static test pressure in the reservoir. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
15 well test flow read/write
The flow value associated with well test pressure. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Units: flow units Min: 0 Max: 99999 Default: 0
16 casing prs source read/write

137
Table 6-17—Reservoir Parameters
17 casing prs read/write
The pressure in the casing. If the pumping unit is producing up the tubing, enter tubing pressure here. If
casing prs source
18 tubing prs source read/write
19 tubing prs read/write
The pressure in the tubing. If the pumping unit is producing up the tubing, enter tubing pressure here. If
tubing prs source
Displays the estimated or sensor value for the pump intake pressure.
Units: psi
21 pump discharge prs display
Displays the estimated or sensor value for the pump discharge pressure.
Units: psi
Displays the estimated or sensor value for the pump differential pressure.
Units: psi
23 differential prs estimate display
Displays the estimatedvalue for the pump differential pressure.
Units: psi
24 IPR max flow perf display
The maximum flow value at the perforations. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Units: flow units
25 IPR max flow pump display
The maximum flow value at the pump. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Units: flow units
26 IPR prs monitor display
The current operating pressure value. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Units: psi
27 IPR flow monitor display
The current operating flow value. Used for IPR Curve and Simulation Mode.
Units: flow units
28 fluid flow estimate display
The display of the estimated fluid flow value.
Units: ft/m
Units: ft/m
31 fluid over pump estimate display
The fluid level above the pump derived from motor parameters and pump characteristics.
Units: ft/m

138
6.18 Fluid Level Test Menu
The Well ID feature is for in-situ characterization of the pump. The Well ID routine is initiated at the drive.
Alternately, the well id auto option allows it to run automatically once per day (at a preset time). The Well ID
routine will accelerate the motor to maximum speed, dwell, optionally decelerate to a slow reverse speed, dwell,
and resume normal operation (at which time the Well ID is complete).
The optional reverse direction portion of the Well ID is used to calibrate the fluid level. As a safety precaution, if
the motor torque drops below the well id abort torque parameter at any time during the test, the Well ID will
abort and the motor will resume normal forward operation, thereby protecting the rod from unwinding in the event
of a stuck pump. Prohibiting the reverse portion of the test is permitted, but will necessitate subsequent manual
fluid level calibration by other means such as a "fluid shot"; if subsequent manual fluid level calibration is not
conducted, the level estimate will be resolved by way of pump rated lift and pump torq at rated lift setup
parameters.
If required, the fluid level can be manually calibrated after running Well ID by entering the known fluid level into
the fluid level calibrate parameter. The associated correction factor will be maintained, even after another Well
ID has been executed. There is a 20 second delay after setting the fluid level calibrate parameter before any
action is taken – wait 20 seconds after fluid calibration before monitoring fluid level! To clear the fluid level
calibration correction factor, set the well id clear all parameter to ENABLE prior to running Well ID.
The original fluid level algorithm can be enabled by setting the pump static torque and pump viscous torque
parameters (on PUMP menu) to non-zero values. These values must be zero to enable the new fluid level
algorithm.
If enabled, the well id auto option will automatically run the Well ID at a preset time each day, allowing the
system to automatically adapt to changing pump conditions such as swelling or wear.
Well ID Procedure:
1. Verify that the pump data is entered on the PUMP Menu, particularly the pump base speed and pump
base flow parameters. Verify that the the tubing fluid density and casing fluid density are set properly.
These parameters must be accurate for correct fluid level estimate. See following section on Pump Data
2. Set pump rated lift and pump torq at rated lift (on Pump Menu). These values can be found on the
"pump evaluation report."
3. Run the pump.
4. Run Well ID by setting well id enable to ENABLE. If the optional run reverse is desired, enter a value
for well id rev speed, if not, enter 0.
5. After Well ID finishes (well id enable automatically goes to DISABLE), allow fluid level monitor readout
to stabilize.
6. Calibrate fluid level by entering the correct fluid level from surface into the calibrate fluid level
parameter.
! The parameters pump base flow, pump base torque, tubing fluid density¸and casing fluid
density must be properly set to achieve correct fluid level measurements corresponding to
different physical fluid levels.

139
Entering Pump Data
Example pump data with corresponding Unico setup parameters are shown below:
pump base speed = 300 RPM

pump base flow = 8.8 gal/min (from table, at starting head)
pump mid point flow = 8.5 gal/min (from table, at a middle point head)
pump end point flow = 5 gal/min (from table, at end point)
pump base head = 0 (from table, at starting head)
pump mid point head = 1499 feet (from table, at a middle point head)
pump end point head = 3001 feet (from table, at end point)
pump base power = Not used
pump mid point eff = Not used
pump end point eff = Not used
pump rated lift = 3000 feet (Lift Capacity)
pump torq at rated lift = 155 ft-lbs (Torque @ Rated Lift)

140
Running Well ID
! Fluid must be to the surface (flow must exist in the flow-line) during the Well ID Test!
If the Well ID aborts, the fluid level algorithm will not function properly!
If “WELL ID REQD” message is displayed in the fluid level monitor field, a parameter has
changed that requires the Well ID to be performed. The fluid level estimate will be wrong!
If a fluid level calibration had been previously performed (using the fluid level calibrate parameter), and it is
desired to clear the old fluid level offset, set well id clear all to ENABLE prior to running the Well ID. This is
recommended under most circumstances.
To run Well ID, set Well ID enable parameter to ENABLE. The motor will accelerate to pump max vel speed,
dwell for well id dwell time, decelerate to pump min speed, dwell for well id dwell time, accelerate to pump
rev speed (forward), dwell for well id dwell time, decelerate to pump rev speed (reverse), dwell for well id
dwell time, and accelerate back to normal run speed (at which time the Well ID is complete). Fluid must be to
the surface (flow in production flow-line) during the Well ID test.
If the Well ID completes successfully, the message WI DONE will appear in the well id state display (WELL ID
Menu). If the Well ID aborts because the torque dropped below the well id abort torque parameter, the
message WI ABORT will appear in the well id state display. If the Well ID aborts, the pump characterization will
not be correct.
If “WELL ID REQD” message is displayed in the fluid level monitor field, a parameter has changed that requires
the Well ID to be performed. The fluid level estimate will be wrong!

141
Calibrating Fluid Level
! The motor must be on and running at a constant speed, and fluid must be to the surface (flow must
exist in the flow-line) when calibrating fluid level!
The fluid level estimate will update 20 seconds after fluid level calibration.
If the Well ID was prohibited from running reverse or the fluid density is incorrect, the fluid level will need to be
calibrated*. To calibrate the fluid level, set the fluid level calibrate parameter to the known fluid level from
surface. After 20 seconds, the fluid level estimate will be updated to reflect the calibration. The motor must be on
and running at a constant speed, and fluid flow must be to the surface during the fluid level calibration. The fluid
level offset derived from this fluid level calibration process is maintained, even if another Well ID is performed. To
clear this offset, set well id clear all to ENABLE prior to running a Well ID.
*Note: If the Well ID was prohibited from running reverse and a subsequent manual fluid level calibration is not
conducted, the level estimate will be resolved by way of pump rated lift and pump torq at rated lift setup
parameters (bench test data). (These parameters must be entered prior to the Well ID.)

142
143
Table 6-18—Fluid Level Test Menu Parameters
0 lt mode read/write
Selects the mode/method used to estimate the fluid level of a well using a periodic test.
1 pump base speed read/write
The pump speed used to characterize the performance curves.
2 pump base head read/write
The pump head at zero flow used to characterize the performance curves.
The location of the down-hole pump from the surface. Do not include any deviation, true vertical depth
(TVD).
4 casing fluid density read/write
The average specific weight of the fluid in the casing. This value may be entered or calculated based on the
fluid properties setup.
5 tubing fluid density read/write
The average specific weight of the fluid in the production tubing. This value may be entered or calculated
based on the fluid properties setup.
6 lt accel time read/write
Sets the accel time (rate) to use during the level test.
Visibility: lt mode = anything but DISABLE
7 lt decel time read/write
Sets the decel time (rate) to use during the level test.
8 lt delay read/write
Sets the delay for the level test shut-off determination. This is the time waited after reaching the current
operating speed while decelerating after the initial speed increase. If too short, the shutoff point may be
mistakenly found too early. If too long, the shutoff point may be missed.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Max: decel time Default: 3.000
9 lt gas max limit read/write
Timeout time to force a pseudo level test to attempt to get out of gas lock. If running at request speed for
this time, because the current is less than the current limit, do a pseudo level test.
10 lt diffl prs read/write
Keypad entered value for shutoff differential (tubing minus casing) pressure. Used only when lt use diffl
prs is DISABLE.
11 lt endpoint read/write
Sets the endpoint level as a pecent of the minimum detected torque slope value to detect the shut-off
speed.
12 lt fop offset read/write
Offset used in the calculation the fluid over pump est from the level test fop est. Can be entered directly or
calculated automatically by entering a value into the level test fop Echo parameter.
13 lt test speed read/write
Sets the speed used with PCP pumps to measure the fluid level. This is the target command speed to go to
to perform the test
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Max: pump max speed Default: 0.0
14 lt min speed read/write
Sets the minimum target speed for the level tests. If the shutoff speed isn’t detected by the time it slows
down to this speed, it will assume the casing fluid level is at the surface.

144
15 lt offset read/write
Sets the pump speed offset used to calculate the pump head at shut-off. This can be used as a way to
calibrate the fluid level estimate if it is believed that the pump speed estimate is inaccurate.
16 lt period read/write
Sets the time between level tests. Set to zero to disable this test. After completion of the test a level test
even is triggered and the follow parameters are logged in the event history:level test so speed, level test so
head, level test fop est and intake sensor value, filtered dpress, and level test begin speed.
Units: hrs Min: 0.00 Max: 999.99 Default: 0.00
17 lt max speed read/write
The speed to go to at the beginning of a level test. If this is zero, it uses the lt start spd offset.
18 lt start spd offset read/write
The offset speed to increase from the current run point. If zero, it increases to pump max speed. Used if lt
max speed is zero.
19 lt torque floor read/write
The starting value for the minimum torque slope. Setting this higher will reduce the chance of a false shutoff
point being detected when the torque signal is noisy.
Units: ftlb/sec Min: 0.00 Max: 999.99 Default: 0.10
20 lt use diffl prs read/write
If set to ENABLE, the level estimate will use the tubing and casing pressures. If set to DISABLE, the level
estimate will assume that the tubing minus casing pressure at fluid flow shutoff is lt diffl prs.
21 lt state display
Displays the current state of the level test controller (time period wait, start speed, decel delay, decel test,
test finish, accel resume).
22 lt timer display
Displays the time until the next ESP level test.
Units: hours
23 lt fop estimate display
Display of the fluid level over the pump as estimated from the ESP shut-off test for this iteration.
Units: ft/m
24 lt prs display
Either tubing pressure of intake pressure if intake prs source isn’t DISABLED. This value is latched during
the level test.
Units: psi
25 lt begin casing prs display
Display of the latched casing pressure just prior to the start of this level test.
Units: psi
26 lt begin prs display
Display of the latched differential pressure just prior to the start of this level test.
Units: psi
27 lt begin speed display
Display of the pump speed just prior to the start of this level test.
Units: rpm
28 lt begin torque display
Display of the pump torque just prior to the start of this level test.
Units: ftlb
29 lt begin tubing prs display
Display of the latched tubing pressure just prior to the start of this level test.
Units: psi

145
30 lt shut off head display
Display of the latched head pressure just after to the finish of this level test.
Units: ft/psi
31 lt shut off prs display
Display of the latched differential pressure just after to the finish of this level test.
Units: psi
32 lt shut off spd display
Display of the pump speed just after to the finish of this level test.
Units: rpm
33 lt shut off torq display
Display of the pump torque just after to the finish of this level test.
Units: ftlb
34 well id auto read/write
The time of day that an auto well id should be performed.
Units: hr.min Min: 00.00 Max: 23.59 Default: 00.00
35 well id clear all read/write
Set to ENABLE to clear old calibration and table values.
36 well id enable read/write
Enables the drive well identification process. The Well Id test may only be performed in Auto Mode. If
running status = HAND RUN, the Well Id Test will be automatically aborted.
37 well id abort torq read/write
If the rod torque ever falls below this value, the well id will be aborted, and the rod will be accelerated to
normal forward run speed immediately. This is protection from unwinding the rod string.
40 well id rev speed read/write
The speed to run reverse to determine the coulomb friction.
Units: rpm Min: 0.0 Max: motor max rpm Default: 0.0
41 well id decel time read/write
Controls the decel rate during well id. Longer times allow more accurate determination of the torque at
various speeds, but will allow the fluid level to change more during the test.
42 well id rev decel time read/write
Controls the decel rate during well id when reversing.
43 well id dwell time read/write
The time to dwell at each speed during the well id. Longer times allow the torque to stabilize, but will allow
the fluid level to change more.
44 well id req speed display
The speed the well id is commanding.
Units: rpm
45 well id filter read/write
Adjusts the filtering of the torque used by the well id.
46 well id date display
The date of the last Well ID Test.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
47 well id time display
The time of the last Well ID Test.
Units: hh.mm
48 well id state display
Displays the current state of the well id process. (0-WELL ID REQD, 1 – WI WAIT, 2 – WI INITIALIZE, 3 –
WI FAST, 4 – WI SLOW, 5 – WI FWD COUL, 6 – WI REV COUL, 7 – WI FINALIZING, 8 – WI ABORT, 9 –
WI ABORTED, 10 – WI DONE)
Units: enum

146
49 well id base friction torque display
The calculated base friction torque.
Units: ftlb
50 well id base lift torque display
The calculated base lift torque.
Units: ftlb
Units: ft/m
Displays the estimated or sensor value for the pump differential pressure.
Units: psi
Units: ft/m
54 fluid level calibrate read/write
Enter the measured fluid level in feet below the surface here to calibrate.
Units: ft/m
55 intake prs calibrate read/write
Enter the measured intake pressure in psi here to calibrate.
Units: psi
56 pump torq offset display
The calculated torque offset as a result of calibration.
Units: psi
57 well id table speed display
Readout of the speed used in the well id
Units: rpm
58 well id table torque display
Readout of the torque used in the well id
Units: ftlb
59 system filter read/write
Adjusts the filtering of the speed and torque used by the level test.
61 wi rpm 00 display
Table values for Unico’s use.
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm

147
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
Units: rpm
81 wi torq 00 display
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb

148
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb
Units: ftlb

149
6.19 Power Menu
Table 6-19—Power Menu Parameters
0 input power monitor display
The input power to the drive.
Units: hp/kw
1 output power monitor display
The output power from the drive into the motor.
Units: hp/kw
2 drive input configuration read/write
The type of drive input. Used for estimating input voltage from bus voltage.
Units: enum Default: 6 PULSE
3 drive supply voltage display
The estimated drive supply voltage .
Units: volts
4 drive supply current display
The estimated drive supply current.
Units: amps
5 input power meter read/write
The cumulative input power consumed by the drive since the last reset of the parameter. Write 0 to reset.
Can also be reset using reset all meters parameter.
Units: kwh
6 motor avg power monitor display
The average power to the motor.
Units: hp/kw
7 reset all meters read/write
Allows all meters to be reset to zero.
8 lift power monitor display
The power to lift the well fluid.
Units: hp/kw
9 lift efficiency display
The ratio of the lift power to the input power, expressed as a percentage.
Units: %
10 lift ave efficiency read/write
The ratio of the lift power to the input power, expressed as a percentage, averaged since the last time it
was reset.
Units: %
11 db resistance read/write
The resistance value of the dynamic braking resistor. Refer to the Dynamic Resistor label for appropriate
value.
Units: ohms Min: 0 Max: 999999 Default: see Table
12 db watts read/write
The wattage value of the dynamic braking resistor. Refer to the Dynamic Resistor label for appropriate
values.
Units: watts Min: 0 Max: 9999 Default: see Table
13 db rtd power display
A display of the db watts parameter converted to HP.
Units: hp/kw Min: 0 Max: 999999
14 db time constant read/write
The thermal time constant of the dynamic brake resistor, used to set the time constant of the dynamic
brake fault.
Units: sec Min: 0 Max: 60 Default: 25
15 db percent used display
The percentage of available dynamic brake power (db watts) being used.
Units: %
16 power limiting read/write
Used to enable or disable power limiting (motor and regen power limit) feature. Note that the power limiting
feature will be internally disabled during Well Id.
Units: enum
17 motor power limit read/write
The maximum motoring power that the drive will command.
Units: hp Min: 0.00 Max: motor max power Default: 0

150
Table 6-19—Power Menu Parameters
18 regen power limit read/write
The maximum regenerative power that the drive will command (maximum power discharged to the dynamic
braking resistor). This parameter is used to protect the dynamic brake resistor.
Units: hp Min: 0.00 Max: db watts/746 Default: db watts/746
19 power troubleshooter display
20 pump troubleshooter read/write

151
6.20 Generator Menu
Table 6-20—Generator Menu
0 generator control read/write
Three options are available for generator control.
Use DISABLED when a generator is not powering the drive.
Use AUTO to cause the engine to turn off engine off delay after the motor is turned off.
Use CONTINUOUS to cause the engine to run indefinitely after the motor is turned off.
Units: enum
1 generator state display
Displays the current generator and engine control state. See the Section below for full definitions.
Visibility: generator control is not DISABLED
Units: enum
2 ecu diagnostic display
Displays the current status of the ECU controller output bits.
Engine Run Enable Engine Running
ECU Faulted
FAULTED OFF
ON
WARNING TRUE ON
ON
RUNNING TRUE ON
OFF
STARTING TRUE OFF
OFF
DISABLED FALSE OFF
OFF
Units: enum
3 running status display
The state of the motor. See Application Manual.
Units: enum
4 generator max power read/write
Used if engine speed source = OPTIMIZE. Sets the maximum power that an integrated generator can
supply at the generator max speed. A non-zero value enables the drive to control the engine speed
automatically, based on the power demand. This must be set to the generator rated power. Sets engine
speed req. Set engine speed source to KEYPAD and use engine keypad speed to manually set the
engine speed req.
Units: hp/kw Min: 0.00 Max: generator continuous limit
Default: 0.00
5 generator pwr gain read/write
Used if engine speed source = OPTIMIZE. Sets the generator power gain to control the load vs. engine
speed calculation.
Units: % Min: 0 Max: 100
Default: 75
6 engine control unit read/write
Used to identify the engine control unit (ECU) used by the generator. Choose: UNKNOWN, PSI or
WOODWARD/MURPHY.
When engine control unit is changed to a known ECU, ecu DAC min, ecu DAC max, the 2 digital inputs,
2 digital outputs and one analog output will be pre-set to the appropriate values in the default positions
for that ECU.
Units: enum
7 engine running input read/write
Sets the logic polarity for the ecu fault input (true on open, true on close).
digital in x select = ENGINE RUNNING
Units: enum
8 ecu flt input read/write
Sets the logic polarity for the ecu fault input (true on open, true on close).
digital in x select = ECU FAULTED
Units: enum

152
9 ecu DAC min read/write
Sets the minimum voltage output allowed by the ECU. For a 4-20 mA device, use 2.000 volts.
10 ecu DAC max read/write
Sets the maximum voltage output allowed by the ECU. For a 4-20 mA device, use 10.000 volts.
11 ecu DAC min rpm read/write
The ecu minimum engine speed at ecu DAC min volts.
Units: rpm
12 ecu DAC max rpm read/write
The ecu maximum engine speed at ecu DAC max volts.
Units: rpm Min: 1200 Max: 1200 Default: 1800
13 engine speed source read/write
Selector for the value set in engine speed req and sent to the analog output signal.
Use KEYPAD to set the requested speed to engine keypad spd.
Use ANALOG to set the requested speed ADC eng spd value.
Use OPTIMIZE to set the requested speed based on the power demand.
Units: rpm Min: 1800 Max: 2400 Default: 3600
14 engine speed ramp read/write
Sets the engine speed request ramp time.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Max: 10.000 Default:
1.000
15 engine warm up delay read/write
Delay to allow the engine to warm up before increasing the engine speed.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Max: 10.000 Default:
1.000
16 engine keypad spd read/write
If engine speed source = KEYPAD, this value is used by engine speed req.
Units: rpm Min: ecu DAC min rpm Max: ecu DAC max rpm Default: ecu DAC min
rpm
17 calibrate analog select read/write
Choose which sensor to calibrate. Once both set min and set max has been done, this value will return
to disabled.
Units: enum
18 calibrate analog set read/write
Allows setting of the full-scale range of the analog input by setting its maximum and minimum values
(disable, set min, set max).
Units: enum
19 calibrate min volts display
The value read during SET MIN step of the analog calibration process. While the calibration is in
process this value or calibrate max volts will be equal to 99.999, showing which value is still
undetermined.
Units: volts
20 calibrate max volts read/write
The value read during SET MAX step of the analog calibration process. While the calibration is in
process this value or calibrate min volts will be equal to 99.999, showing which value is still
undetermined.
Units: volts
21 ADC eng spd min read/write
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the
calibration process.
Visibility: engine speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11
rpm

153
22 ADC eng spd max read/write
The maximum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the
rpm
23 ADC eng spd min volts read/write
The minimum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the
Units: rpm Min: -10.000 Max: 10.000 Default: 0.000
24 ADC eng spd max volts read/write
The maximum voltage expected at the analog input. Use calibrate analog set to automate the
25 ADC eng spd value read/write
If engine speed source is ADC 1 – ADC 11, the display of the value associated with the actual analog
input voltage. This value will be 0 if engine speed source = KEYPAD or OPTIMIZE.
Units: rpm Min: 0 Max: ecu DAC max rpm Default: 0
26 engine speed req read/write
The requested engine speed to being sent to the analog output signal.
Units: rpm Min: ecu DAC min rpm Max: ecu DAC max rpm Default: ecu DAC min rpm
27 engine start flt count display
Counts the engine starts by monitoring the Engine Running digital input bit. To protect the engine’s
starter, when this value is = 4 and the Engine Running digital input bit is still not maintained, generator
state will be set to ENGINE START FLT.
If the engine is running for at least three minutes, engine start flt count will reset to 0.
Units: counter
28 engine fuel save read/write
When the load motor is off and the engine is running, either RAMP DOWN to minimum engine speed or
turn the ENGINE OFF.
Units: enum Default: ENGINE OFF
29 engine fuel save delay read/write
When the load motor is off and the engine is running, delay before RAMP DOWN to minimum engine
speed or turning the ENGINE OFF.
Visibility: generator control is not DISABLEDUnits: mins
30 gas leak input read/write
Sets the logic polarity for the terminal block input. Values include: TRUE ON OPEN, TRUE ON
CLOSE.
Visibility: digital in x select is GAS LEAK
31 gas leak restart delay read/write
If this value is greater than 0.00 and restart attempts > 0 the drive will allow Auto-Restarts on this fault
and this value will be selected for restart time should this fault should occur.
digital in x select is GAS LEAK
32 engine temp source read/write
Choose one of the available inputs. An error message will appear if the Input has already associated
with another signal or the Input is not available.
33 engine temp min read/write
Visibility: motor temp source is f ADC1 – ADC 11
Units: F/C
34 engine temp max read/write
Units: F/C

154
35 engine temp min volts read/write
36 engine temp max volts read/write
37 engine temp value read/write
The display of the value associated with the actual analog input voltage. This value will be 0 if motor
temp source = ESTIMATE.
Units: F/C
38 engine temp warmup read/write
The minimum temperature that the engine .
39 engine temp max warning
40 engine temp max fault read/write
41 engine temp fault time
The time that must elapse to convert a warning condition to a fault. Fault masks are automatically
handled:
A value of 0 disables warnings converting to faults and only warnings will be logged in the Event Log.
No fault condition will be logged nor will the drive stop.
If the value is non-zero, and the value is within the warning range, a warning will be logged, and if the
value remains in the warning range for this amount of time, a fault will be logged and the drive will be
stopped.
stopped.
42 eng fault restart delay read/write
The time that must elapse after the fault condition occurs before an auto fault restart is attempted. A
Units: mins Min: 30.00 Max: 1440.00 (24 hours) Default: 30.00
43 engine run hours display
Displays the total run hours of the generator engine. This value will be not be overwritten by an archive
download.
Units: hh.mm Max: ~50000.00
44 engine maint alarm display
Set to an appropriate value for scheduled maintenance. When engine maint alarm is greater than
engine maint hours:
A warning will be logged in the Fault/Warning history.
generator troubleshooter will be set to ENGINE MAINT REQUIRED
callout sts will be set to TRUE.
If one of the digital outputs is defined as CALLOUT STS, this output will also be
TRUE.
45 engine maint hours display
Displays the maintenance hours of the generator since the last reset.
Units: hh.mm Max: ~50000.00
Indicates the elapsed portion, if restarting, of restart time. While restart timer is non-zero, and generator
state = ECU OFF or ECU BOOT, the state will remain unchanged until restart timer reaches zero.
Units: mins

155
47 vsd bus voltage display
Units: volts
48 inverter power display
A display of the power output from the inverter.
Units: hp/kw
49 generator troubleshooter display
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for the generator menu. A value of
NONE indicates that there are no items that currently need addressed for this menu.
NO ENG RUNNING INPUT None of the digital inputs have been
defined to output this
value
NO ENG RUN ENABLE OUTPUT None of the digital outputs have been defined to
output this value
NO DAC SPD OUTPUT None of the analog outputs have been defined to
output this value
NO ECU FAULTED INPUT None of the digital inputs have been
value
NO AUTO SPEED OUTPUT None of the digital outputs have been
value
NO ECU POWER OUTPUT None of the digital outputs have been
value
ENGINE MAINT REQUIRED engine maint hours has expired.
Perform engine service.
SET GENERATOR MAX POWER generator max power is set to 0 (zero), therefore
engine speed source cannot be set to
OPTIMIZE.
Units: enum

156
6.21 EOP™ Enhanced Oil Production Controller Menu
Table 6-21—EOP/Valve Menu
0 oil gravity read/write
The specific gravity of the oil portion of the fluid in API units. Used to determine the fluid density.
Used for informational purposes.
Units: API Min: 0.0 Max: 100.0 Default: 30.0
1 casing inner diameter read/write
The inside diameter of the casing. Used for informational purposes and eop sim prs.
Units: inch/mm Min: 0.000 Default: 5.000
2 tubing outer diameter read/write
The outside diameter of the tubing. Used for informational purposes and eop sim prs.
Units: inch/mm Min: 0.000 Default: 2.875
The location of the down-hole pump from the surface. Do not include any deviation (TVD). Used
for informational purposes and eop sim prs.
Units: ft/m (TVD) Min: 0 Default: 1300
4 eop GFL over pump read/write
The location of the gas-free fluid measured up from the pump. Do not include any deviation (TVD).
Used for informational purposes and eop sim prs.
casing valve control is not DISABLE
Units: ft/m (TVD) Min: 0 Default: 0
5 eop gas max prs read/write
The highest pressure that can build up in the casing when the casing valve is closed. The pressure
will no longer build once this pressure is achieved. Used for informational purposes and eop sim
prs.
Visibility: eop mode is not DISABLE
Units: pressure units Min: 0.00 Max:2000.00 Default: 0.00
6 eop gas max flow read/write
The maximum gas flow out of the casing when the casing valve is fully open. The pressure will no
longer build once this pressure is achieved. Used for informational purposes and eop sim prs.
Units: mscfd Min: 0.0000 Default: 0.0000
7 eop gas in resistance read/write
The maximum normal resistance to gas flow out of the casing when the casing valve is fully open.
Used for eop sim prs.
Units: psi/mscfd Min: 0.0000 Default: 3.0000
8 eop gas out resistance read/write
The maximum abnormal resistance to gas flow out of the casing when the casing valve is fully open.
Used for eop sim prs. Use a non-zero value to simulate abnormal pressure feedback readings due
to the positioning of the sensor.
Units: psi/mscfd Min: 0.0000 Default: 3.0000
9 eop mode read/write
Use DISABLE to disable the Enhanced Oil Production, EOP™ Controller.
Use ENABLE to show the EOP Parameters in the Menu.
Use PAUSE to pause the Controller.
Use RESUME PHASE to resume the phase listed in eop state.
Use RESTART PHASE to restart the phase listed in eop state
Units: enum
10 eop valve read/write
Units: enum
11 eop powerup mode read/write
Used to control the recovery from a power loss. Use RESUME PHASE to resume the current phase
where it was prior to the power loss. Use RESTART PHASE to restart the current phase.
Units: enum

157
12 eop state read/write
Used to select the phase of the controller. Provides the ability to jump forward or backward to
another state. To restart the current phase, set eop mode to RESTART PHASE. Values include:
PHASE 0, PHASE 1, PHASE 2;
Units: enum
13 eop select read/write
Use ALG ONE to select the pre-defined controller. Use ALG TWO to bypass the predefined
controller and use a user-defined UEdit® Software Controller.
Visibility: eop select is ALG TWO
Units: enum
14 eop status display
Used to display the current status of the controller. Values include: DISABLED, PAUSED and
RUNNING.
Units: enum
15 eop sample rate read/write
Used in Phase 1 and eop sim prs. This value must be set equal to or greater than the value set in
the Data Sampler Manager and rtu master poll rate. Refer to the Start-Up Checklist for more
information.
Units: sec Min: rtu master poll rate or 0.500 Max: 1.000 Default: 15.000
16 eop critical prs read/write
Used during Phase 1. When eop casing prs reaches this level, Phase 2 will start.
Units: pressure units Min: 0.00 Max: 2000.00 Default: 60.00
17 simulate mode read/write
Used to enable a simulation of the system. The casing pressure feedback data will be set to eop
sim prs.
Units: enum
18 eop sim prs buildup read/write
Method 1: Displayed value using eop sample rate, casing inner diameter, tubing outer diameter,
pump intake depth, eop GFL over pump, eop gas max prs, eop gas max flow, eop gas in resistance
and eop gas out resistance.
Method 2: User entered value.
The pressure buildup rate per sample. Used for informational purposes and eop sim prs.
simulate_mode is ENABLE.
Units: pressure units /sample Min: 0.01 Max: 100.00 Default: 0.00
19 eop sim prs release read/write
Method 1: Displayed value using eop sample rate, casing inner diameter, tubing outer diameter,
pump intake depth, eop GFL over pump, eop gas max prs, eop gas max flow and eop gas flow
resistance.
Method 2: User entered value.
The pressure release rate per sample. Used for informational purposes and eop sim prs
20 eop sim valve open display
The percent that the valve is open. 100% is fully open. Used for informational purposes and eop
sim prs
Units: %
21 eop phase 0 time read/write
The length of time for PHASE 0.
Visibility: eop mode is not DISABLE.
Units: hours Min: 0.00 Max: 24.00 Default: 12.00
22 eop phase 0 timer display
The elapsed time for PHASE 0.
Units: hours

158
eop state is greater or equal to PHASE 1.
Units: hours
Units: days
25 eop pause start display
The time at which the PAUSE state started.
Visibility: eop status is PAUSED.
Units: hours
26 eop pause timer display
The time elapsed since the PAUSE state started.
Visibility: eop status is PAUSED.
Units: hours
27 eop casing max prs read/write
The latched maximum eop casing prs.
Units: pressure units Min: 0.00 Default: 0.00
28 eop casing prs display
The latched copy of casing prs value.
29 eop casing min prs read/write
The latched minimum eop casing prs.
30 eop tubing max prs read/write
The latched maximum eop tubing prs.
31 eop tubing prs display
The latched copy of tubing prs value.
Units: F/C
32 eop tubing min prs read/write
The latched minimum eop tubing prs.
33 eop casing max temp read/write
The latched maximum eop casing temp.
Units: F/C
34 eop casing temp display
The latched copy of casing temp value.
Units: F/C
35 eop casing min temp read/write
The latched minimum eop casing temp.
Units: F/C
36 eop tubing max temp read/write
The latched maximum eop tubing temp.
Units: F/C
37 eop tubing temp display
Units: F/C
38 eop tubing min temp read/write
The latched minimum eop tubing temp.
Units: F/C

159
39 eop max 1 display
The first latched maximum eop casing prs.
40 eop min 1 display
The first latched minimum eop casing prs.
Units: pressure unit
51 eop match counter display
The cumulative count of valid data.
Units: decimal

160
52 eop miss counter display
The cumulative count of eliminated data.
Units: decimal
53 eop valve max read/write
The maximum pressure for the Valve Controller. This value is set at the end of Phase 1. The user
may modify this value.
eop state is PHASE 2.
54 eop valve min read/write
The minimum pressure for the Casing Valve Controller. This value is set at the end of Phase 1.
The user may modify this value.
eop state is PHASE 2.
55 eop sim prs display
The simulated casing pressure derived from eop sim prs buildup and eop sim prs release. The user
may modify this value to re-initalize it.
56 eop casing prs display
The latched copy of casing prs value.
57 eop tubing prs display
Units: F/C
58 valve 1 control read/write
Use DISABLE to disable the Casing Valve Controller.
Use CYCLE for On/Off control mode (used for solenoid valve).
Use TIMED CYCLE for On/Off control mode (used for solenoid valve) where ON portion of cycle is
pulsed on/off.
Use PI HIGH REQ for servo valve command to DAC (used for servo valves, regulating at the high
pressure set-point.
Use PI LOW REQ for servo valve command to DAC (used for servo valves, regulating at the low
pressure set-point.
Use TEST for testing the valve.
Units: enum
59 valve 1 actuation delay read/write
The delay, in seconds, for the valve to fully open after the command to open is issued. Used for
initialization of the TIMED CYCLE Mode’s Auto-Pulse parameters and eop sim prs and eop sim
valve open.
60 valve 1 prs buildup rate read/write
The rate of the pressure buildup measured from eop valve min to eop valve max during Phase 1.
Used for initialization of the TIMED CYCLE Mode’s Auto-Pulse parameters. Modifying this value will
cause the TIMED CYCLE Mode’s Auto-Pulse parameters to be re-initialized.
61 valve 1 test cmd read/write
DAC Output
Command level to be output from the DAC, if dac x select = AL VALVE CONTROL.
Digital Output
Command to be output from the digital output digital out x select = CASING VALVE OPEN or
CASING VALVE CLOSE. A value of 0 turns OFF the digital output. All other values turn ON the
digital output.
Visibility: valve control = TEST

161
62 valve 1 req source read/write
Use KEYPAD to enter the value manually.
Use EOP to use the output from the EOP Controller.
Visibility: valve control is not TEST
Units: enum
63 valve 1 fbk source read/write
Use CSG PRS to control the casing pressure.
Use TBG PRS to control the casing pressure.
Units: enum
64 valve 1 keypad high req read/write
The higher pressure request set-point. When the pressure rises above this value, the valve will turn
on and pressure will bleed off.
valve req source = KEYPAD
65 valve 1 keypad low req read/write
The lower pressure request set-point. When the pressure drops below this value, the valve will turn
off and pressure will build back up.
66 valve 1 kp read/write
For TIMED CYCLE mode, the proportional term for the Auto Pulse Casing Valve Controller.
For PI LOW REQ and PI HIGH REQ modes, the proportional term for the PI control mode.
Visibility: valve control is TIMED CYCLE, PI HIGH REQ or PI LOW REQ
67 valve 1 ki read/write
The integral term for the PI control mode.
Visibility: valve control is PI HIGH REQ or PI LOW REQ
68 valve 1 cmd state display
The state of the Valve Controller’s output command to the valve. Due to valve actuation delay, the
valve may be partially open during all or a portion of the time in any of these states. Values include:
PRESSURING: The valve control is in the pressurizing state. The pressure has fallen
below eop valve min and the valve will remain closed until the pressure has
risen to eop valve max.
VALVE OPEN: The valve control is in the pulsing state, open and closed. The command to the
valve is open.
VALVE CLOSED: The valve control is in the pulsing state, open and closed. The command to the
valve is closed.
Visibility: valve control is TIMED CYCLE or CYCLE.

Units: enum
69 valve 1 pulse prs source read/write
The pressure buildup while the valve was closed.
Visibility: valve control is TIMED CYCLE
Units: enum
70 valve 1 pulse open time read/write
The valve will pulse on/off during the “on” (release pressure) portion of the cycle. This value defines
the on time of the pulse. If valve pulse auto is ENABLE, then this value will be automatically
selected. Enter an initial value for the valve pulse auto routine. During the valve pulse auto routine
this value may be changed to re-initialize it.
Units: sec Min: 0.000 Max: Default: 0.500
71 valve 1 pulse close time read/write
The valve will pulse on/off during the “off” (build-up pressure) portion of the cycle. This value
defines the off time of the pulse. If valve pulse auto is ENABLE, then this value will be automatically


162
72 valve 1 pulse prs release display
The pressure released while the valve was open.
valve control is TIMED CYCLE
73 valve 1 pulse auto read/write
Used in to enable or disable the Auto Pulse Casing Valve Controller. If valve control is TIMED
CYCLE, when valve pulse auto is ENABLE, valve pulse open time and csg value off pulse will be
automatically adjusted by the controller.
Visibility:
Units: enum
74 valve 1 pulse count read/write
Used to automatically initialize valve pulse max prs and valve pulse min prs at the end of Phase 1
using the pressure control range. It is also re-initialized anytime valve pulse min count, eop valve
max, eop valve min, valve keypad high req or valve keypad low req are changed. Use 0 to disable
automatic initializations.
Visibility: valve control is ENABLE
valve pulse auto is ENABLE
75 valve 1 pulse offset read/write
The rate of adjustment, in seconds, to valve pulse open time and/or csg value off pulse. This value
is initialized at the end of Phase 1 usein the pressure build-up rate.
76 valve 1 pulse min prs read/write
The minimum prs error, for valve pulse open time and/or csg value off pulse adjustments. The user
77 valve 1 pulse max prs read/write
The maximum prs error, for valve pulse open time and/or csg value off pulse adjustments. The user
78 valve 1 pwm tol read/write
The valve control dead band above and below the pressure set-point for CYCLE and TIMED
CYCLE valve control modes.
Visibility: valve control is CYCLE or TIMED CYCLE
79 valve 1 pwm level read/write
The DAC output (if dac x select = AL VALVE CONTROL) for CYCLE and TIMED CYCLE. The
output will cycle on/off as this level, set at a percentage of maximum.
Units: %
80 valve 2 control read/write
Use DISABLE to disable the Casing Valve Controller.
Use CYCLE for On/Off control mode (used for solenoid valve).
Use TIMED CYCLE for On/Off control mode (used for solenoid valve) where ON portion of cycle is
pulsed on/off.
Use PI HIGH REQ for servo valve command to DAC (used for servo valves, regulating at the high
pressure set-point.
Use PI LOW REQ for servo valve command to DAC (used for servo valves, regulating at the low
pressure set-point.
Use TEST for testing the valve.
Units: enum
81 valve 2 actuation delay read/write
The delay, in seconds, for the valve to fully open after the command to open is issued. Used for
initialization of the TIMED CYCLE Mode’s Auto-Pulse parameters and eop sim prs and eop sim
valve open.

163
82 valve 2 prs buildup rate read/write
The rate of the pressure buildup measured from eop valve min to eop valve max during Phase 1.
Used for initialization of the TIMED CYCLE Mode’s Auto-Pulse parameters. Modifying this value will
cause the TIMED CYCLE Mode’s Auto-Pulse parameters to be re-initialized.
83 valve 2 test cmd read/write
DAC Output
Digital Output
digital output.
84 valve 2 req source read/write
Use KEYPAD to enter the value manually.
Use EOP to use the output from the EOP Controller.
Units: enum
85 valve 2 fbk source read/write
Use CSG PRS to control the casing pressure.
Use TBG PRS to control the casing pressure.
Units: enum
86 valve 2 keypad high req read/write
The higher pressure request set-point. When the pressure rises above this value, the valve will turn
on and pressure will bleed off.
87 valve 2 keypad low req read/write
The lower pressure request set-point. When the pressure drops below this value, the valve will turn
off and pressure will build back up.
88 valve 2 kp read/write
For TIMED CYCLE mode, the proportional term for the Auto Pulse Casing Valve Controller.
For PI LOW REQ and PI HIGH REQ modes, the proportional term for the PI control mode.
Visibility: valve control is TIMED CYCLE, PI HIGH REQ or PI LOW REQ
89 valve 2 ki read/write
The integral term for the PI control mode.
Visibility: valve control is PI HIGH REQ or PI LOW REQ
90 valve 2 cmd state display
The state of the Valve Controller’s output command to the valve. Due to valve actuation delay, the
valve may be partially open during all or a portion of the time in any of these states. Values include:
PRESSURING: The valve control is in the pressurizing state. The pressure has fallen
below eop valve min and the valve will remain closed until the pressure has
risen to eop valve max.
VALVE OPEN: The valve control is in the pulsing state, open and closed. The command to the
valve is open.
VALVE CLOSED: The valve control is in the pulsing state, open and closed. The command to the
valve is closed.
Visibility: valve control is TIMED CYCLE or CYCLE.

Units: enum
91 valve 2 pulse prs source read/write
The pressure buildup while the valve was closed.
Units: enum

164
92 valve 2 pulse open time read/write
The valve will pulse on/off during the “on” (release pressure) portion of the cycle. This value defines
the on time of the pulse. If valve pulse auto is ENABLE, then this value will be automatically
93 valve 2 pulse close time read/write
The valve will pulse on/off during the “off” (build-up pressure) portion of the cycle. This value
defines the off time of the pulse. If valve pulse auto is ENABLE, then this value will be automatically

94 valve 2 pulse prs release display
The pressure released while the valve was open.
valve control is TIMED CYCLE
95 valve 2 pulse auto read/write
Used in to enable or disable the Auto Pulse Casing Valve Controller. If valve control is TIMED
CYCLE, when valve pulse auto is ENABLE, valve pulse open time and csg value off pulse will be
automatically adjusted by the controller.
Visibility:
Units: enum
96 valve 2 pulse count read/write
Used to automatically initialize valve pulse max prs and valve pulse min prs at the end of Phase 1
using the pressure control range. It is also re-initialized anytime valve pulse min count, eop valve
max, eop valve min, valve keypad high req or valve keypad low req are changed. Use 0 to disable
automatic initializations.
97 valve 2 pulse offset read/write
The rate of adjustment, in seconds, to valve pulse open time and/or csg value off pulse. This value
is initialized at the end of Phase 1 usein the pressure build-up rate.
98 valve 2 pulse min prs read/write
The minimum prs error, for valve pulse open time and/or csg value off pulse adjustments. The user
99 valve 2 pulse max prs read/write
The maximum prs error, for valve pulse open time and/or csg value off pulse adjustments. The user
100 valve 2 pwm tol read/write
The valve control dead band above and below the pressure set-point for CYCLE and TIMED
CYCLE valve control modes.
101 valve 2 pwm level read/write
The DAC output (if dac x select = AL VALVE CONTROL) for CYCLE and TIMED CYCLE. The
output will cycle on/off as this level, set at a percentage of maximum.
Units: %
102 casing prs value display
The pressure input from casing pressure source.

165
103 tubing prs value display
The pressure input from tubing pressure source.
104 air bal prs value display
The pressure input from air balance pressure source.
105 valve 1 cmd display
DAC Output
Digital Output
digital output.
Units: volts
106 valve 1 command display
Displays valve cmd in % max format.
Units: % max
107 valve 2 cmd display
DAC Output
Digital Output
digital output.
Units: volts
108 valve 2 command display
Displays valve cmd in % max format.
Units: % max
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages. A value of NONE indicates that
there are no items that currently need addressed.
Used to “hide” those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and navigation.
Choose MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu parameters.

166
6.22 Daily Gauge Menu
Table 6-22—Daily Gauge Menu Parameters
0 gauge time read/write
The time of day for the controller to latch the gauged values and reinitialize the accumulating values.
Gauging will occur once every 24 hours at gauge time. If so masked, the gauged values will also be
stored in the Gauge Event in the Event History.
1 gauge run time display
The amount of time that the pumping unit was in operation accumulated over the past 24 hours and
latched at gauge time.
Units: hh.mm
2 gauge fluid production display
The fluid production (fluid raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the past 24 hours
and latched at gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated below.
Units: volume units
3 gauge leakage display
The leakage—or slippage—of fluid past the plunger of the pump accumulated over the past 24 hours and
latched at gauge time.
Units: volume units
4 gauge oil production display
The oil production (oil raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the past 24 hours and
latched at gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
5 gauge water production display
The water production (water raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the past 24 hours
and latched at gauge time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
6 gauge gas production display
The gas production (water raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated over the past 24 hours
and latched at gauge time.
Units: mcf/scm
7 gauge fluid flow display
The rate of production of the pumping unit accumulated over the run time of the past 24 hours and latched
at gauge time.
8 gauge ave speed display
The average speed during the run time.
Units: rpm
9 gauge ave level display
The average level.
10 gauge power meter display
The power usage of the pump accumulated during the run time over the past 24 hours and latched at
gauge time.
Units: kwh/day
11 gauge energy usage display
The power usage of the pump accumulated during the run time over the past 24 hours and latched at
gauge time.
Units: kwh/barrel
12 gauge run time accum display
The amount of time that the pumping unit was in operation accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: hh.mm
13 gauge fluid production accum display
The fluid production (fluid raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge
time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated below.
Units: volume units
14 gauge leakage accum display
The leakage—or slippage—of fluid past the plunger of the pump accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: volume units
15 gauge oil production accum display
The oil production (oil raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge time.
This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units

167
Table 6-22—Daily Gauge Menu Parameters
16 gauge water production accum display
The water production (water raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge
time. This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: volume units
17 gauge gas production accum display
The gas production (gas raised to the surface) of the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge time.
This value is net of the leakage accumulated.
Units: mcf/scm
18 gauge ave speed accum display
The average speed the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: rpm
19 gauge ave level accum display
The average level the pumping unit accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: ft/m
20 gauge power meter accum display
The power usage of the pump accumulated since the last gauge time.
Units: kwh/day
21 gauge troubleshooter display
A rolling display of all currently active troubleshooting messages for this menu. A value of NONE indicates
GAUGE EVENT DISABLED Event mask is off. The gauge event will not be latched.
23 menu visibilityUsed to “hide” those parameters which are not in use to simplify menu usage and read/write
navigation. Choose MINIMIZE to limit the parameter visibility. Choose MAXIMIZE to view all menu
parameters.
24 gauge accum counter read/write
Units: decimal

168
6.23 Display Menu
Table 6-23—Display Menu Parameters
0 drive current date display
The drive’s current date as set on the calendar chip. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display:
Calendar.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
1 drive current month display
The current month. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display: Calendar.
Units: enum
2 drive current day of week display
The current day of week. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display: Calendar.
Units: enum
3 drive current day display
The current day. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display: Calendar.
Units: decimal
4 daylight savings time read/write
When changed to ENABLE, drive current time hours will increment by 1. When changed to DISABLE, drive
current time will decrement by 1.
5 drive current time display
The drive’s current time as set on the calendar chip. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display:
Calendar.
Units: hh.mm
6 keypad units read/write
Used to convert unit display to either English or Metric.
Units: enum Default: ENGLISH
7 keypad pos units read/write
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all position data through the drive’s
keypad.
8 keypad vel units read/write
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all velocity data through the drive’s
keypad.
Establishes the units which will be used for displaying and entering all velocity data. When hertz units are
set to ENABLED, all velocities will be entered in HZ.
10 fluid flow units read/write
Used to customize fluid flow unit displays. Values include: BPD/CMPD, GPM/LPM
Units: enum Default: BPD/CMPD
11 reservoir flow units read/write
Used to customize reservoir flow unit displays. Values include: BPD/CMPD, GPM/LPM
Units: enum Default: BPD/CMPD
12 gas flow units read/write
Used to customize gas flow unit displays. Values include: SCFM/SCMH, MSCFD/MSCMD
Units: enum Default: SCFM/SCMH
13 pressure units read/write
Used to customize pressure unit displays. Values include: PSI/BAR, KPA
Units: enum Default: PSI/BAR
14 volume units read/write
Used to customize volume unit displays. BARRELS, GALS/LTRS, CUFT, CUMETERS
Units: enum Default: BARRELS
15 level units read/write
Used to customize level unit displays. FEET METER or IN MM
Units: enum Default: FEET METER
16 pump pressure units read/write
Used to customize pressure unit displays. Values include: PSI/BAR, FT H2O/M, or KPA
Units: enum Default: FT H2O/M
17 level units read/write
Used to customize level unit displays. FEET METER or IN MM
Units: enum Default: FEET METER

169
Table 6-23—Display Menu Parameters
18 user menu item 1 read/write
Enter the parameter number of the object to be displayed.
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of mtr voltage monitor
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of mtr current monitor
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of rod torque monitor
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number pump torque monitor
Units: decimal Default: dictionary address of pump intake prs
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of pump discharge prs
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of pump differential prs
Units: decimal Default: -1
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of
Units: decimal Default: dictionary item number of fluid flow monitor
28 quick menu item 1 read/write
29 quick menu item 2 read/write
30 visibility control read/write
Used to “show” all parameters permanently.
31 lockout status display
The current password lockout state by level of password access.
Units: enum Min: unlocked Max: level 3 Default: unlocked
32 screen saver safety read/write
If enabled, causes the display to turn on whenever restart countdown is waiting to restart the pumping unit.
FOR SAFETY, this parameter should be left enabled. The display will also turn on if an edge is detected on
either the Run Enable or Auto Enable Inputs or if the drive is performing a Valve Check Test.
33 screen saver delay read/write
Sets the inactivity time for the display’s screen saver feature. A value of 0 disables the screen saver.

170
6.24 Simulate Menu
Table 6-24—Simulate Menu Parameters
0 simulate mode read/write
Enables the pumping unit simulation. NORMALLY NOT ENABLED ON A REAL PUMPING SYSTEM.
1 simulate drive read/write
Enables the drive/motor simulator (eliminates the need to have an actual motor). When simulating the
drive, the following parameter values must also be entered:
simulate drive - ENABLED
vector source – XLESS
upid motor source – XLESS
motor fbk size – 8192
system gain – Desired system gain; if unknown, set equal to sim calc system gain.
motor max torque – Desired motor max torque; if unknown, set equal to motor max torque monitor.
Visibility: simulate mode = ENABLE
2 simulate drive load read/write
ENABLE: Adds Simulated Load to UPID Torque Controller.
Used to simulate motor speed fluctuation. simulate drive must be enabled. Must also be enabled to
simulate Gearbox Torque Limiting and/or Power Limiting.
3 fill simulation mode read/write
Allows the user to select the manner in which the down-hole pump fill is simulated. The following options
are available:
AUTO – Used on “real” system only, and causes predicted pump fill and fluid level to automatically be set
to the actual measured values (so the predicted DynaCard track the actual conditions).
KEYPAD – Used on “real” system or during Simulate Mode, and allows the Simulated Pump Fill and Sim
Fluid Over Pump parameters to be manually entered.
POTENTIOMETER – Used during Simulate Mode only, and allows the Simulated Pump Fill to be set with
a potentiometer. Sim Fluid Over Pump parameter is still set from the keypad. fill pot source
RESERVOIR – Used during Simulate Mode only, and allows a linear IPR well inflow to be simulated.
Simulated Pump Fill and Sim Fluid Over Pump parameters are automatically set. Reservoir parameters
are entered on the Simulate menu, including: Sim Reservoir Pressure, Sim Bubble Point Press, Sim IPR
Max Flow, Sim Standing Valve Cv, and Sim Gas Separation Eff.
Units: enum Default: AUTO
4 simulated fluid fill read/write
If fill simulation mode is set to KEYPAD, the simulated pump fill is entered here.
Units: percent Min: 0 Max: 100 Default: 100
5 sim fluid over pump read/write
If fill simulation mode is set to KEYPAD or POTENTIOMETER, the simulated fluid over pump (level over
pump) is entered here.
Units: ft/m
6 vector source read/write
Source of the vector feedback.
7 upid motor source read/write
8 upid load source read/write
Source of the load position feedback.
9 motor fbk size read/write
Enter the pulses per revolution of the motor position feedback device. NA for XLESS mode.
Units: pulses Min: 0 Max: Default: 2048

171
10 base rpm read/write
The rated nameplate speed of the pumping unit motor. Used by AC Test Utility. base rpm is used to
calculate the field when operating in the field-weakening region. This value is normally the rated rpm of the
motor given on the nameplate of the motor. In transducer-less (vector source = XLESS) control, this
velocity is also used to calculate slip frequency during the AC Test Utility
Units: rpm Min: 0 Default: 0
11 sim drive size read/write
Sim drive size is used for determining the drive size the drive simulator will use during simulation. If sim
drive size is set to DEFAULT, the simulator’s drive size is determined from the drive’s internal drive id code.
If the drive id code is unknown, because the current regulator module is not present, a drive size may be
selected. Setting sim drive size to any value other than DEFAULT will also disable all current regulator
generated fault. This feature allows for running a drive simulation without the power section fo the drive.
Units: enum Default: DEFAULT
12 sim drive rated power read/write
The drive size to be simulated, in horsepower.
Units: hp/kw Min: 0 Max: 99999 Default: 0
13 sim drive rating read/write
The drive rating to be simulated. Values include CT, VT or ET.
Units: enum
14 sim drive motor max torque display
Displays the calculated maximum motor torque based on sim drive rated power and sim drive rating.
Units: ftlb/Nm
15 sim drive motor max power display
Displays the calculated maximum motor power based on sim drive rated power and sim drive rating.
Units: hp/kw
16 motor max power read/write
17 motor max torque read/write
18 sim calc system gain display
This is the theoretical system gain (based on the rotary inertia and motor max torque parameters) when
simulate drive is ENABLED. Typically, the system gain value is set equal to this value (to insure simulated
drive stability).
Units: 1/sec/sec
19 system gain read/write
The overall gain of the system. Determined during System ID Test and Well ID Test
Units: 1/sec/sec Min: 0.000 Max: 999.999 Default: 0.000
20 system wn read/write
The natural frequency of the drive closed loop velocity controller.
Units: rad/sec Min: 0.0 Max: 99.9 Default: 10.0
21 sim gas separation eff read/write
The efficiency of the gas separator (gas anchor), used to determine the portion of gas that is introduced to
the pump barrel (versus vented to the casing) during reservoir simulation (fill simulation mode set to
RESERVOIR). Set to 100% to vent all gas out the casing; set to 0% to introduce all of the gas into the
pump barrel.
Units: percent Min: 0 Max: 100 Default: 50
22 sim gas flow display
Simulated gas flow.
Units: mcf
23 sim gas flow casing display
Simulated gas casing flow.
Units: mcf

172
24 sim well inflow rate display
The inflow rate of the reservoir into the well bore during reservoir simulation (fill simulation mode set to
RESERVOIR).
25 sim well outflow rate display
The outflow rate of the pump during simulation (fill simulation mode set to RESERVOIR).
26 sim reservoir state display
Displays the state of the reservoir simulation during reservoir simulation mode (fill simulation mode set to
RESERVOIR).
RESERVOIR OFF – reservoir simulation not turned on (fill simulation mode not set to RESERVOIR).
FULL PUMP – pump is full.
PUMP OFF – fluid is at the pump, and pump is not filling completely; no gas breakout in pump barrel.
GAS IN PUMP – pump is not filling completely because of gas breakout in pump barrel; fluid is over the
pump.
PUMP OFF WITH GAS – fluid is at the pump, pump is not filling completely, and gas is breaking out in
pump barrel.
NO INFLOW – reservoir parameters are set such that there is no reservoir inflow
Units: enum Min: Max: NO_INFLOW Default: AUTO
27 sim well inflow rate display
The intflow rate of the well during simulation (fill simulation mode set to RESERVOIR).
Units: rpm

173
6.25 Well Name Menu
Table 6-25—Well Name Menu Parameters
0 name 0 read/write
A character of the well name.
Units: enum Default:
1 name 1 read/write
2 name 2 read/write
3 name 3 read/write
4 name 4 read/write
5 name 5 read/write
6 name 6 read/write
7 name 7 read/write
8 name 8 read/write
9 name 9 read/write
10 name 10 read/write

174
6.26 GMC® File Menu
Table 6-26—GMC® Menu Parameters
0 drive current date display
The drive’s current date as set on the calendar chip. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display:
Calendar.
Units: yyyy.mmdd
1 drive current time display
The drive’s current time as set on the calendar chip. To change, choose the Setup Menu: Help Display:
Calendar.
Units: hh.mm
2 file disk manager read/write
Used to pause file action to collect the data on the SD RAM data disk avoiding corruption of data stored on
the disk. Values include choose option, safely remove, safely read, resume operation.
Units: enum
3 file disk state display
A display of the state of the file data storage system. Values include ready, reading, writing, opening,
closing, creating, serializing, file not ready, disk read error, disk write error, pausing services, starting
services, safe to remove, safe to read, unformatted, write protected, no module.
Units: enum

175
7 System Initialization
7.1 Overview
This section provides information on the initial setup of the drive and motor. The AC Test Utility is
used to initialize basic motor parameters through a series of questions and to automatically identify
system parameters with a series of tests.
For a full treatment, refer to the Start-Up Checklist for more application-specifis initialization
instructions.
7.2 Motor Parameter Entry

Upon entering the AC Test Utility, a series of questions are asked to give the software basic
information about the motor. Personnel should be experienced in understanding the drive test, and
what is about to occur. This test will cause the motor to stop and start.
1. Press the [Ent] key to enter this routine from the AC Test Setup Menu. Select the motor type
(Induction or Synchronous). Different tests are performed depending on the motor type used.
Typically, the induction motor option should be selected.
2. Select actune mode:
i. Choose NON MOVING if the motor cannot be moved to accomplish the AC Tuning.
The will not rotate the motor shaft during the tuning tests, but instead calculate the
appropriate values.
ii. Choose COUPLED if motor shaft is not connected to the load.
3. Enter the motor horse power from the motor nameplate, and then press the [Ent] key. If the
displayed value is already correct, simply press the [Ent] key.
4. Enter the rated voltage from the motor nameplate, and then press the [Ent] key. If the
5. Enter the rated frequency from the motor nameplate that corresponds to the voltage entered
above and then press the [Ent] key. If the displayed value is already correct, simply press the
[Ent] key.
6. Enter the rated current from the motor nameplate and then press the [Ent] key. If the
7. Enter the rated or base rpm from the motor nameplate and then press the [Ent] key. If the
8. Choose [1] if the Drive is equipped with DB protection, which is typical in this application.
At this point, the display will scroll through the list of parameter test utilities in the AC Test Utility.
Choose [1] Startup.
7.3 Parameter Test Utilities

The startup routine is designed to step through each phase of the AC Test utilities, interacting with
the operator setting up the drive. The function of each utility is documented individually below.
This selection should be made during commissioning or when a drive or motor has been replaced.
7.3.1 Current Feedback Calibration

The current feedback calibration utility calculates the offsets in the analog circuitry of the controller
and the current feedback transducers. The routine will request the motor to be turned on. While
calibrating, the drive is commanding zero current into the motor. The routine thus knows feedback
offsets and can calculate the appropriate current command offsets. When complete, the drive will
turn off and display that the test is complete.

System Initialization
176
7.3.2 Stator Resistance Test
The stator resistance test utility calculates the stator resistance of the motor. The routine will
request the motor to be turned on. While calculating, the drive is commanding current into the
motor. By measuring the voltage drop across the motor, the stator resistance can be calculated.
When the calculation is done, the value is displayed. When complete, the drive will turn off and
display that the test has complete. The software uses the stator resistance number during field-
weakening and transducer-less operation. This number can also be obtained by requesting the
equivalent circuit data on the motor being used.
7.3.3 Leakage Inductance Test

The leakage utility calculates the leakage inductance of the motor. The routine will request the
motor to be turned on and apply a command for short period. Leakage test identifies the leakage
inductance by applying a 30 Hertz command of 100% motor rated current into a single phase. The
feedback voltage and currents are sampled to calculate the leakage inductance. This leakage
inductance is used in the flux and torque regulators.
7.3.4 Motor Phasing Test

The phasing utility is used to determine the feedback transducer resolution & direction, motor pole
pairs (motor winding information), and armature phasing.
If NON MOVING mode is selected or vector source = XLESS, the phasing utility is skipped.
7.3.5 Field Current Test

The field current test inductance test utility calculates the field current for the motor. The drive will
command the motor to spin at one-half base speed and try different field currents until the correct
motor flux is measured. The routine will request the motor to be turned on and accelerated to one
half base of speed. When the motor is at speed, the routine will try different field currents,
monitoring flux feedback. When the correct value has been found, it will be displayed and stored in
the global dictionary. The motor will be decelerated to zero. When complete, the drive will turn off
and display that the test has completed. The correct field current is usually approximately 25% to
50% of the rated motor current. This number can also be obtained by requesting the no load
current of the motor. This test must be performed with the motor uncoupled from the pump for best
results. Use a field current equal to one third of the motor rating as an alternative to uncoupling the
motor.
7.3.6 Slip Frequency Test

The slip frequency test utility calculates the slip frequency of the motor. The drive is commanded to
accelerate both forward and reverse, adjusting the slip until the motor acceleration is linear. When
the correct value has been found, it will be displayed and stored in the global dictionary. The motor
will be decelerated to zero. When complete, the drive will turn off and display that the test has
completed. The correct slip frequency can be estimated from the motor nameplate data. The slip
can be estimated with the formula: slip = 60 * (synchronous rpm – nameplate rpm) / synchronous
rpm.
7.3.7 Motor Torque Test

The motor torque test is used to determine the rated Hp and rated torque of the motor. The routine
will request the motor to be turned on and will accelerate forward while monitoring feedback. The
torque test identifies the rated and maximum torque of the motor by commanding a step of a 100%
of motor rated current. The feedback voltage and current are used to estimate the equivalent
torque. The rated torque and maximum torque parameters are used for scaling in various areas.
The correct value will be displayed and stored in the global dictionary. The motor will be
decelerated to zero. When complete, the drive will turn off and display that the test has completed.

177
7.4 System Gain Test
To enter the System Gain Test option of the Setup Menu, press the [↑⁄↓] key until the System ID
Test selection is displayed. Push the [Ent] key to select this test. The system ID test is used to
determine the gain of the system and inertia of the motor and machine. The outline below shows
the order of events that occur when doing a system ID test.
Personnel should be experienced in understanding the system ID test, and what is about to occur.
This test will cause the motor to accelerate and decelerate very rapidly. Use extreme caution and
follow all safety guidelines.
1. Enter a torque %; this is the magnitude of the torque pulse that will be applied to the machine.
It is scaled such that 100% is inverter maximum torque.
2. Enter a value for rpm max; this is the top speed the drive will be accelerated to during the test.
3. Enter a value for rpm min; this is the bottom speed that will be used in the gain calculation.
For transducer-less operation, which is typical in this application, 10% of base rpm is a good
value.
4. Choose [0] if the Drive isn’t equipped with DB protection or a regen drive, which is typical in
this application.
5. Finally, the routine will ask for the motor to be enabled. When enabled, a torque pulse will be
commanded and the drive response will be analyzed to determine the system gain of the
motor/machine combination.
This test can be run multiple times with different torque percentages. If the results vary
significantly, the drive response may be more complicated than the simple model the software is
using. If the automatic tuning is unsuccessful, manual tuning may be required.
7.5 Application Start-Up

Use the Start-Up Checklist for all application specific initialization instructions. The Start-Up
Checklist must be completed in its entirety.
The checklist format guides the start-up procedure from initial parameter entry, through automated
tests and feature and control setup.

178
8 Faults, Warnings and Events
8.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on software features for troubleshooting and maintaining the
drive. It discusses the hardware and software fault detection system, including fault masking and
fault history. Refer to the installation guide for hardware operational theory and schematics, power
electronics troubleshooting procedures, maintenance issues, and a list of field-replaceable
components.
8.2 Fault System

The drive monitors many signals to determine if a fault condition exists. Fault conditions are
grouped into several categories based upon where they are detected.
Each fault condition may be configured to be a fault, warning, or event:
1. A fault causes the drive to shutoff immediately and the no fault status bit to be cleared. If the
drive was in motion, it will coast to a stop and not resist the machine pulling against it. All fatal
faults are displayed on the keypad and cause the keypad to flash. Faults are cleared when the
fault reset request bit is set.
2. Warnings do not shut off the drive. The drive proceeds as if nothing happened. The no
warning status bit is cleared to indicate a warning has occurred. Warnings are not displayed
on the keypad and do not cause the keypad to flash. Warnings are cleared when the warning
reset request bit is set.
3. Events do not shut off the drive. The drive proceeds as if nothing happened. Warnings are
not displayed on the keypad and do not cause the keypad to flash.
For each fault choose to classify it as only one: fault, warning or event. A fault condition cannot be
both a warning and a fault. If a fault condition is assigned as a both a fault and warning, the
warning mask and event mask will be cleared.
Assigning a fault condition to be fatal or warning fault is done within the fault menu. The drive
contains two sets of fault condition masks. The first mask set is used to enable a fault condition to
be fatal. The other mask set is used to enable a fault condition to be a warning. Each fault
condition has a bit within the mask that is set for enabling the condition, or cleared to disable the
condition. The Fault Masks menu is used to assign a fault condition to be fatal while the Warning
Masks menu is used to assign a fault condition to be a warning. See the section on faults in the
hardware manual for more information.
8.2.1 History
Fatal faults and warnings are stored in the F/W History submenu under the Faults menu. Events
are stored in the Event History submenu under the Faults menu. From the keypad, the History
menu is the simplest means of determining when a fatal or warning fault has occurred. The fault
history stores as many as 300 faults and warnings. The event history stores as many as 300
events. Each occurrence in the history contains information about when the fault occurred, if it was
a fatal or warning fault, and if it was a latched fault.
8.2.2 Fault Masks

Numerous fault masks may be monitored from the Global Dictionary. Each fault mask contains as
many as 32 fault condition bits, each of which represents a specific fault condition.
Table 8-1—Fault Mask
Mask Description

Faults, Warnings and Events
179
hdw mask 0 Indicates which fault conditions are enabled as fatal faults.
sfw mask 1 Each bit in the mask corresponds to a fault condition.
sfw mask 2
sfw mask 3
sfw mask 4
app mask 0
user mask 0
user mask 1
hdw warning mask 0 Indicates which fault conditions are enabled as warnings.
sfw warning mask 1 Each bit in the mask corresponds to a warning condition.
sfw warning mask 2
sfw warning mask 3
sfw warning mask 4
app warning mask 0
user warning mask 0
user warning mask 1
hdw event mask 0 Indicates which event conditions are enabled as events. Each
sfw event mask 1 bit in the mask corresponds to an event condition.
sfw event mask 2
sfw event mask 3
sfw event mask 4
app event mask 0
user event mask 0
user event mask 1
hdw faults 0 Indicates which fault conditions have occurred. This mask
sfw faults 1 results from logically AND-ing the unmasked hardware with the
hardware mask. If a fault bit is not set in the hardware mask, a
sfw faults 2
fault condition will not generate a fatal fault. To decode the
sfw faults 3 value, FIN: 0 is bit 2^0 through FIN:31 which is bit 2^31. The
sfw faults 4 names for FIN:0-FIN:61 and FOUT:0-FOUT:31 can be found in
app faults 0 following tables.
user faults 0
user faults 1
hdw warning 0 Indicates which warning conditions have occurred. Multiple
sfw warning 1 warning condition bits will be set in the mask if multiple warning
conditions occur simultaneously.
sfw warning 2
sfw warning 3
sfw warning 4
app warning 0
user warning 0
user warning 1
hdw latch 0 Indicates which fault conditions caused the drive to shut off.
sfw latched 1 Multiple fault condition bits will be set in the mask if multiple
fault conditions occur simultaneously.
sfw latched 2
sfw latched 3
sfw latched 4
app latched 0
user latched 0
user latched 1

180
8.2.3 Hardware Faults
The fault conditions that the drive detects in hardware are described below in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2—Hardware Faults
Bit Event Un-Mask Default Auto- Description

State Restart
FIN: 0 bus over no fault yes This fault indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded
voltage the maximum allowable limit. This can occur if the drive
stops too quickly or the input power is too high. Try
increasing the decel time or enabling the Bus Regulator.
FIN: 1 AMB thermal no fault yes This fault indicates that the ambient temperature of the drive
switch has exceeded 73 deg C. This can be caused if the cabinet
temperature is too high.
FIN: 5 fast overcurrent yes fault yes This fault indicates that the instantaneous current of the
inverter has exceeded the maximum allowable limit. This
can indicate that there is an output shorted. If this fault
occurs consistently on starting from a dead stop, un-mask
this fault.
FIN: 6 HS thermal no fault yes This fault indicates that a thermal switch on the inverter heat
switch sink has opened due to elevated temperature. This is
normally the result of excessive ambient air temperature or
restricted air flow through the heat sink.
FIN: 7 graund fault yes fault no This fault indicates that ground fault has occurred on the
drive.
FIN: 8 gate driver U+ no fault no These faults indicate that an excessive on- state voltage was
FIN: 9 gate driver U- detected across the associated power transistors within
inverter. This fault flow caused by a short circuit or ground
FIN: 10 gate driver V+
fault within the motor or associated connections.
FIN: 11 gate driver V-
FIN: 12 gate driver W+
FIN: 13 gate driver W-
FIN: 8 gate driver dsat no fault yes Indicates that an excessive on-state voltage was detected
across the associated power transistors within inverter. This
fault could be caused by a short circuit or ground fault within
the motor or associated connections.
FIN: 14 ireg shutoff no fault no This fault indicates that the current regulator gate array
stopped functioning and the DSP did not detect a fault
signal. This may be caused by the gate array detecting
faults that were not latched. These faults most likely are
caused by noise on signals to the current regulator gate
array. This may be corrected by re-wiring the grounding of
the drive or by replacing the module with the current
regulator gate array.
FIN: 16 low voltage yes fault yes Indicates that an unacceptable voltage level was detected on
supply either the +15 or -15 DC power supplies within the inverter.
Check the operating DC power supply levels. Often
associated with a power up event and was latched as the
power was lost.
FIN: 17 external trip yes none yes Not Used.
FIN: 18 dynamic brake yes fault yes This fault indicates the dynamic braking has been above the
limit duty cycle limit. Enable power limiting and/or decrease
regen power limit

181
State Restart
FIN: 19 watchdog timer no fault no This fault indicates that the software did not execute the
proper instruction sequence. A defective inverter control
module is a possible cause of repeated watchdog timer
faults.
FIN: 20 gate driver dsat no fault no These faults indicate that an excessive on state voltage was
detected across the associated power transistors within
inverter. The drive may have to be repaired as the IGBT
may have been damaged or the surrounding circuitry may
have been damaged.
FIN: 21 motor pg loss a yes none no This fault indicates that the motor socket encoder signals on
channel "a" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
Detection of this fault is enabled only if an incremental
encoder interface is connected.
FIN: 22 motor pg loss b yes none no This fault indicates that the motor socket encoder signals on
channel "b" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
FIN: 23 motor pg loss yes none no This fault indicates that the motor socket encoder signals on
m channel "m" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
FIN: 24 dynamic brake yes fault no The dynamic brake IGBT detected high current. Typically,
this fault indicates a shorted db resistor.
FIN: 25 load pg loss a yes none no This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on
FIN: 26 load pg loss b yes none no This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on
FIN: 27 load pg loss m yes none no This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on
channel "m" do not have the proper differential signal levels.
FIN: 28 nvmem battery yes fault no This fault indicates the nvmem battery is low and the nvmem
chip needs to be replaced.
FIN: 29 follow pg loss a yes none no This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on
FIN: 30 follow pg loss b yes none no This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on
FIN: 31 follow pg loss yes none no This fault indicates that the load socket encoder signals on
m channel "m" do not have the proper differential signal levels.

182
8.2.4 Software Faults
The fault conditions that the drive detects in software are described below in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3—Software Faults

State Restart
FIN: 32 motor marker yes none no This fault indicates that an incorrect number of encoder
pulses were accumulated between two consecutive marker
pulses for the motor socket pulse generator. Detection of
this fault is enabled only if an incremental encoder interface
is connected.
FIN: 33 load marker yes none no This fault indicates that an incorrect number of encoder
pulses for the load socket pulse generator. Detection of this
fault is enabled only if an incremental encoder interface is
connected.
FIN: 34 follow marker yes none no This fault indicates that an incorrect number of encoder
pulses for the load socket pulse generator. Detection of this
fault is enabled only if an incremental encoder interface is
connected.
FIN: 35 overrun yes fault yes This fault indicates the dsp microprocessor did not complete
all the time critical tasks in their allotted time.
FIN: 36 motor rms limit no fault yes This fault indicates that the RMS output current has
exceeded the level specified by the motor rms limit
parameter.
FIN: 37 circuit breaker yes none no This fault indicates that the torque command has been
saturated at the torque limit for a time equal to 1.1 times the
longer of the acceleration or deceleration times.
FIN: 38 pos error yes none no This fault indicates that position error has exceeded 1.25
times the maximum expected value. The maximum
expected position error is automatically calculated as a
function of the maximum velocity limit and drive tuning
parameters.
FIN: 39 bus yes fault yes This fault indicates that the DC bus voltage has exceeded
undervoltage the minimum allowable limit.
FIN: 40 motor fbk loss yes none no This fault indicates that motor’s feedback velocity has
remained at zero for longer than a preset time delay after the
presence of a non-zero velocity command. The preset time
delay is automatically calculated as a function of the drive
tuning parameters.
FIN: 41 load fbk loss yes none no This fault indicates that load’s feedback velocity has
remained at zero for longer than a preset time delay after the
presence of a non-zero velocity command. The preset time
delay is automatically calculated as a function of the drive
tuning parameters.
FIN: 42 motor runaway yes none no This fault indicates that after command velocity has been set
to zero, the motor feedback velocity has either not stopped
rotating within one second or has continued to rotate a
distance of one revolution.
FIN: 43 load runaway yes none no This fault indicates that after command velocity has been set
to zero, the load feedback velocity has either not stopped
rotating within one second or has continued to rotate a
distance of one revolution.

183
State Restart
FIN: 44 non volatile yes fault no A circular redundancy check (CRC) is done on all setup
mem parameters and other data stored in non volatile memory
during the power-up sequence. This fault indicates that
check has detected corrupted data the drive’s default setup
parameters were loaded. It is possible for this fault to occur
the first time that power is applied to the drive after
upgrading the program to a newer version. Subsequent fault
may indicate a defective non volatile memory or inverter
control module. Storing data parameter values to flash
memory in the Archive Menu, choosing no to Default and
yes to Recall provides automatic recovery from this event.
FIN: 45 rtc takeover yes none no This fault indicates that the externally generated real time
clock (RTC) was lost and the internally generated RTC took
control of the signal.
FIN: 46 fbk circuit yes none no This fault indicates that a DC drive fed from a DC bus. This
breaker fault occurs when the feedback torque is within the tolerance
and time limit of the feedback fault. Normally this is not
used.
FIN: 47 ssi receive yes none no This fault indicates that a fault occurred on the ssi serial link.
FIN: 48 inverter rms no fault no This fault indicates that the RMS output current has
exceeded the level specified by the maximum current
parameter.
FIN: 49 sync receive yes none no This fault indicates that synchronous serial link had a fault.
The fault is generated if the drive’s real time clock is not
synchronized to the serial links packet.
FIN: 50 armature curr yes none no This fault indicates that the dc feedback differs from
error command.
FIN: 51 field current yes fault no This fault indicates that the field current is less than 10
loss percent of rated field current for 20 msec.
FIN: 52 overspeed trip yes none no Not currently used in this application.
FIN: 54 sync data error yes none no This fault indicates that synchronous serial link received bad
data. The fault is generated if the size of the packet is
incorrect or the crc on the data is incorrect.
FIN: 55 optomux no none no Not currently used in this application.
timeout
FIN: 56 unknown fbk yes none no This fault indicates that drive does not recognize the
module feedback module plugged into the inverter control module.
FIN: 57 reserved no none no —
FIN: 58 communication yes none no This fault indicates that dynlink master did not communicate
error with the drive for a time interval greater than the setup
dynlink timeout.
FIN: 59 torque reg error yes fault no Torque regulator error. This fault indicates that the torque
regulator output torque has exceeded the torque regulator
error limit. This fault may not be used if setups for the fault
do not exist.
FIN: 60 UEdit Fault yes fault no Contact Unico.
FIN: 61 firmware error yes fault no Contact Unico.
FIN: 62 output phase yes fault no This fault detects phase imbalance.
loss

184
State Restart
FIN: 64 pos error no none no Not currently used in this application.
ewarn
FIN: 65 motor rms no none no Not currently used in this application.
ewarn
FIN: 66 thermal switch no none no Not currently used in this application.
ewarn
FIN: 67 obsync receive no none no Not currently used in this application.
FIN: 68 obsync data no none no Not currently used in this application.
error
FIN: 69 identification no fault no This fault indicates that the controller has read a different ID
error (horsepower rating) since the pervious power up. It might
imply the controller has been moved to a different drive or
the cable that reads the ID is not connected. This fault can
only be reset if the controller reads the original
corresponding ID or the non-volatile memory is defaulted or
the Reset ID utility is used from the Archive Menu.
FIN: 71 load defaults yes fault no This fault indicates that default setups were loaded.
FIN: 83 anybus 1 no fault no Not currently used in this application.

FIN: 89 abs ref no none no Not currently used in this application.
FIN: 103 modbus rtu Need Need Need Need
comm. Loss
FIN: 105 pumper visit yes Need Need This event indicates that the pumper/service technician has
logged pumper visit code in the Maintenance Menu
FIN: 106 vibration yes Need Need This fault indicates that the vibration input has returned
TRUE as defined in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 107 Callout Need Need Need This event latches important informational data to the event
history. Usually indicates the possible need for a service call
to the well site. Used in conjunction with GMC®
Subscription e-mail services.
FIN: 108 background Need Need Need Need

watchdog
FIN: 109 dh tool current Need Need Need Need
FIN: 110 dh tool voltage Need Need Need Need
FIN: 111 Input/matrix Need Need Need Need

overload
FIN: 112 engine temp yes warning no Fault occurs on the engine temp value.
Latches: engine temp value
FIN: 113 gas leak yes warning no Fault occurs on the gas leak.
FIN: 114 emergency yes warning no Fault occurs on the emergency shutdown.
shutdown
FIN: 115 security breach no warning no Fault occurs on the security breach input.
FIN: 116 pump diffl prs no fault no Selected fault/warning/event occurs if pump differential
pressure goes out of range.
FIN: 117 step-down xfmr no fault no Selected fault/warning/event occurs on step-down
transformer input.

185
State Restart
FIN: 118 step-up xfmr no fault no Selected fault/warning/event occurs on step-up transformer
input.
FIN: 119 water cut no fault no Selected fault/warning/event occurs if water cut percentage
goes out of range.
Latches: water cut value
FIN: 120 output/sin Need Need Need Need

overload
FIN: 121 Load encoder yes Need Need This fault indicates that the load socket module chip used for
error sine cosine interpolation has detected a fault on the sine or
cosine reference signal (adc error, adc limit or frequency
limit). Verify signal integrity with scope while operating in
frequency mode
FIN: 122 calendar event no event no Latches calendar events.

FIN: 123 generator no fault no Latches data upon generator conditions.
Latches: generator state, ecu diagnostic, engine run hours,
engine maint hours, engine start flt count
FIN: 124 user event 1 no event no Latches data upon user event 1.
FIN: 125 user event 2 no event no Latches data upon user event 2.
FIN: 126 rtu master err no warning no Latches data upon rtu master err.
FIN: 127 rtu slave err no warning no Latches data upon rtu slave err.
Latches: rtu slave status
FIN: 146 Inv thermal yes Need Need This fault indicates that the load socket module chip used for
ewarn sine cosine interpolation has detected a fault on the sine or
cosine reference signal (adc error, adc limit or frequency
limit). Verify signal integrity with scope while operating in
frequency mode
FIN: 147 Process Wdt yes fault yes This fault indicates that a process within the drive was
executing for longer than a specified time (typically 2
seconds) without allowing other processes to run
8.2.5 Application Faults

The fault conditions that the drive detects in the application are described below in Table 8-3.
Table 8-4—Application Faults

State Restart
FIN: 160 br phase loss yes fault no Software phase loss detection.
fault
FIN: 161 ehalt yes fault yes Not currently used in this application.
FIN: 162 motor thermal yes fault yes Not currently used in this application.
switch
FIN: 163 motor blower yes fault yes Not currently used in this application.
off
FIN: 164 bus reg tol vel yes fault no Bus regulator error.
FIN: 165 bus reg tol time yes fault no Bus regulator error.
FIN: 166 db thermal yes fault yes DB thermal overload.

186
State Restart
FIN: 167 external stop yes fault yes If digital in x select = EXTERNAL STOP, fault indicator
based on input value. Set up logic polarity, fault detection
delay and restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 168 user 1 yes fault yes If digital in x select = USER FLT 1, fault indicator based on
input value. Set up logic polarity, fault detection delay and
restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 171 tank lvl input yes fault yes If digital in x select = TANK LVL, fault indicator based on
FIN: 172 low prs flow yes fault yes If digital in x select = LOW PRS FLOW, fault indicator based
on input value. Set up logic polarity, fault detection delay
and restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 173 high prs yes fault yes If digital in x select = HIGH PRS, fault indicator based on
FIN: 174 fluid flow yes auto-set yes If fluid flow source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on
input value. Set up warning and fault detection ranges, fault
detection delay and restart delay in the Signal In Menu.
Latches: fluid flow value
FIN: 175 gas flow yes auto-set yes If gas flow source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based on
Latches: gas flow value
FIN: 176 vibrtn x yes auto-set yes If vibrtn x source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based on
Latches: vibrtn x value
FIN: 177 vibrtn y yes auto-set yes If vibrtn y source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based on
Latches:vibrtn y value
FIN: 178 current leakage yes auto-set yes If current leakage source is not DISABLED, fault indicator
based on input value. Set up warning and fault detection
ranges, fault detection delay and restart delay in the Signal
In Menu.
Latches:current leakage value
FIN: 179 rotaflex stop yes fault yes Not used in this application.
FIN: 180 auto off jog yes fault yes If digital in 6 select = AUTO OFF JOG SWITCH, fault
stop indicator based on input value. Set up logic polarity, fault
detection delay and restart delay in the Digital I/O Menu.
FIN: 181 casing prs yes auto-set yes If casing prs source is not KEYPAD, fault indicator based on
Latches: casing prs value

187
State Restart
FIN: 182 casing temp yes auto-set yes If casing temp source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based
on input value. Set up warning and fault detection ranges,
fault detection delay and restart delay in the Signal In Menu.
Latches: casing temp value
FIN: 183 tubing prs yes auto-set yes If tubing prs source is not KEYPAD, fault indicator based on
Latches: tubing prs value
FIN: 184 tubing temp yes auto-set yes If tubing temp source is not DISABLED, fault indicator based
Latches: tubing temp value
FIN: 185 intake prs yes auto-set yes If intake prs source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based
Latches: intake prs value
FIN: 186 discharge prs yes auto-set yes If discharge prs source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator
based on input value. Set up warning and fault detection
ranges, fault detection delay and restart delay in the Signal
In Menu.
Latches: discharge prs value
FIN: 187 user A yes auto-set yes If user A source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on
Latches: user A value
FIN: 188 user B yes auto-set yes If user B source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based on
Latches: user B value
FIN: 189 tank level yes auto-set yes If tank level source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based
Latches: tank level value
FIN: 190 fluid temp yes auto-set yes If fluid temp source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based
Latches: fluid temp value
FIN: 191 motor temp yes auto-set yes If motor temp source is not ESTIMATE, fault indicator based
Latches: motor temp value
8.2.6 User Faults

The fault conditions that the drive detects in software that are defined in UEdit are described below
in Table 8-5—User Faults.
Table 8-5—User Faults

State Restart

188
State Restart
FOUT: 0 user fault 0 req yes low yes .
speed
mask
FOUT: 1 low speed yes low yes If low speed mask is not set to NONE, fault indicator based
speed on motor speed. Set up detection level, fault detection delay
mask and restart delay in the Fault/Event Menu. This fault is also
disabled during the Well ID and Valve Check Test.
Latches: pump average spm, pump spm monitor, srp motor
vel rpm
FOUT: 2 negative torque yes negative yes If negative torq mask is not set to NONE, fault indicator
torq based on crank torque. Set up detection level, fault
mask detection delay and restart delay in the Fault/Event Menu.
This fault is also disabled during the Well ID and Valve
Check Test.
Latches: rod torque monitor and pump torque monitor
FOUT: 3 low rod load yes fault no Not used
FOUT: 4 start event yes event no Indicates that the motor has started.
FOUT: 5 stop event yes event no Indicates that the motor has stopped.
FOUT: 6 reference loss yes fault no Not used
FOUT: 7 pstandby event yes event no Indicates that the pumping unit has temporarily stopped by
the POC Controller and will restart once POC off time has
expired. Set up the POC Controller in the Control Menu .
Latches: pump average spm, pump fill monitor, fluid fill
monitor, gas fill monitor, speed mode select, optimize state
FOUT: 8 max fault event yes event no Indicates that there are no more auto-restarts allowed. The
allowable restart attempts has been used. Operator
intervention required.
FOUT: 9 power up event yes event no Indicates that drive has been powered up.
Latches: hdw faults 0 , sfw faults 1, sfw faults 2, , app faults
4, user faults 0, user faults 1, power off date, power off time
FOUT: 10 flow variance yes fault no Flow variance fault detection. Flow variance is the difference
between the estimated, and sensor flow value.
The fault is set when the difference is greater than the flow
variance alarm value, and must be greater for the flow
variance time.
FOUT: 13 gauge event yes event no Simple gauging data-logger that latches every 24 hours at
gauge time.
Latches: gauge run time, gauge fluid production, gauge
leakage, gauge avg level, gauge avg speed, gauge energy
consumption
FOUT: 14 high torque yes high torq yes If high torq mask is not set to NONE, fault indicator based on
mask crank torque. Set up detection level, fault detection delay
and restart delay in the Fault/Event Menu. This fault is also
Latches: crank torque monitor
FOUT: 15 password yes none no If drive is password protected, detects password level entry.
event Latches: lockout status, lockout time

189
State Restart
FOUT: 18 auto flt reset yes event no The auto-restart function issued a fault reset request.
event Latches: hdw faults 0 , sfw faults 1, sfw faults 2, sfw faults 3,
app faults 4, user faults 0, user faults 1
FOUT: 19 operator reset yes event no The STANDBY/RUN switch has been switched to a new
event position. The controller has issued a fault-reset request.
TB1-21--Hand Mode Enable has changed state.
TB1-22--Auto Mode Enable has changed state.
TB1-23--Run Enable has changed state.
Latches: hdw faults 0 , sfw faults 1, sfw faults 2, sfw faults 3,
FOUT: 20 dwell event yes event no Indicates that the pumping unit has been temporarily slowed
by the POC Controller to POC dwell spm. Set up the POC
Controller in the Control Menu .
FOUT: 21 reservoir low yes event no Indicates that the pumping unit has detected a low reservoir
flow flow condition.
FOUT: 22 gauge event 2 yes event no Simple gauging data-logger that latches every 24 hours at
gauge time.
Latches: gauge gas production, gauge oil production, gauge
water production, gauge fluid flow, gauge power meter
FOUT: 25 dwell end event yes event no Indicates that the pumping unit has resumed normal
operation after the POC Controller had reduces speed to
POC dwell spm. Set up the POC Controller in the Control
Menu .
FOUT: 26 gas srch done yes event no The SINGLE/DUAL/OPTIMIZE switch has been moved to
event the optimize position.
Latches: gas search req level and gas search time
FOUT: 28 hand mode yes event no The hand/off/auto switch has been moved to the hand
event position.
FOUT: 29 auto mode yes event no The hand/off/auto switch has been moved to the auto
event position.
FOUT: 31 remote event yes event yes* The remote run enable parameter has changed states.
*If the motor is on, as soon as the remote run enable

parameter is ENABLE, the drive will start if both motor on--
Digital Input 11 in TB1-23 and run enable—Digital Input 10 in
TB1-22 are asserted (STANDBY/RUN switch is in the RUN
position. If the motor is on and remote run enable is
disabled, drive will STOP and running status will display
REMOTE STOP. Not a part of the auto-restart function.
Latches: hdw faults 0 , sfw faults 1, sfw faults 2, sfw faults 3,
FOUT: 32 mtr ovld yes fault no Mtr overload
latched
FOUT: 33 mtr uld latched yes fault no Mtr underload
FOUT: 34 power ridethru yes event no Power ridethrough start
start

190
State Restart
FOUT: 35 power ridethru yes event no Power ridethrough end
end
FOUT: 36 mtr uld yes mtr uld yes Indicator based on mtr current monitor. Set up detection
mask level, fault detection delay and restart delay in the
Fault/Event Menu. This fault is also disabled during the Well
ID and level test.
FOUT: 37 mtr ovld yes warning no Indicator based on mtr current monitor. Set up detection
level, fault detection delay and restart delay in the
Fault/Event Menu. This fault is also disabled during the Well
ID and level test.
FOUT: 38 flow variance yes fault no Flow variance fault detection. Flow variance is the difference
between the estimated, and sensor flow value.
The fault is set when the difference is greater than the flow
variance alarm value, and must be greater for the flow
variance time.
FOUT: 41 pump forward yes event no This indicates that pump is running at forward direction.
event
FOUT: 42 backflush event yes event no This indicates that drive is performing backflush.
FOUT: 43 pump reverse yes event no This indicates that pump is running at reverse direction.
event
FOUT: 44 modbus comm yes event no Modbus status.
error
FOUT: 45 level test event yes event no Level test event.
Latches: lt begin speed, lt begin torque, lt begin tubing prs, lt
begin casing prs, lt shut off spd, lt shut off torq, lt shut off prs,
lt fop estimate
FOUT: 46 pump off event yes event no Pump off event.

Latches: pump speed monitor, pump torque monitor, fluid
over pump monitor
FOUT: 47 pump off yes event no Pump off.

FOUT: 49 low torque yes event no If low torq mask is not set to NONE, indicator based on rod
load monitor. Set up detection level, fault detection delay
and restart delay in the Fault/Event Menu. This fault is also
disabled during the Well ID and level test.
FOUT: 60 high speed yes high yes If high speed masks is not set to NONE, fault indicator based
speed on motor speed. Set up detection level, fault detection delay
mask and restart delay in the Fault/Event Menu. This fault is also
Latches: pump average spm, pump spm monitor, srp motor
vel rpm
FOUT: 63 well id event yes none no Simple event logger indicating that a Well ID Test has been
performed.

191
9 Tables
9.1 Overview
This chapter provides tables for the switch frequency, db resistance and db watts parameters.
9.2 Switching Frequencies

Power CT VT Power CT VT Power CT VT ET
hp (kW) kHz kHz hp (kW) kHz kHz hp (kW) kHz kHz kHz
230 V 380 V 460 V

11/2 (1.1) 10.0 — 11/2 (1.1) 7.5 — 11/2 (1.1) 8.0 — —
2 (1.5) 10.0 8.8 2 (1.5) 7.5 6.8 2 (1.5) 8.0 7.3 —
3 (2.2) 10.0 6.0 3 (2.2) 7.5 5.1 3 (2.2) 8.0 5.5 —
5 (3.7) 10.0 4.8 5 (3.7) 7.5 4.4 5 (3.7) 8.0 4.8 —
71/2 (5.5) 10.0 6.1 71/2 (5.5) 7.5 5.2 71/2 (5.5) 8.0 5.6 —
10 (7.5) 10.0 7.3 10 (7.5) 7.5 5.9 10 (7.5) 8.0 6.4 —
15 (11) 10.0 5.6 15 (11) 7.5 4.9 15 (11) 8.0 5.3 —
20 (15) 8.0 7.6 20 (15) 5.5 6.1 20 (15) 6.0 6.5 —
25 (18) 8.0 6.3 25 (18) 5.5 4.6 25 (18) 6.0 5.0 5.2
30 (22) 8.0 6.7 30 (22) 5.5 4.8 30 (22) 6.0 5.3 4.4
40 (30) 8.0 5.8 40 (30) 5.5 4.3 40 (30) 6.0 4.7 4.1
50 (37) 8.0 6.4 50 (37) 5.5 4.6 50 (37) 6.0 5.1 3.7
60 (45) 8.0 6.8 60 (45) 5.5 4.8 60 (45) 6.0 5.3 4.4
75 (55) — 6.1 75 (55) 5.5 4.5 75 (55) 6.0 4.9 4.4
100 (75) 5.5 4.3 100 (75) 6.0 4.7 3.7
125 (90) 4.0 4.6 125 (90) 4.5 5.1 3.7
150 (110) 4.0 3.5 150 (110) 4.5 4.0 4.5
200 (150) 4.0 2.8 200 (150) 4.5 3.3 2.9
250 (185) 4.0 3.2 250 (185) 4.5 3.7 2.4
300 (225) 4.0 3.5 300 (225) 4.5 4.0 3.0
350 (262) 3.5 3.7 350 (262) 4.0 4.2 3.5
400 (300) — 3.1 400 (300) — 3.6 3.9
500 (375) — — 2.9

Tables
192
10 Index
100MHz Compact Control Module ........... 17, 38, 119, 120 ahd output offset ......................................................... 131
100MHz Control Module .................................... 16, 17, 38 ahd phase offset.......................................................... 131
4-20 mA Signal Inputs.............................................. 20, 21 ahd qd r filter ............................................................... 131
About the Manual........................................................... 10 ahd reg mode .............................................................. 131
abs ref fault .................................................................. 185 AMB thermal switch fault ............................................. 181
ac fast multiple......................................................... 37, 73 ambient temperature ................................................... 181
ac multiple ............................................................... 37, 73 Analog Common ........................................................... 21
AC Test Utility ...............................32, 33, 69, 75, 172, 176 Analog Input Terminals ........................................... 20, 21
accel time .............................................................. 47, 144 Analog Inputs (Signal In Menu) Menu............................ 82
actune mode ................................................................ 176 Analog Interface Module 12, 20, 22, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88,
ADC down max volts ..................................................... 53 89, 90, 91, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102,
103, 104, 108, 109, 110, 154, 155
ADC eng spd ............................................................... 153
Analog Out Menu .......................................................... 21
ADC eng spd max........................................................ 154
Analog Output Terminals ............................................... 20
ADC eng spd max volts ............................................... 154
Analog Utility ................................................................. 36
ADC eng spd min......................................................... 153
ANSI Protocol .............................................. 118, 119, 120
ADC eng spd min volts ................................................ 154
Anybus .......................................................................... 17
ADC eng spd value ...................................................... 154
anybus 1 fault.............................................................. 185
ADC external max.............................................. 48, 53, 83
anybus clock ............................................................... 126
ADC external max volts ..................................... 48, 53, 83
anybus gateway 0 ....................................................... 126
ADC external min............................................... 47, 52, 83
anybus gateway 1 ....................................................... 126
ADC external min volts ...................................... 48, 53, 83
anybus gateway 2 ....................................................... 126
ADC external source.......................................... 47, 52, 83
anybus gateway 3 ....................................................... 126
ADC external spm.............................................. 48, 53, 83
anybus input slots ....................................................... 126
ADC pot max ..................................................... 47, 52, 82
anybus ip addr 0.......................................................... 125
ADC pot max volts ............................................. 47, 52, 82
anybus ip addr 1.......................................................... 125
ADC pot min ...................................................... 47, 52, 82
anybus ip addr 2.......................................................... 125
ADC pot min volts .............................................. 47, 52, 82
anybus ip addr 3.......................................................... 125
ADC pot source ................................................. 47, 52, 82
Anybus Module™ .......................................................... 17
ADC pot value ................................................... 47, 52, 82
anybus netmask 0 ....................................................... 125
Addressing Dictionary Items, see Network Map ............. 38
anybus netmask 1 ....................................................... 125
ahd decouple ............................................................... 131
anybus netmask 2 ....................................................... 125
ahd h1 ......................................................................... 131
anybus netmask 3 ....................................................... 125
ahd h1 ddh cmd ........................................................... 131
anybus output slots ..................................................... 126
ahd h1 dqh cmd ........................................................... 131
anybus pos units ......................................................... 126
ahd h1 mdh cmd .......................................................... 131
anybus read 0 ............................................................. 126
ahd h1 mqh cmd .......................................................... 131
anybus read 1 ............................................................. 126
ahd h2 ......................................................................... 131
anybus read 10 ........................................................... 127
ahd h2 ddh cmd ........................................................... 131
anybus read 11 ........................................................... 127
ahd h2 dqh cmd ........................................................... 131
anybus read 12 ........................................................... 127
ahd h2 mdh cmd .......................................................... 132
anybus read 13 ........................................................... 128
ahd h2 mqh cmd .......................................................... 131
anybus read 14 ........................................................... 128
ahd h3 ......................................................................... 132
anybus read 15 ........................................................... 128
ahd h3 ddh cmd ........................................................... 132
anybus read 2 ............................................................. 127
ahd h3 dqh cmd ........................................................... 132
anybus read 3 ............................................................. 127
ahd h3 mdh cmd .......................................................... 132
anybus read 4 ............................................................. 127
ahd h3 mqh cmd .......................................................... 132
anybus read 5 ............................................................. 127
ahd inverter hp filter ..................................................... 131
anybus read 6 ............................................................. 127
ahd ki ........................................................................... 131
anybus read 7 ............................................................. 127
ahd kp.......................................................................... 131
anybus read 8 ............................................................. 127
AHD Menu ................................................................... 131

Index
193
anybus read 9 .............................................................. 127 backspin rev vel 15 ....................................................... 58
anybus station addr ..................................................... 125 backspin rev vel 25 ....................................................... 58
anybus swap................................................................ 126 backspin rev vel 50 ....................................................... 58
anybus units ................................................................ 126 backspin ride thru .......................................................... 57
anybus vel units ........................................................... 126 backspin start speed ..................................................... 58
anybus write 0 ............................................................. 128 Bar-graph Display ......................................................... 31
anybus write 1 ............................................................. 128 base rpm ............................................................... 69, 172
anybus write 10 ........................................................... 129 base vel vbus comp ...................................................... 79
anybus write 11 ........................................................... 129 blank display ................................................................. 30
anybus write 12 ........................................................... 129 Bluetooth Module .......................................................... 12
anybus write 13 ........................................................... 129 br phase loss enable ............................................. 79, 186
anybus write 14 ........................................................... 129 br phase loss fault ................................................. 79, 186
anybus write 15 ........................................................... 129 bubble point pressure .................................................. 137
anybus write 2 ............................................................. 128 bus capacitance .................................................... 80, 132
anybus write 3 ............................................................. 128 bus overvoltage fault ............................................. 78, 181
anybus write 4 ............................................................. 128 bus reg .......................................................................... 78
anybus write 5 ............................................................. 128 bus reg kd ..................................................................... 79
anybus write 6 ............................................................. 128 bus reg kp ..................................................................... 79
anybus write 7 ............................................................. 128 bus reg min vel .............................................................. 78
anybus write 8 ............................................................. 129 bus reg tol dec .............................................................. 79
anybus write 9 ............................................................. 129 bus reg tol time ............................................................. 78
aoj restart override ......................................................... 51 bus reg tol time fault .............................................. 78, 186
aoj stop input ............................................................... 114 bus reg tol vel................................................................ 78
aoj stop restart delay ................................................... 114 bus reg tol vel fault ................................................ 78, 186
aoj stop restart override ............................................... 114 Bus Regulator .......................................... 78, 79, 181, 186
app faults 4 .......................................................... 189, 190 bus undervoltage fault ................................................. 183
Application Description .................................................. 12 bus voltage................................. 57, 58, 78, 132, 181, 186
Application Features ...................................................... 13 calendar ........................................................................ 36
Application Overview ..................................................... 12 calendar control............................................................. 51
Application Wiring .......................................................... 15 Calendar Controller ................................ 14, 43, 51, 59, 61
Archiving Parameters....................................... 33, 34, 184 Calendar Menu ............................................................. 51
armature curr error fault ............................................... 184 Calendar Utility........................................................ 37, 38
Attention Symbol................... 7, 8, 9, 11, 15, 32, 33, 50, 61 CALENDAR WAIT......................................................... 43
auto enable input ........................................................... 43 calibrate analog select........................................... 82, 153
auto flt reset event ....................................................... 190 calibrate analog set .......... 47, 48, 52, 53, 82, 83, 153, 154
Auto Mode ..................................................... 19, 154, 190 calibrate max volts ................................................ 82, 153
auto off jog (aoj) stop fault ........................................... 187 calibrate min volts ................................................. 82, 153
Auto Restarts14, 43, 51, 62, 64, 65, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, 90, callout event ................................................................ 185
91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102, 103, 104, callout sts .................................................................... 155
105, 155, 189, 190
casing fluid density ...............................................137, 144
auto restarts, Feature List .............................................. 51
casing inner diameter ................................... 133, 157, 158
AUTO RUN .................................................................... 43
casing press monitor ................................................... 145
auto speed source ......................... 43, 47, 52, 53, 82, 132
casing pressure source ............................................... 165
Auto-restart .................................................................... 43
casing prs ............................................................. 83, 138
avg perf depth.............................................................. 137
casing prs fault ............................................................ 187
avg perforation depth ................................................... 133
casing prs fault time ...................................................... 84
back-light ....................................................................... 31
casing prs max .............................................................. 83
backspin bus min ........................................................... 57
casing prs max fault ...................................................... 84
backspin decel torq ........................................................ 58
casing prs max volts ...................................................... 83
backspin fwd vel ............................................................ 58
casing prs max warning................................................. 84
backspin input.............................................................. 116
casing prs min ............................................................... 83
backspin ki ..................................................................... 58
casing prs min fault ....................................................... 84
backspin kp.................................................................... 58
casing prs min volts ....................................................... 83

Index
194
casing prs restart delay .................................................. 84 console232 address .................................................... 121
casing prs rtu word ........................................................ 83 console232 baud rate .................................................. 121
casing prs source................ 83, 84, 85, 137, 138, 165, 187 console232 parity ........................................................ 121
casing prs value............................. 83, 159, 161, 165, 187 console232 pos units................................................... 121
casing temp fault.......................................................... 188 console232 protocol .............................................120, 121
casing temp fault time .................................................... 85 console232 rtu gap...................................................... 121
casing temp max............................................................ 84 console232 rtu slave timeout ....................................... 121
casing temp max fault .................................................... 85 console232 stop bits ................................................... 121
casing temp max volts ................................................... 84 console232 term size .................................................. 121
casing temp max warning .............................................. 85 console232 term type .................................................. 121
casing temp min............................................................. 84 console232 units ......................................................... 121
casing temp min fault ..................................................... 85 Control and Optional Modules ................ 12, 108, 109, 110
casing temp min volts .................................................... 84 Control Menu ........................................... 51, 57, 189, 190
casing temp restart delay ............................................... 85 control troubleshooter.................................................... 61
casing temp rtu word ..................................................... 84 crank torque monitor ................................................... 189
casing temp source...................................................... 188 cumulative run hours ..................................................... 66
casing temp source........................................................ 84 current limit ................................................................... 57
casing temp value .......................................... 84, 159, 188 current limiting............................................................... 78
casing valve control ..................................................... 157 Current Modulation.................................................. 47, 74
Casing Valve Controller ............................................... 166 current time ........................................................48, 57, 68
change motor dir ............................................................ 48 dac 1 abs .................................................................... 107
Chart Display ................................................................. 39 dac 1 auto scale .......................................................... 107
Chart Recorder Utility, UEdit® ....................................... 13 dac 1 div ..................................................................... 107
circuit breaker fault ...................................................... 183 dac 1 item ................................................................... 107
Clear Event Masks......................................................... 25 dac 1 mul .................................................................... 107
Clear Fault ......................................................... 25, 31, 36 dac 1 output ................................................................ 107
Clear Fault History ......................................................... 25 dac 1 ptr ...................................................................... 107
Clear Fault Masks .......................................................... 25 dac 1 select .................... 21, 107, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166
Clear Warning Masks..................................................... 25 dac 2 abs .................................................................... 108
clock frequency ........................................................ 36, 73 dac 2 auto scale .......................................................... 107
Clock Utility .................................................................... 36 dac 2 div ..................................................................... 108
cold current limit............................................................. 51 dac 2 item ................................................................... 107
Cold Start Controller ................................................ 14, 51 dac 2 mul .................................................................... 107
cold start mode ........................................................ 14, 51 dac 2 output ................................................................ 108
cold start spm ................................................................ 51 dac 2 ptr ...................................................................... 107
cold start torque limit ...................................................... 51 dac 2 select ............. 21, 107, 108, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166
Comm Menu ............................................................ 34, 42 dac 3 abs .................................................................... 108
communication error fault ............................................ 184 dac 3 auto scale .......................................................... 108
Compact Control Module ..................................... 120, 121 dac 3 div ..................................................................... 108
conseole212 vel units .................................................. 121 dac 3 item ................................................................... 108
console address........................................................... 118 dac 3 mul .................................................................... 108
console baud rate ........................................................ 118 dac 3 output ................................................................ 108
console parity .............................................................. 118 dac 3 ptr ...................................................................... 108
Console Port ...................................................... 18, 19, 38 dac 3 select .................... 23, 108, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166
Console Port Units ......................................................... 42 dac 4 abs .................................................................... 109
console pos units ......................................................... 118 dac 4 auto scale .......................................................... 109
console protocol.... 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125 dac 4 div ..................................................................... 109
console rtu gap ............................................................ 118 dac 4 item ................................................................... 108
console rtu slave timeout ............................................. 118 dac 4 mul .................................................................... 109
console term size ......................................................... 118 dac 4 output ................................................................ 109
console term type ........................................................ 118 dac 4 ptr ...................................................................... 109
console units.......................................................... 42, 118 dac 4 select ............. 23, 108, 109, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166
console vel units .......................................................... 118 dac 5 abs .................................................................... 110

Index
195
dac 5 auto scale........................................................... 109 digital in 1 select.................................................... 19, 112
dac 5 div ...................................................................... 109 digital in 2 select.................................................... 19, 112
dac 5 item .................................................................... 109 digital in 3 select.................................................... 19, 112
dac 5 mul ..................................................................... 109 digital in 4 select.................................................... 19, 112
dac 5 output ................................................................. 110 digital in 5 select............................................. 19, 112, 187
dac 5 ptr ...................................................................... 109 digital in 6 select............................................. 19, 112, 187
dac 5 select ............ 23, 109, 110, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166 digital in 7 select........................................................... 19
dac 6 abs ..................................................................... 110 digital in 7 select 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 92, 103, 104, 112, 187
dac 6 auto scale........................................................... 110 digital in 8 select........................................................... 19
dac 6 div ...................................................................... 110 digital in 8 select...................................................112, 187
dac 6 item .................................................................... 110 digital in x select ........... 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 152, 154
dac 6 mul ..................................................................... 110 Digital Inputs ..... 19, 36, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 154
dac 6 output ................................................................. 110 digital out 0 select ......................................................... 19
dac 6 ptr ...................................................................... 110 digital out 1 select ................................................. 19, 111
dac 6 select .................... 23, 110, 161, 163, 164, 165, 166 digital out 2 select ................................................. 19, 111
dac clock level ............................................................. 107 digital out 3 select ................................................. 19, 111
Data Collection .............................................................. 13 digital out 4 select ................................................. 19, 111
Data Output ................................................................... 14 digital out 5 select ................................................. 19, 111
Data Recall .................................................................... 35 digital out signal mode................................................. 111
Data Sampler................................................................. 13 digital out signal select ................................................ 111
Data Sampler Utility, UEdit® .......................................... 13 digital out x select......................................... 161, 164, 166
Data Store ..................................................................... 35 Digital Outputs ........................................... 19, 36, 43, 111
date and time ........................ 36, 59, 60, 61, 167, 169, 175 DISABLED .................................................................... 43
date range enable sts .................................................... 61 discharge prs fault ....................................................... 188
Date, setting of .............................37, 59, 60, 61, 169, 175 discharge prs fault time ................................................. 92
day and night operation ..................................... 14, 43, 59 discharge prs max ......................................................... 91
day end.......................................................................... 60 discharge prs max fault ................................................. 92
day start......................................................................... 60 discharge prs max volts................................................. 91
daylight savings time ................................................... 169 discharge prs max warning............................................ 92
db percent used ........................................................... 150 discharge prs min .......................................................... 91
db resistance ....................................................... 150, 192 discharge prs min fault .................................................. 92
db rtd power................................................................. 150 discharge prs min volts.................................................. 91
db time constant .......................................................... 150 discharge prs min warning............................................. 92
db watts ....................................................... 150, 181, 192 discharge prs restart delay ............................................ 92
DC Power Supply Outputs ....................................... 19, 21 discharge prs rtu word ................................................... 91
decel time ...................................................... 47, 144, 181 discharge prs source ........................................91, 92, 188
Decimal Point Key ......................................................... 25 discharge prs value ............................................... 92, 188
Defaulting Parameters ................................................... 35 Display .......................................................................... 24
Delete Key ..................................................................... 25 Display Menu ........................................................ 42, 169
diagnostics..................................................................... 36 drfo ............................................................................... 77
Diagnostics Utilities........................................................ 31 drfo obs ki .................................................................... 77
Dictionary ................................................................ 31, 38 drfo obs kp .................................................................... 77
differential prs estimate ................................................ 138 drive current date .................................................169, 175
diffl prs estimate............................................................. 92 drive current day ......................................................... 169
diffl prs fault time............................................................ 93 drive current day of week ............................................ 169
diffl prs max fault...................................................... 49, 93 drive current month ..................................................... 169
diffl prs max warning ...................................................... 93 drive current time .................................................169, 175
diffl prs min fault....................................................... 49, 93 Drive Identity ................................................................. 30
diffl prs min warning ....................................................... 93 Drive Menu.................................................................... 71
diffl prs restart delay ................................................ 49, 93 Drive Menu Protocol ...................................................... 17
diffl prs source ............................................................... 92 drive model ........................................................46, 71, 73
Digital I/O Menu ............................................. 19, 111, 187 drive multiple ........................................................... 37, 73
digital in 0 select ...................................... 19, 62, 111, 187 Drive Reg Menu .................................................36, 37, 73

Index
196
Drive Size ...................................................................... 30 engine speed source ............................................152, 153
drive supply voltage ................................................. 46, 67 engine start flt count .................................................... 154
Drive Test ...................................................................... 32 engine warm up delay ................................................. 153
drive type ....................................................................... 71 Enhanced Oil Production....................................... 51, 166
Drv/Motor Menu ............................................................. 51 Enter Key ................................................................ 25, 26
dsv brownout ................................................................. 76 enumerated parameters ................................................ 32
dsv bus correction.......................................................... 76 Enumerated Parameters ............................................... 42
dsv deadtime percent..................................................... 76 eop casing max prs ..................................................... 159
dsv ki err d ..................................................................... 75 eop casing max temp .................................................. 159
dsv ki err q ..................................................................... 75 eop casing min prs ...................................................... 159
dsv kp cmd d ................................................................. 75 eop casing min temp ................................................... 159
dsv kp cmd pct d ............................................................ 75 eop casing prs...................................... 158, 159, 160, 161
dsv kp cmd pct q ............................................................ 75 eop casing temp .......................................................... 159
dsv kp cmd q ................................................................. 75 EOP controller............................................................... 51
dsv kp fbk d ............................................................. 75, 76 eop critical prs ............................................................. 158
dsv kp fbk q ............................................................. 75, 76 eop gas flow resistance ............................................... 158
dsv kv percent ............................................................... 74 eop gas in resistance ...........................................157, 158
dsv L linking ................................................................... 74 eop gas max flow .................................................157, 158
dsv Ld ............................................................................ 75 eop gas max prs...................................................157, 158
dsv Lq ............................................................................ 75 eop gas out resistance .........................................157, 158
dsv mod index max ........................................................ 74 eop GFL over pump .............................................157, 158
dsv sync frame limit ....................................................... 76 eop match counter ...................................................... 160
dsv synchronized ........................................................... 74 eop max 1 ................................................................... 160
dsv v boost .................................................................... 76 eop max 2 ................................................................... 160
dsv vbus cutoff............................................................... 76 eop max 3 ................................................................... 160
dsv vbus filter................................................................. 76 eop max 4 ................................................................... 160
dsv wn d ........................................................................ 75 eop max 5 ................................................................... 160
dsv wn q ........................................................................ 75 eop max 6 ................................................................... 160
Dual Speed Mode .......................................................... 14 EOP Menu .................................................................... 51
dwell end event ............................................................ 190 eop min 1 .................................................................... 160
dwell event................................................................... 190 eop min 2 .................................................................... 160
DynaCards..................................................................... 39 eop min 3 .................................................................... 160
dynamic brake limit fault .............................................. 181 eop min 4 .................................................................... 160
Dynamic Braking.................................................. 181, 192 eop min 5 .................................................................... 160
ecu DAC max .............................................................. 153 eop min 6 .................................................................... 160
ecu DAC max rpm ............................................... 153, 154 eop miss counter ......................................................... 161
ecu DAC min ............................................................... 153 eop mode ........ 51, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 163, 164, 165
ecu DAC min rpm ................................................ 153, 154 eop pause start ........................................................... 159
ecu diagnostic.............................................................. 152 eop pause timer .......................................................... 159
ecu flt input .................................................................. 152 eop phase 0 time......................................................... 158
editing parameter values................................................ 32 eop phase 0 timer ....................................................... 158
ehalt fault ..................................................................... 186 eop phase 1 timer ....................................................... 159
Encoder Interface Module .............................................. 12 eop phase 2 timer ....................................................... 159
eng fault restart delay .................................................. 155 eop powerup mode ..................................................... 157
engine control unit ....................................................... 152 eop sample rate .......................................................... 158
engine fuel save........................................................... 154 eop select ................................................................... 158
engine keypad spd....................................................... 153 eop sim prs .......................................... 157, 158, 161, 163
engine maint alarm ...................................................... 155 eop sim prs buildup ..............................................158, 161
engine maint hours ...................................................... 155 eop sim prs release ..............................................158, 161
ENGINE MAINT REQUIRED ............................... 155, 156 eop sim valve open ...................................... 158, 161, 163
engine run hours .......................................................... 155 eop state ...................................... 157, 158, 159, 160, 161
engine speed ramp ...................................................... 153 eop status ............................................................158, 159
engine speed req ......................................................... 154 eop tubing max prs...................................................... 159

Index
197
eop tubing max temp ................................................... 159 fill simulation mode...................................................... 171
eop tubing min prs ....................................................... 159 firmware error fault ...................................................... 184
eop tubing min temp .................................................... 159 flashing display ............................................................. 31
eop tubing prs ...................................................... 159, 161 fluid density ..........................................................137, 157
eop tubing temp ........................................................... 159 fluid fill monitor .....................................................189, 190
eop valve max ..............................161, 162, 163, 164, 165 fluid flow estimate........................................................ 138
eop valve min ...............................161, 162, 163, 164, 165 fluid flow fault .............................................................. 187
EOP/Valve Menu ......................................................... 157 fluid flow fault time......................................................... 88
EOP™ Controller ................................... 51, 162, 164, 166 fluid flow max ................................................................ 87
ESP Gauge Display ....................................... 31, 189, 190 fluid flow max fault......................................................... 88
ESP Main Display .......................................................... 31 fluid flow max volts ........................................................ 88
ESP Protocol ................................................................. 17 fluid flow max warning ................................................... 88
ESP Quick Data Entry.................................................... 31 fluid flow min ................................................................. 87
Event History ......................................................... 33, 179 fluid flow min fault.......................................................... 88
Event Masks .................................................................. 33 fluid flow min volts ......................................................... 88
Event Masks, clear ........................................................ 25 fluid flow monitor ..............................................44, 88, 134
Event Masks, set ......................................... 25, 63, 64, 65 fluid flow restart delay.................................................... 89
Event Masks, viewing .................................................. 180 fluid flow rtu word .......................................................... 88
external restart override ................................................. 51 fluid flow source86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 92, 103, 104, 114, 115,
external speed ......................................................... 53, 82 187
external stop fault ........................................................ 187 fluid flow units ....................................................... 42, 169
external stop input ....................................................... 112 fluid flow value ...................................................... 88, 187
external stop restart delay ............................................ 113 fluid level calibrate....................................................... 147
external stop restart override ............................... 112, 113 fluid level cmd ............................................................... 53
external trip fault .......................................................... 181 fluid level controller ....................................................... 51
fast overcurrent fault .................................................... 181 fluid level floor ............................................................... 53
Fault .................................................................. 25, 31, 36 fluid level monitor ........................................... 44, 138, 147
Fault and Warning History ..................................... 33, 179 fluid level rate ................................................................ 53
Fault Conditions, viewing ............................................. 180 fluid over pump est ...................................................... 144
Fault Display .................................................................. 31 fluid over pump estimate ............................................. 138
Fault Masks ................................................................... 33 fluid over pump monitor ............................ 44, 55, 138, 147
Fault Masks, auto .... 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, fluid over pump setpt ..................................................... 53
95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 105, 155 fluid production meter .............................................. 44, 45
Fault Masks, clear.......................................................... 25 fluid properties .....................................................137, 144
Fault Masks, set........................................... 25, 63, 64, 65 fluid salinity ................................................................. 137
Fault Masks, viewing ................................................... 180 fluid temp fault time ....................................................... 94
Fault Menu............................................................. 33, 179 fluid temp max ............................................................... 93
fault reset input ............................................................ 116 fluid temp max fault ....................................................... 94
FAULT RESTART.......................................................... 43 fluid temp max volts ...................................................... 93
fault restart delay ............................................... 48, 51, 62 fluid temp max warning ................................................. 94
Fault, clearing .......................................................... 43, 51 fluid temp min................................................................ 93
Fault/Event Menu..................................... 51, 62, 189, 191 fluid temp min fault ........................................................ 94
FAULTED ...................................................................... 43 fluid temp min volts ....................................................... 93
fbk circuit breaker fault ................................................. 184 fluid temp min warning .................................................. 94
Feature List Menu .......................................................... 51 fluid temp restart delay .................................................. 94
feedback transducers....................................... 36, 73, 171 fluid temp rtu word......................................................... 93
Feedback Utility ............................................................. 36 fluid temp source ..............................................93, 94, 137
field current ............................................................ 69, 177 fluid temp value ............................................................. 93
field current loss fault ................................................... 184 fluid temperature ................................................... 93, 137
field weakening .............................................................. 51 fluid viscosity ............................................................... 137
file disk manager.......................................................... 175 flux vel amplitude .......................................................... 78
file disk state ................................................................ 175 flux vel enable ............................................................... 78
fill pot source ............................................................... 171 flux vel error limit ........................................................... 78

Index
198
flux vel estimate ............................................................. 78 Gauge Menu ............................................................... 167
flux vel phase err ........................................................... 78 gauge oil production .................................................... 167
flux vel phase tol ............................................................ 78 gauge oil production accum......................................... 167
flux vel sample int .......................................................... 78 gauge POC count.................................................189, 190
flux vel threshold ............................................................ 78 gauge power meter ..................................................... 167
flux vel upid delay .......................................................... 78 gauge power meter accum .......................................... 168
foldback i freq ................................................................ 78 gauge run time ............................................. 167, 189, 190
foldback i ki .................................................................... 78 gauge run time accum ................................................. 167
foldback i kp................................................................... 78 gauge strokes accum .................................................. 168
foldback i state............................................................... 78 gauge time ..................................... 31, 131, 167, 189, 190
foldback i uld.................................................................. 78 gauge troubleshooter .................................................. 168
follow marker fault........................................................ 183 gauge water production ............................................... 167
follow pg loss a fault .................................................... 182 gauge water production accum ................................... 168
follow pg loss b fault .................................................... 182 Gauged Statistics ..................................... 13, 31, 189, 190
follow pg loss m fault ................................................... 182 Gauging Data ..................................... 14, 48, 71, 167, 168
Fuel Save Mode........................................................... 154 Gauging, Well Statistics ................................................ 13
Function Key............................................................ 25, 31 gearbox efficiency ....................................................... 134
fweak id limit .................................................................. 77 Gearbox Torque Limiter ................................................ 51
fweak vdse ki ................................................................. 77 GEN FAULT .................................................................. 43
fweak vdse pct ............................................................... 77 GEN START ................................................................. 43
fweak vel factor.............................................................. 77 Generator ................................................. 43, 78, 155, 156
fweak vsmax ki .............................................................. 77 generator control .......................... 152, 153, 154, 155, 156
fweak vsmax kp ............................................................. 77 generator max pwr ...................................................... 152
gas fill monitor ..................................................... 189, 190 Generator Menu .......................................................... 152
gas flow fault................................................................ 187 generator pwr gain ...................................................... 152
gas flow fault time .......................................................... 90 generator state ............................................................ 152
gas flow max.................................................................. 89 generator troubleshooter .............................. 155, 156, 166
gas flow max fault .......................................................... 89 GLCD Display ......................................................... 24, 25
gas flow max volts ......................................................... 89 GLCD Display Menu Navigation .............................. 28, 31
gas flow max warning .............................................. 89, 90 Global Dictionary ..................................................... 36, 38
gas flow min................................................................... 89 GMC® Menu ............................................................... 175
gas flow min fault ........................................................... 89 GPL™ System ......................................... 43, 78, 152, 155
gas flow min volts .......................................................... 89 Graph Display ............................................................... 39
gas flow monitor....................................................... 44, 89 Graphics Display ........................................................... 12
gas flow restart delay ..................................................... 90 hand enable input.......................................................... 43
gas flow rtu word............................................................ 89 Hand Mode ......................................................14, 19, 190
gas flow source...........................44, 89, 90, 167, 168, 187 HAND RUN ................................................................... 43
gas flow units ......................................................... 42, 169 hand speed source.............................................47, 52, 82
gas flow value ........................................................ 89, 187 Hardware Requirements ............................................... 12
Gas Powered Lift ................................................... 78, 155 hdw faults 0 ..........................................................189, 190
gas production meter ............................................... 44, 45 heat sink thermal switch fault ...................................... 181
gate driver dsat fault .................................................... 181 Help Display ............................................................ 36, 38
gauge avg fill ....................................................... 189, 190 Help Utilities .................................................................. 36
gauge avg spm ............................................................ 189 Help Utility ..................................................................... 31
gauge energy consumption .......................... 167, 189, 190 hertz units .................................................. 42, 47, 76, 169
gauge event ......................................................... 189, 190 hexadecimal parameters ............................................... 32
gauge fluid flow ............................................................ 167 high prs fault ............................................................... 187
gauge fluid production.................................. 167, 189, 190 high prs input .............................................................. 115
gauge fluid production accum ...................................... 167 high prs restart delay ................................................... 115
gauge gas production .................................................. 167 high prs time ............................................................... 115
gauge gas production accum ....................................... 168 high rod load fault.......................................................... 62
gauge leakage ............................................. 167, 189, 190 high speed fault .......................................... 49, 62, 64, 191
gauge leakage accum .................................................. 167 high speed fault time ............................................... 49, 64

Index
199
high speed mask............................................................ 49 keypad pos units ......................................................... 169
high speed mask............................................................ 64 keypad protocol ........................................................... 120
high speed mask............................................................ 64 keypad speed.....................................................47, 52, 82
high speed mask............................................................ 64 keypad stop bits .......................................................... 120
high speed mask............................................................ 64 keypad term type......................................................... 120
high speed mask.......................................................... 191 keypad units ...................................................42, 169, 174
high speed mask.......................................................... 191 keypad vel units .......................................................... 169
high speed restart delay........................................... 49, 64 LCD Display .................................................................. 24
high torq fault ........................................................... 62, 64 LCD Display Menu Navigation................................. 27, 31
high torq fault time ......................................................... 64 leakage fault time .......................................................... 98
high torq mask ....................................................... 64, 189 leakage max.................................................................. 97
high torq restart delay .................................................... 64 leakage max fault .......................................................... 98
high torque fault ........................................................... 189 leakage max volts ......................................................... 98
HS thermal switch fault ................................................ 181 leakage max warning .................................................... 98
I/O Utility ........................................................................ 36 leakage min................................................................... 97
identification error fault........................................... 36, 185 leakage min fault ........................................................... 98
Imperial Units................................................................. 42 leakage min volts .......................................................... 98
Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) ................ 137, 138 leakage min warning ..................................................... 98
input power meter ............................................ 44, 45, 150 leakage monitor........................................................... 134
input power monitor ............................................... 45, 150 leakage restart delay ..................................................... 98
intake prs calibrate....................................................... 147 leakage rtu word...............................................98, 99, 100
intake prs cmd ............................................................... 54 leakage Sigma Ls........................................................ 177
intake prs controller ....................................................... 51 leakage source........................................... 97, 98, 99, 100
intake prs fault ............................................................. 188 leakage value ................................................................ 98
intake prs fault time........................................................ 91 level 1 password ......40, 43, 46, 51, 52, 62, 157, 167, 169,
intake prs max ............................................................... 90 174, 175
intake prs max fault........................................................ 91 level 2 password .... 40, 57, 67, 71, 82, 107, 111, 118, 133,
137, 139, 150
intake prs max volts ....................................................... 90
level 3 password ...................................... 41, 73, 131, 171
intake prs max warning .................................................. 91
level pip est controller.................................................... 51
intake prs min ................................................................ 90
level test fop Echo ....................................................... 144
intake prs min fault......................................................... 91
level test fop est ...................................................144, 145
intake prs min volts ........................................................ 90
level test so head ........................................................ 145
intake prs min warning ................................................... 91
level test so speed ...................................................... 145
intake prs rate ................................................................ 54
level units .................................................................... 169
intake prs restart delay................................................... 91
lift ave efficiency .................................................... 45, 150
intake prs rtu word ......................................................... 90
lift efficiency .......................................................... 45, 150
intake prs setpt .............................................................. 54
lift power monitor ......................................................... 150
intake prs source ............................................. 90, 91, 188
Linear Rod Pump .......................................................... 43
intake prs value ..................................................... 90, 188
load fbk loss fault ........................................................ 183
inverter power .............................................................. 156
load marker fault ......................................................... 183
inverter rms fault .......................................................... 184
load pg loss a fault ...................................................... 182
IPR Chart....................................................................... 39
load pg loss b fault ...................................................... 182
IPR Curve Graph ................................................. 137, 138
load pg loss m fault ..................................................... 182
IPR flow monitor .......................................................... 138
Load Resistor .......................................................... 20, 21
IPR max flow perf ........................................................ 138
load runaway fault ....................................................... 183
IPR max flow pump...................................................... 138
lockout status ........................................... 41, 66, 170, 189
IPR prs monitor............................................................ 138
lockout time ........................................................... 41, 189
ireg shutoff fault ........................................................... 181
Logic Common ............................................. 19, 21, 22, 23
kaypad term size.......................................................... 120
low prs flow delay .....86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 92, 103, 104, 114,
Keypad ........................................................ 24, 25, 26, 31 115
keypad address ........................................................... 120 low prs flow fault.......................................................... 187
keypad baud rate ......................................................... 120 low prs flow input......................................................... 114
keypad parity ............................................................... 120 low prs flow restart delay ............................................. 115

Index
200
low prs flow time .......................................................... 115 Mapping Data Items ...................................................... 38
low pump load fault ...................................................... 191 Masks ........................................................................... 33
low pump load mask .................................................... 191 Mass Data Storage Module ................................... 12, 175
low rod load fault............................................................ 62 MAX FAULT .................................................................. 43
low rod load mask .................................................. 64, 191 max fault event ............................................................ 189
low speed fault........................................... 49, 62, 63, 189 Max Stream Module ...................................................... 12
low speed fault time ................................................. 49, 63 maximum current ....................................... 48, 57, 68, 184
low speed mask ............................................................. 49 MaxStream Module™.................................................... 17
low speed mask ............................................................. 63 memory ............................................................33, 35, 184
low speed mask ............................................................. 63 Menu Navigation .......................................... 25, 26, 30, 31
low speed mask ............................................................. 63 menu visibility..... 12, 32, 42, 45, 47, 50, 51, 55, 61, 66, 70,
low speed mask ............................................................. 64 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97,
98, 99, 101, 102, 103, 104, 106, 110, 117, 118, 119,
low speed mask ........................................................... 189 120, 121, 129, 132, 135, 137, 138, 149, 151, 154, 156,
low speed mask ........................................................... 189 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 173
low speed mask ........................................................... 189 Menus ........................................................................... 42
low speed restart delay ............................................ 49, 64 Metric Units ................................................................... 42
low torq fault .................................................................. 64 min start freq time ......................................................... 77
low torq fault time........................................................... 64 min start frequency........................................................ 77
low torq mask ................................................................ 64 Minus Sign Key ............................................................. 25
low torq restart delay ..................................................... 64 modbus comm error event........................................... 191
low voltage supply fault ................................................ 181 Modbus Master Protocol 17, 83, 84, 85, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91,
lrp hi load fault ............................................................. 190 93, 94, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105
lrp low load fault ........................................................... 191 Modbus RTU ................................................................. 17
LRP™ System ............................................................... 43 modbus status............................................................. 191
lt accel time.................................................................. 144 modulation index ................................................... 74, 132
lt begin casing prs ........................................................ 145 modulation select ........................... 47, 74, 75, 76, 77, 132
lt begin prs ................................................................... 145 modulation state ............................................................ 74
lt begin speed .............................................................. 145 month end ..................................................................... 60
lt begin torque .............................................................. 145 month start .................................................................... 60
lt begin tubing prs ........................................................ 145 motor avg power monitor....................................... 45, 150
lt decel time ................................................................. 144 motor blower off fault ................................................... 186
lt delay ......................................................................... 144 motor current................................................ 48, 57, 68, 78
lt diffl prs ...................................................................... 144 motor current monitor .................................................. 132
lt endpoint .................................................................... 144 motor fbk invert ............................................................. 73
lt fop estimate .............................................................. 145 motor fbk size ........................................................ 73, 171
lt fop offset ................................................................... 144 motor feedback loss fault ............................................ 183
lt min speed ................................................................. 144 motor leads ................................................................... 73
lt mode......................................................................... 144 motor marker fault ....................................................... 183
lt offset ......................................................................... 145 motor max power ........................................... 69, 172, 177
lt period........................................................................ 145 motor max rpm ...................................................... 78, 146
lt prs ............................................................................ 145 motor max torque ........................................... 69, 172, 177
lt shut off head ............................................................. 146 Motor Menu ................................................................... 67
lt shut off prs ................................................................ 146 MOTOR OFF ................................................................ 43
lt shut off spd ............................................................... 146 motor overload curr ................................................. 49, 63
lt shut off torque ........................................................... 146 motor pg loss a fault .................................................... 182
lt start spd offset .......................................................... 145 motor pg loss b fault .................................................... 182
lt state .......................................................................... 145 motor pg loss m fault ................................................... 182
lt test speed ................................................................. 144 motor power limit ..............................................14, 51, 150
lt timer.......................................................................... 145 Motor Power Limiter ...................................................... 14
lt torque floor................................................................ 145 motor power monitor ................................................... 132
lt use diffl prs ............................................................... 145 motor rated current........................................................ 69
machine inertia ............................................................ 134 motor rms ewarn fault.................................................. 185
maintenance bypass ...................................................... 62 motor rms limit ............................................................ 183

Index
201
motor rms limit fault ..................................................... 183 mtr voltage monitor ............................................44, 69, 70
motor rpm .............................................................. 58, 132 negative torq fault.................................................... 64, 65
motor rtd power ........................................................... 177 negative torq fault time .................................................. 65
motor rtd torque ..................................................... 69, 177 negative torq mask ................................................ 65, 189
motor runaway fault ..................................................... 183 negative torq restart delay ............................................. 65
motor temp fault time ............................................. 95, 155 negative torque fault .................................................... 189
motor temp max ..................................................... 94, 154 Network Map ................................................................. 38
motor temp max fault ............................................. 95, 155 NO AUTO SPEED OUTPUT ....................................... 156
motor temp max volts............................................. 94, 155 NO DAC SPD OUTPUT .............................................. 156
motor temp max warning ....................................... 95, 155 NO ECU FAULTED INPUT ......................................... 156
motor temp min ...................................................... 94, 154 NO ECU POWER OUTPUT ........................................ 156
motor temp min fault ...................................................... 95 NO ENG RUN ENABLE OUTPUT ............................... 156
motor temp min volts ............................................. 94, 155 NO ENGINE RUNNING INPUT ................................... 156
motor temp min warning ................................................ 95 non volatile mem fault ................................................. 184
motor temp restart delay ................................................ 95 non-volatile memory .........................................33, 35, 184
motor temp rtu word....................................................... 94 Number Keys .......................................................... 25, 26
motor temp source ................................... 94, 95, 154, 155 numeric parameters ...................................................... 32
motor temp value ................................................... 95, 155 NVMEM ...........................................................33, 35, 184
motor thermal switch fault ............................................ 186 obsync data error fault................................................. 185
motor troubleshooter...................................................... 70 obsync receive fault .................................................... 185
motor tuning (AC Test Utility) ............. 32, 33, 69, 172, 176 oil API gravity .............................................................. 137
motor voltage monitor .................................................. 132 oil flow monitor .............................................................. 44
Motoring Power Controller ........................................... 150 oil gravity..............................................................137, 157
mtr a current .................................................................. 69 oil production meter................................................. 44, 45
mtr ab voltage .......................................................... 69, 70 Operational Modes ........................................................ 14
mtr b current .................................................................. 69 Operator Interface ......................................................... 24
mtr bc voltage .......................................................... 69, 70 Operator Menu .............................................................. 43
mtr c current .................................................................. 69 OPTIMIZE ................................................................... 153
mtr current monitor ............................................ 44, 69, 70 optimize state .......................................................189, 190
mtr freq monitor ......................................... 43, 55, 69, 132 Optimizer ...................................................................... 51
mtr inductance ............................................................... 69 Optimizer Menu ............................................................. 51
mtr max rpm .................................................................. 69 optomux timeout fault .................................................. 184
mtr nameplate current .............................................. 46, 67 output phase loss fault ................................................ 184
mtr nameplate frequency ......................................... 46, 67 output power monitor................................................... 150
mtr nameplate power ............................................... 46, 67 overall gear ratio ..............................................44, 47, 134
mtr nameplate rpm................................................... 46, 67 overrun fault ................................................................ 183
mtr nameplate voltage ............................................. 46, 67 overspeed trip fault...................................................... 184
mtr ovld fault ............................................................ 49, 63 Parallel Inputs ............................................................... 36
mtr ovld fault time .................................................... 49, 63 Parallel Outputs............................................................. 36
mtr ovld mask .......................................................... 49, 63 Parameter Entry ...................................................... 25, 26
mtr ovld restart delay ............................................... 49, 63 Parameter Unit Selection .............................................. 12
mtr poles.................................................................. 46, 69 Parameter Visibility ..31, 42, 51, 55, 61, 63, 64, 65, 66, 70,
mtr power monitor .................................................... 44, 70 72, 80, 106, 110, 117, 129, 135, 138, 149, 151, 156,
166, 170
mtr rms limit ................................................................... 46
parameters .................................................................... 31
mtr rtd current .......................................................... 46, 67
Parameters ................................................................... 42
mtr rtd frequency...................................................... 46, 67
password event ........................................................... 189
mtr rtd power ........................................................... 46, 67
Password Protection ............................ 39, 40, 41, 42, 189
mtr rtd rpm ............................................................... 46, 67
pe collision fault........................................................... 190
mtr rtd voltage.......................................................... 46, 67
percent motor torque ..................................................... 44
mtr uld fault .............................................................. 49, 63
Phase Loss Detection .............................. 79, 80, 132, 186
mtr uld fault time ...................................................... 49, 63
phasing ....................................................................... 177
mtr uld mask ............................................................ 48, 63
PID controller ................................................................ 51
mtr uld restart delay ................................................. 49, 63

Index
202
PID kd............................................................................ 53 power up event ....................................................181, 189
PID ki ............................................................................. 53 power up time ..................................................49, 61, 117
PID kp............................................................................ 53 Power Usage ................................... 44, 45, 150, 167, 168
Pin-Outs .................................................................. 18, 19 Power, Phase Loss Detection .................. 79, 80, 132, 186
PIO Utility ...................................................................... 36 Power-Up Display ......................................................... 30
pl filtered current ............................................................ 79 powerup restart delay .........................................43, 48, 62
pl rip current................................................................... 79 Power-up Restarts ........................................................ 43
pl trip current.................................................................. 80 pressure units ....................................................... 42, 169
pmx field 1 ..................................................................... 68 Protocol......................................................................... 17
pmx field 2 ..................................................................... 68 pstandby event ............................................................ 189
pmx field 3 ..................................................................... 68 Pull-up Resistors ........................................................... 17
pmx field 4 ..................................................................... 68 pump average spm ...................................... 189, 190, 191
pmx start delay .............................................................. 68 pump base flow ........................................................... 133
POC Controller .............................................. 43, 189, 190 pump base head ......................................................... 144
POC dwell spm ............................................................ 190 pump base speed.................................................133, 144
POC off time ................................................................ 189 pump depth ................................................ 43, 47, 52, 132
Port A ...................................................................... 19, 38 pump differential prs .............................................138, 147
Port A Units ................................................................... 42 pump discharge pressure ...................................... 92, 134
Port B ............................................................................ 19 pump discharge prs ..................................................... 138
Port B Units ................................................................... 42 pump displacement ..................................................... 134
porta address............................................................... 118 pump dwell time ............................................................ 43
porta baud rate ............................................................ 119 pump end point flow .................................................... 133
porta parity................................................................... 119 pump end point head................................................... 133
porta pos units ............................................................. 119 Pump Fill Menu ............................................................. 51
porta protocol................ 118, 119, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125 pump fill monitor ...................................................189, 190
porta rtu gap ................................................................ 119 pump flow monitor ......................................................... 13
porta rtu slave timeout ................................................. 119 pump intake depth................................ 133, 144, 157, 158
porta stop bits .............................................................. 119 pump intake pressure ............................................ 54, 134
porta term size ............................................................. 118 pump intake prs................................................54, 90, 138
porta term type ............................................................ 118 pump length ................................................................ 133
porta units .............................................................. 42, 119 pump max speed........................................ 46, 52, 67, 146
porta vel units .............................................................. 119 Pump Menu................................................................. 133
portb address............................................................... 119 pump mid point flow .................................................... 133
portb baud rate ............................................................ 119 pump mid point head ................................................... 133
portb parity................................................................... 119 pump min speed......................................... 46, 52, 67, 146
portb pos units ............................................................. 120 PUMP OFF WAIT.......................................................... 43
portb protocol................ 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125 pump pressure units .................................................... 169
portb rtu gap ................................................................ 120 pump rated lift ............................................................. 133
portb rtu slave timeout ................................................. 120 pump rotation counter ........................................... 45, 134
portb stop bits .............................................................. 119 Pump Speed Chart........................................................ 39
portb term size ............................................................. 119 Pump Speed Menu ................................................. 51, 52
portb term type ............................................................ 119 pump speed monitor ........................................43, 55, 173
portb units .............................................................. 42, 120 pump speed source................................................. 43, 52
portb vel units .............................................................. 120 pump speeed troubleshooter ......................................... 55
pos error ewarn fault .................................................... 185 pump spm monitor ...............................................189, 191
position units................................................................ 126 pump start counter ........................................................ 45
power limiter .................................................................. 51 pump static torque....................................................... 133
Power Limiter........................................................... 13, 51 pump stop control.................................................... 48, 57
power limiting......................................... 51, 150, 151, 181 pump stroke counter ..................................................... 45
Power Menu .......................................................... 51, 150 pump torq offset .......................................................... 147
power off date .............................................................. 189 pump torque at rated lift .............................................. 133
power off time .............................................................. 189 pump torque constant.................................................. 134
power troubleshooter ................................................... 151 pump torque monitor ............................................. 44, 134

Index
203
pump troubleshooter ...... 45, 50, 51, 55, 61, 66, 70, 72, 80, rod torque monitor ................................................. 44, 134
106, 110, 117, 129, 134, 135, 138, 147, 151, 173 Rod Velocity Chart ........................................................ 39
Pump Velocity Chart ...................................................... 39 rotaflex restart override ................................................. 51
pump viscous torq........................................................ 133 RTC takeoverfault ....................................................... 184
pump viscous torq2...................................................... 134 rtu error action............................................................. 123
pumper visit code......................................................... 185 rtu master error count .................................................. 122
pumper visit event........................................................ 185 rtu master fault time .................................................... 122
Pump-Off Controller (POC) ............................ 43, 189, 190 rtu master mask .......................................................... 122
quick menu item 2........................................................ 170 rtu master poll rate ..................................................... 158
Quick Start Menu ........................................................... 46 rtu master poll rate ...................................................... 122
Quit Key................................................................... 25, 26 RTU Master Protocol 83, 84, 85, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 93, 94,
Recalling Parameter Values........................................... 35 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, 105
Receive ......................................................................... 38 rtu master read count .................................................. 125
ref adjust...................................................................... 191 rtu master retries ......................................................... 122
regen power limit ................................................... 51, 151 rtu master status ......................................................... 122
regen power limiting..................................... 150, 181, 192 rtu master timeout ....................................................... 122
Regenerative Power Controller .................................... 151 rtu master value 1 ................................................123, 124
Regenerative Power Limiter ......................... 150, 181, 192 rtu master value 2 ....................................................... 124
remote event................................................................ 190 rtu master value 3 ....................................................... 125
remote fault reset ..................................................... 50, 61 rtu master word 1 .................................................123, 124
Remote Keypad Protocol ............................................... 17 rtu master word 2 ........................................................ 124
Remote Operation ............................................. 43, 50, 61 rtu master word 3 .................................................124, 125
remote run enable...................................... 43, 50, 61, 190 rtu slave fault time ....................................................... 122
REMOTE STOP..................................................... 43, 190 rtu slave mask ............................................................. 122
request speed ................................................................ 55 rtu slave status ............................................................ 125
reservoir flow units ............................................... 137, 169 rtu slave status word 1 ................................................ 123
Reservoir Menu ........................................................... 137 rtu slave status word 2 ................................................ 123
Reservoir Model................................................... 137, 138 rtu slave type........................................................121, 122
reservoir pressure ........................................................ 137 Run Enable ........................................................... 19, 190
reset all meters ................................................ 44, 45, 150 run enable input ......................................... 43, 49, 61, 117
Reset Fault .................................................. 25, 31, 36, 51 run mtr current limit ...................................... 48, 57, 58, 59
Resistor ....................................................... 17, 18, 20, 21 run mtr current time ....................................................... 68
Resolver Interface Module ............................................. 12 run torque limit ........................................................ 57, 68
restart attempts .. 43, 48, 51, 62, 64, 65, 84, 85, 86, 87, 89, run verify time ......................................................... 51, 62
90, 91, 92, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 102, 103, 104, running status ............................................ 19, 31, 43, 152
105, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 154, 155, 189
Safety Information ........................................................... 7
restart counter ......................................................... 43, 62
Screen Saver ............................................. 13, 30, 43, 170
restart delay ................................................................... 51
screen saver delay ...........................................30, 43, 170
RESTART DELAY ......................................................... 43
screen saver safety .................................... 13, 30, 43, 170
restart min delay ................................................ 48, 51, 62
SD RAM Data Disk...................................................... 175
restart time.... 43, 62, 64, 65, 113, 114, 115, 116, 154, 155
SDO optimize event .................................................... 190
restart time select .......................................................... 62
SDO single event ........................................................ 190
restart timer ..................................................... 43, 62, 155
SD-RAM........................................................................ 12
Restoring Parameters .................................................... 35
security breach input ................................................... 116
revision number ....................................................... 45, 71
Security Clearance, password protection .............. 39, 189
RJ-45 Connectors .......................................................... 18
Sensor-Free Control ................................................ 13, 14
rod diameter ................................................................ 134
Serial Communication ...... 8, 14, 17, 19, 38, 118, 119, 120
rod length .................................................................... 134
Serial Communication Connection .......................... 18, 19
rod load monitor ........................................................... 191
Serial Communication Pin-Outs............................... 18, 19
Rod Speed Chart ........................................................... 39
Serial Communication Troubleshooting ......................... 38
rod speed monitor .......................................................... 44
Serial Operation ...................................................... 50, 61
rod torque limit ................................................... 57, 68, 72
Serial Protocols ............................................................. 17
rod torque limit pct ................................................... 57, 68
Set Event Masks .......................................... 25, 63, 64, 65
rod torque max .............................................................. 57

Index
204
Set Fault Masks ........................................... 25, 63, 64, 65 Speed Chart .................................................................. 39
SET GENERATOR MAX POWER ............................... 156 Speed Loop Controller .................................................. 51
Set Warning Masks...................................... 25, 63, 64, 65 speed mode select ......................................... 14, 189, 190
Setup Menu ................................................................... 31 srp motor vel rpm .................................................189, 191
sfw faults 1........................................................... 189, 190 srp troubleshooter .......................................... 12, 168, 170
sfw faults 2........................................................... 189, 190 ssi receive fault ........................................................... 184
sfw faults 3................................................................... 190 Standby State ............................................................... 14
Signal .............................................................. 83, 86, 138 standby sts .................................................................... 43
Signal In menu................................................... 21, 22, 23 start current time ................................................48, 57, 68
Signal In Menu......................................... 23, 82, 187, 188 start event ................................................................... 189
signal in troubleshooter ................................................ 106 start limits ...................................................................... 51
Signal Out Menu .................................................... 23, 107 start limits mode ..................................... 48, 57, 58, 67, 68
Signals............................................. 12, 51, 108, 109, 110 start mtr current limit..................................... 48, 57, 58, 68
sim calc system gain.................................................... 172 start speed ............................................. 48, 53, 57, 58, 68
sim drive motor max power .......................................... 172 start time ................................................ 48, 53, 57, 58, 68
sim drive motor max torque.......................................... 172 start torque limit..................................................57, 58, 68
sim drive rated power................................................... 172 starting fault delay ......................................................... 62
sim drive rating ............................................................ 172 Statistics ........................................................31, 189, 190
sim drive size ............................................................... 172 stator resistance RS .............................................. 69, 177
sim gas flow ................................................................. 172 step down xfmr input ................................................... 113
sim gas flow casing...................................................... 172 step down xfmr restart delay ....................................... 113
sim gas separation eff .................................................. 172 step down xfmr time .................................................... 113
sim Reservoir State ..................................................... 173 step up xfmr input.................................................113, 114
sim well inflow rate....................................................... 173 step up xfmr restart delay .....................................113, 114
sim well outflow rate .................................................... 173 step up xfmr time..................................................113, 114
simulate drive ................................................ 73, 171, 172 stop event ................................................................... 189
simulate drive load ....................................................... 171 Storing Parameter Values ............................................. 35
Simulate Menu............................................................. 171 surface filter ................................................................ 134
simulate mode .............. 158, 161, 163, 164, 171, 172, 173 switch freq mode ........................................................... 74
simulated fluid fill ......................................................... 171 switch frequency ................................................... 74, 192
simulated fluid over pump ............................................ 171 switch frequency, Table of ........................................... 192
Single Speed Mode ....................................................... 14 sync data error fault .................................................... 184
skip freq band 1 ............................................................. 54 sync receive fault ........................................................ 184
skip freq band 2 ............................................................. 54 System Controllers ........................................................ 14
skip freq band 3 ............................................................. 54 system filter ................................................................. 147
skip freq band 4 ............................................................. 54 system gain ......................................................32, 72, 172
skip freq band 5 ............................................................. 54 System ID Test ........................................ 32, 72, 172, 178
skip freq cntrl ................................................................. 54 System Monitor Utility, UEdit® ...................................... 13
skip freq controller ......................................................... 51 System Monitors ........................................................... 13
skip frequency 1............................................................. 54 system tuning ........................................... 32, 72, 172, 178
skip frequency 2............................................................. 54 system wn ............................................................. 72, 172
skip frequency 3............................................................. 54 tank level fault time ..................................................... 105
skip frequency 4............................................................. 54 tank level max ............................................................. 104
skip frequency 51........................................................... 54 tank level max fault ..................................................... 105
slave status raw 1 ........................................................ 123 tank level max volts ..................................................... 104
slave status raw 2 ........................................................ 123 tank level max warning ................................................ 105
slave status word 1 ...................................................... 123 tank level min .............................................................. 104
slave status word 2 ...................................................... 123 tank level min fault ...................................................... 105
slip frequency ...................................................... 172, 177 tank level min volts ...................................................... 104
slippage, fluid............................................................... 167 tank level min warning ................................................. 105
software number ...................................................... 45, 71 tank level restart delay ................................................ 105
spacer count ................................................................ 134 tank level rtu word ....................................................... 104
spacer diameter ........................................................... 134 tank level source ..................................................104, 105

Index
205
tank level value ............................................................ 105 tubing prs max .............................................................. 85
tank lvl input......................................................... 115, 154 tubing prs max fault ....................................................... 86
tank lvl restart delay ............................................. 115, 154 tubing prs max volts ...................................................... 85
tank lvl time.................................................................. 115 tubing prs max warning ................................................. 86
temp 1 fault .................................................................. 188 tubing prs min ............................................................... 85
temp 1 source .............................................................. 188 tubing prs min fault ........................................................ 86
temp 1 value ................................................................ 188 tubing prs min volts ....................................................... 85
temp 2 fault .................................................................. 188 tubing prs restart delay .................................................. 86
temp 2 source .............................................................. 188 tubing prs rtu word ........................................................ 85
temp 2 value ................................................................ 188 tubing prs source 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 92, 103, 104, 114,
Terminal Block (TB1) ..... 19, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 115, 138, 188
154 tubing prs source......................................................... 166
Terminal Block (TB2)20, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, tubing prs source......................................................... 166
93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104, tubing prs value .............................. 85, 159, 161, 166, 188
154, 155
tubing temp fault.......................................................... 188
Terminal Block Location........................................... 16, 17
tubing temp fault time .................................................... 87
Terminating Resistors .................................................... 17
tubing temp max............................................................ 86
thermal protection .......................................................... 74
tubing temp max fault .................................................... 87
thermal switch ewarn fault ........................................... 185
tubing temp max volts ................................................... 86
time of use limit ...................................... 14, 43, 51, 59, 60
tubing temp max warning .............................................. 87
Time, setting of .............................37, 59, 60, 61, 169, 175
tubing temp min............................................................. 86
Timer Controller ..................................... 14, 43, 51, 60, 61
tubing temp min fault ..................................................... 87
timer mode................................................... 14, 43, 51, 60
tubing temp min volts .................................................... 86
timer mode restart.......................................................... 60
tubing temp restart delay ............................................... 87
timer off time ............................................................ 43, 60
tubing temp rtu word ..................................................... 87
timer off timer................................................................. 60
tubing temp source...........................................86, 87, 188
timer on time .................................................................. 60
tubing temp value .................................................. 87, 188
timer on timer................................................................. 60
tubing type .................................................................. 133
TIMER WAIT ................................................................. 43
UCR files, Chart Recorder Utility, UEdit® ...................... 13
torq reg select .......................................................... 75, 76
UDH files, Data Sampler History, UEdit® ...................... 13
Torque Chart ................................................................. 39
UDM files, Data Sampler Manager, UEdit® ................... 13
torque limit ..................................................................... 57
UDT files, Application Project File, UEdit® .................... 13
torque reg error fault .................................................... 184
UEdit fault ................................................................... 184
torque reg ki................................................................... 79
UEdit® ........................................... 13, 32, 35, 36, 38, 158
torque reg kp cmd pct .................................................... 79
UEdit® Utility ................................................................. 38
torque reg kp fbk ............................................................ 79
Unit Selection ................................................................ 12
torque reg select ............................................................ 79
Units ............................................................................. 42
torque reg wn................................................................. 79
Units, console port ........................................................ 42
Torque Regulator ................................................... 79, 184
Units, keypad ................................................................ 42
transducerless feedback .................................. 36, 73, 171
Units, port A .................................................................. 42
transit time rtu word ..................................................... 105
Units, port B .................................................................. 42
transit time source ....................................................... 105
Units, UEdit® Software.................................................. 42
transit time value.......................................................... 105
Units, user ..................................................................... 42
Transmit ........................................................................ 38
unknown fbk module fault ............................................ 184
treg iqreg tuning............................................................. 79
Up Down Key .......................................................... 25, 26
Troubleshooter .............................................................. 12
upid load source .................................................... 73, 171
tubing fluid density ............................................... 137, 144
upid motor source ................................................. 73, 171
tubing inner diameter ................................................... 133
upid multiple ............................................................ 37, 73
tubing length ................................................................ 133
UPLOAD ....................................................................... 34
tubing outer diameter ................................... 133, 157, 158
user 1 fault .................................................................. 187
tubing pressure source ................................................ 166
user 1 fault input.......................................................... 115
tubing prs............................................................... 86, 138
user 1 fault restart delay .............................................. 116
tubing prs fault ............................................................. 188
user 1 fault time........................................................... 115
tubing prs fault time ....................................................... 86

Index
206
user 2 fault ................................................................... 187 user event1 5 ................................................................ 65
user 2 fault input .......................................................... 116 user event1 6 ................................................................ 65
user 2 fault restart delay .............................................. 116 user event1 7 ................................................................ 65
user 2 fault time ........................................................... 116 user event1 8 ................................................................ 65
user 3 fault ................................................................... 187 user event1 items .......................................................... 65
user 3 fault input .......................................................... 116 user event1 time............................................................ 65
user 3 fault restart delay .............................................. 116 user event2 1 ................................................................ 65
user 3 fault time ........................................................... 116 user event2 2 ................................................................ 66
user 4 fault ................................................................... 187 user event2 3 ................................................................ 66
user A fault .................................................................. 188 user event2 4 ................................................................ 66
user A fault time ............................................. 99, 100, 101 user event2 5 ................................................................ 66
user A max .................................................... 99, 100, 101 user event2 6 ................................................................ 66
user A max fault ............................................. 99, 100, 101 user event2 7 ................................................................ 66
user A max volts ............................................ 99, 100, 101 user event2 8 ................................................................ 66
user A max warning ....................................... 99, 100, 101 user event2 items .......................................................... 65
user A min ..................................................... 98, 100, 101 user event2 latch ........................................................... 65
user A min fault .............................................. 99, 100, 101 user event2 time............................................................ 65
user A min volts ............................................. 99, 100, 101 user faults 0 .........................................................189, 190
user A min warning ........................................ 99, 100, 101 user faults 1 .........................................................189, 190
user A restart delay........................................ 99, 100, 102 user menu item 1 ........................................................ 170
user A rtu word ............................................................ 101 user menu item 10 ...................................................... 170
user A source ...........................98, 99, 100, 101, 102, 188 user menu item 2 ........................................................ 170
user A units.................................................................. 101 user menu item 3 ........................................................ 170
user A value........................................... 99, 100, 101, 188 user menu item 4 ........................................................ 170
user B fault .................................................................. 188 user menu item 5 ........................................................ 170
user B fault time ........................................................... 103 user menu item 6 ........................................................ 170
user B max .................................................................. 102 user menu item 7 ........................................................ 170
user B max fault ........................................................... 102 user menu item 8 ........................................................ 170
user B max volts .......................................................... 102 user menu item 9 ........................................................ 170
user B max warning ..................................................... 102 user speed adj .............................................................. 59
user B min ................................................................... 102 user speed adj action .................................................... 59
user B min fault ............................................................ 102 user speed adj pct ......................................................... 59
user B min volts ................................... 102, 123, 124, 125 user speed adj rate limit ........................................ 59, 105
user B min warning ...................................................... 102 user speed adj source ........................................... 59, 104
user B restart delay...................................................... 103 user speed control......................................................... 51
user B rtu word ............................................................ 102 User Speed Controller ................................................... 51
user B source .............................................. 102, 103, 188 user spm adj source ...................................................... 51
user B units.................................................................. 102 user spm adjust ............................................................. 51
user B value......................................................... 102, 188 USM files, System Monitor, UEdit® ............................... 13
user C fault .................................................................. 188 valve actuation delay ............................................161, 163
user C source .............................................................. 188 valve cmd .................................................................... 166
user C value ................................................................ 188 valve cmd state ....................................................162, 164
User Defined Display ..................................................... 31 valve command ........................................................... 166
User Display .................................................................. 13 valve control ......................... 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166
user display 1 item ......................................................... 31 valve fbk source ...................................................162, 164
user display 2 item ......................................................... 31 valve keypad high req .......................... 162, 163, 164, 165
user display 3 item ......................................................... 31 valve keypad low req ............................ 162, 163, 164, 165
user display 4 item ......................................................... 31 valve ki .................................................................162, 164
user event 1 latch .......................................................... 65 valve kp................................................................162, 164
user event1 1 ................................................................. 65 valve prs buildup rate ...........................................161, 164
user event1 2 ................................................................. 65 valve pulse auto ........................................... 162, 163, 165
user event1 3 ................................................................. 65 valve pulse close time .................................. 162, 163, 165
user event1 4 ................................................................. 65 valve pulse count .................................................163, 165

Index
207
valve pulse max prs ............................................. 163, 165 vsd bus voltage ..................................................... 72, 156
valve pulse min count .......................................... 163, 165 vsd cont kva .................................................................. 72
valve pulse min prs .............................................. 163, 165 vsd cont power .............................................................. 72
valve pulse offset ................................................. 163, 165 vsd max current............................................................. 71
valve pulse open time .................................. 162, 163, 165 vsd max kva .................................................................. 72
valve pulse prs release ........................................ 163, 165 vsd max power .............................................................. 72
valve pulse prs source ......................................... 162, 164 vsd max voltage ............................................................ 71
valve pwm level ................................................... 163, 165 vsd ovld current ............................................................. 71
valve pwm tol ....................................................... 163, 165 vsd ovld kva .................................................................. 72
valve req source .................................................. 162, 164 vsd ovld power .............................................................. 72
valve test cmd...................................................... 161, 164 vsd phase dir........................................................... 48, 71
ve collision fault ........................................................... 190 vsd rated current ........................................................... 71
vector source ................................... 69, 73, 171, 172, 177 vsd rtd volts ................................................................... 71
Velocity Chart ................................................................ 39 vsd run current .............................................................. 71
velocity units ................................................................ 126 vsd start current ............................................................ 71
vibration fault ............................................................... 185 vsd trip current .............................................................. 71
vibration input .............................................................. 185 vsd u current ................................................................. 71
vibrtn x fault time............................................................ 96 vsd uv voltage ............................................................... 71
vibrtn x max ................................................................... 95 vsd v current ................................................................. 71
vibrtn x max fault............................................................ 96 vsd vw voltage .............................................................. 71
vibrtn x max volts ........................................................... 95 vsd w current................................................................. 71
vibrtn x max warning ...................................................... 96 vsd wu voltage .............................................................. 71
vibrtn x min .................................................................... 95 warm current limit .......................................................... 51
vibrtn x min fault............................................................. 96 warm torque limit ........................................................... 51
vibrtn x min volts ............................................................ 95 Warning Conditions, viewing ....................................... 180
vibrtn x min warning ....................................................... 96 Warning Masks .. 33, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94,
vibrtn x restart delay ...................................................... 96 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 105, 155, 179
vibrtn x rtu word ............................................................. 96 Warning Masks, auto84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94,
95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100, 101, 103, 104, 105, 155
vibrtn x source ......................................................... 95, 96
Warning Masks, clear .................................................... 25
vibrtn x value ................................................................. 96
Warning Masks, set ...................................... 25, 63, 64, 65
vibrtn y fault time............................................................ 97
Warning Masks, viewing .............................................. 180
vibrtn y max ................................................................... 96
watchdog timer fault .................................................... 182
vibrtn y max fault............................................................ 97
water cut ..................................................................... 137
vibrtn y max volts ........................................................... 97
water cut fault time ...................................................... 104
vibrtn y max warning ...................................................... 97
water cut max.............................................................. 103
vibrtn y min .................................................................... 96
water cut max fault ...................................................... 103
vibrtn y min fault............................................................. 97
water cut max volts ..................................................... 103
vibrtn y min volts ............................................................ 96
water cut max warning ................................................ 104
vibrtn y min warning ....................................................... 97
water cut min............................................................... 103
vibrtn y restart delay ...................................................... 97
water cut min fault ....................................................... 103
vibrtn y rtu word ............................................................. 97
water cut min volts ...................................................... 103
vibrtn y source ......................................................... 96, 97
water cut min warning ................................................. 104
vibrtn y value ................................................................. 97
water cut restart delay ................................................. 104
visibility .......................................................................... 42
water cut rtu word........................................................ 103
visibility control .......................................... 12, 32, 42, 170
water cut source ...................................................103, 104
Visibility Control ............................................................. 42
water cut value ............................................................ 103
voltage limit comp .......................................................... 77
water flow monitor ......................................................... 44
voltage output pct .......................................................... 77
water production meter............................................ 44, 45
volume units .......................................................... 42, 169
water specific gravity ................................................... 137
vphz damping kp............................................................ 76
weekday and weekend operation .......................14, 43, 59
vphz damping max ......................................................... 77
weekday end time ......................................................... 60
vphz wn d ...................................................................... 77
weekday start time ........................................................ 60
vphz wn q ...................................................................... 77

Index
208
weekend end time.......................................................... 60 wi rpm 09 .................................................................... 147
weekend start time......................................................... 60 wi rpm 10 .................................................................... 148
well id abort torq .......................................................... 146 wi rpm 11 .................................................................... 148
well id auto................................................................... 146 wi rpm 12 .................................................................... 148
well id base friction torque ........................................... 147 wi rpm 13 .................................................................... 148
well id base lift torque .................................................. 147 wi rpm 14 .................................................................... 148
well id clear all ............................................................. 146 wi rpm 15 .................................................................... 148
well id date................................................................... 146 wi rpm 16 .................................................................... 148
well id decel time ......................................................... 146 wi rpm 17 .................................................................... 148
well id dwell time .......................................................... 146 wi rpm 18 .................................................................... 148
well id enable ............................................................... 146 wi rpm 19 .................................................................... 148
well id event ................................................................. 191 wi torq 00 .................................................................... 148
well id filter ................................................................... 146 wi torq 01 .................................................................... 148
Well ID Menu ............................................................... 144 wi torq 02 .................................................................... 148
well id req speed .......................................................... 146 wi torq 03 .................................................................... 148
well id rev decel time ................................................... 146 wi torq 04 .................................................................... 148
well id rev speed .......................................................... 146 wi torq 05 .................................................................... 148
WELL ID RUN ............................................................... 43 wi torq 06 .................................................................... 148
well id state .................................................................. 146 wi torq 07 .................................................................... 148
well id table speed ....................................................... 147 wi torq 08 .................................................................... 148
well id table torque ....................................................... 147 wi torq 09 .................................................................... 148
Well ID Test ...................... 43, 72, 134, 146, 147, 172, 191 wi torq 10 .................................................................... 148
well id time................................................................... 146 wi torq 11 .................................................................... 148
well test flow ................................................................ 137 wi torq 12 .................................................................... 149
well test pressure ......................................................... 137 wi torq 13 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 00 ..................................................................... 147 wi torq 14 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 01 ..................................................................... 147 wi torq 15 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 02 ..................................................................... 147 wi torq 16 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 03 ..................................................................... 147 wi torq 17 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 04 ..................................................................... 147 wi torq 18 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 05 ..................................................................... 147 wi torq 19 .................................................................... 149
wi rpm 06 ..................................................................... 147 Wiring............................................................................ 15
wi rpm 07 ..................................................................... 147 Wiring Standards........................................................... 15
wi rpm 08 ..................................................................... 147 Xless (transducerless) ................................................... 36

Index
209
This page was intentionally left blank

Index
210

Applications Manual 302 - PCP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Applications Manual 302 - PCP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Applications Manual 302 - PCP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

806321.

with AHD™ Dynamic

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

2 About the Manual ............................................................................................................ 10

3 Application Overview ..................................................................................................... 12

4 Application Wiring .......................................................................................................... 15

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

4.5.4 Control Module Analog Output Connection (TB2)) .......................................................................... 21

5 Operator Interface ........................................................................................................... 24

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

5.3.8.7.14 UEdit® Utility ................................................................................................................................... 38

6 Application Dictionary Menus ....................................................................................... 42

7 System Initialization...................................................................................................... 176

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

7.2 Motor Parameter Entry .................................................................................................................. 176

8 Faults, Warnings and Events ....................................................................................... 179

9 Tables ............................................................................................................................. 192

10 Index ............................................................................................................................... 193

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

1.2 Conventions Used

1.2.1 Attention Symbol Definition

1.3 General Precautions

1.4 Service Precautions

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

1.5 Application Precautions

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

1.6 Safe Service Practices

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

2.2.2 What is not covered

2.3 Intended Audience

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

3.2 Hardware Requirements

3.2.1 Drive Models

3.2.2 Control Module

3.2.3 Optional Modules

3.2.4 Operator Interface

3.3 Application Description

3.3.1 Application Interface

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

3.3.1.1 UEdit® Software

3.4 Application Features

3.4.2 System Monitors

3.4.3 System Data Collection

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

3.4.5 Daily Gauging

3.4.6 Operational Modes

3.4.7 System Controllers

3.4.8 AHD™ Dynamic Bus Regulation

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

4.2 Wiring Standards and Codes

4.2.1 Wiring Precautions

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

4.2.4 Compact 100MHz Control Module Connectors

4.3 Control Module Serial Input Connection

4.3.1 Pull-up, Pull-down and Terminating Resistors

Unico PCP Application Manual 8 March 2012

Compact 100 MHz